JVC GY-HD200E-CHE, GY-HD200U-CHU, GY-HD201E-CHE User Manual

HD CAMERA RECORDER

E

INTRODUCTION

CONTROLS,
INDICATORS AND
CONNECTORS

PREPARATIONS

PREPARATIONS
FOR OPERATION

SETTING AND
ADJUSTMENTS
BEFORE SHOOTING

SHOOTING
OPERATION

PLAYBACK MODE

GY-HD200U/CHU
GY-HD200E/CHE
GY-HD201E/CHE

Thank you for purchasing this JVC product. Before operating this
device, please read the instructions carefully to ensure the best
possible performance.

For C usto mer Use:

Enter below the Serial No. which is located on the body.
Retain this information for future reference.
Model No.
Serial No.

INSTRUCTIONS

*The illustration shows the GY-HD200U/

GY-HD200E/GY-HD201E HD CAMERA
RECORDER with the provided lens,
viewfinder and microphone attached.

USING EXTERNAL
COMPONENTS

MENU SCREENS

FEATURES OF THE
CAMERA SECTION

OTHERS

LST0512-001A

LST0512-001A© 2006 Victor Company of Japan, Limited LST0512-001A

Important Safeguards

1. Read all of these instructions.

2. Keep these instructions.

3. Heed all warnings.

4. Follow all instructions.

5. Do not use this apparatus near water.

6. Clean only with dry cloth.

7. Do not block any ventilation openings. Install in accor­dance with the manufacturer’s instructions.

8. Do not install near any heat sources such as radia­tors, heat resisters, stoves, or other apparatus
(including amplifiers) that produce heat.

9. Do not defeat the safety purpose of the polarized or
grounding-type plug. A polarized plug has two blades
with one wider than the other. A grounding type plug
has two blades and a third grounding prong.
The wide blade or the third prong are provided for
your safety.
If the provided plug does not fit into your outlet, con­sult an electrician for replacement of the obsolete out­let.

10. Protect th e power cord from bei ng walked on or
pinched particularly at plug, convenience receptacles,
and the point where they exit from the apparatus.

11. On ly use attachments/acces sories specified by the
manufacturer.

12. Use only with the cart, stand, tripod,
bracket, or table specified by the
manufacturer, or sold with the appa­ratus.
When a cart is used, use caution
when moving the cart/apparatus
combination to avoid injury tip-over.

13. Unplug this apparatus during light­ning storms or when unused for long periods of time.

14. Refer all servicing to qualified service personnel. Ser­vicing is required when the apparatus has been dam­aged in any way, such as power-supply cord or plug
id damaged, liquid has been spilled objects have
fallen into the apparatus, the apparatus has been
exposed to rain or moisture, does not operate nor­mally, or has been dropped.

Safety Precautions

FOR USA AND CANADA

CAUTION

RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK

DO NOT OPEN

CAUTION: TO REDUCE THE RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK,

DO NOT REMOVE COVER (OR BACK).
NO USER SERVICEABLE PARTS INSIDE.

REFER SERVICING TO QUALIFIED SERVICE PERSONNEL.

The lightning flash with arrowhead symbol, within
an equilateral triangle is intended to alert the user
to the presence of uninsulated “dangerous voltage”
within the product’s enclosure that may be of suffi­cient magnitude to constitute a risk of electric shock
to persons.

The exclamation point within an equilateral triangle
is intended to alert the user to the presence of
important operating and maintenance (servicing)
instructions in the literature accompanying the
appliance.

INFORMATION FOR USA

INFORMATION:

This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the
limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the
FCC Rules.
These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection
against harmful interference in a residential installation. This
equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency
energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the
instructions, may cause harmful interference to radio communi­cations. However, there is no guarantee that interference will
not occur in a particular installation.
If th is equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or
television reception, which can be determined by turning the
equipment off and on, the user is encouraged to try to correct
the interference by one or more of the following measures:

z Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna.
z Increase the separation between the equipment and

receiver.

z Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different

from that to which the receiver is connected.

z Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/TV technician for

help.

CAUTION:

CHANGES OR MODIFICATIONS NOT APPROVED BY JVC
COULD VOID USER’S AUTHORITY TO OPERATE THE
EQUIPMENT.

THIS DEVICE COMPLIES WITH PART 15 OF THE FCC
RULES.
OPERATION IS SUBJECT TO THE FOLLOWING TWO CON­DITIONS: (1) THIS DEVICE MAY NOT CAUSE HARMFUL
INTERFERENCE, AND (2) THIS DEVICE MUST ACCEPT
ANY INTERFERENCE RECEIVED, INCLUDING INTERFER­ENCE THAT MAY CAUSE UNDESIRED OPERATION.

INFORMATION (FOR CANADA)
RENSEIGNEMENT (POUR CANADA)

This Class B digital apparatus complies with Canadian ICES-

003.

Cet appareil numérique de la Classe B est conforme à la
norme NMB-003 du Canada.

WARNING:
TO REDU CE THE RISK OF FIRE OR ELEC­TRIC SHOCK, DO NOT EXPOSE THIS
APPLIANCE TO RAIN OR MOISTURE.

This unit should be used with 12V DC only.
CAUTION:
To p re vent electric s hocks and fire hazards , do NOT
use any other power source.

NOTE:

The rating plate (serial number plate) is on the bottom of the un it.

CAUTION:

To prevent electric shock, do not open the cabinet. No user ser­viceable parts inside. Refer servicing to qualified service person­nel.

AVERTISSEMENT :
POUR EVITER LES RISQUES D’INCENDIE
OU D’ELECTROCUTION, NE PAS EXPOSER
L’AP PAREIL A L’HUMIDITE OU A LA PLUIE.

Ce magnétoscope ne doit être utilisé que sur du cou­rant direct en 12V.
ATTENTION :
Afin d’eviter tout resque d’incendie ou d’électro cu­tion, ne pas utillser d’autre s sources d’alimentation
électrique.

REMARQUE:

La plaque signalétique (plaque du numéro desérie) est située sur
le cadre inférieur de l’unité.

Due to design modifications, data given in this instruction book are
subject to possible change without prior notice.

The apparatus shall not be exposed to dripping or splashing and
that no objects filled with liquids, such as vases, shall be placed
close to the apparatus.

Worded - “CAUTION - Danger of explosion if battery is incorrectly
replaced. Replace only with the same or equivalent type.”

I

II

Safety Precautions (Cont’d)

FOR EUROPE

This equipment is in conformity with the provisions and protection
requirements of the corresponding European Directives.
This equipment is designed for professional video appliances and
can be used in the following environments:

z residential area (in houses)
z commercial and light industry; e.g. offices or theatres
z urban outdoors

In order to keep the best performance and furthermore for electro­magnetic compatibility we recommend to use cables not exceeding
the following length:

Camera

Port Cable Length

DC IN Exclusive Cable 2 m

VIDEO Coaxial Cable 3 m

B, PR Coaxial Cable 3 m

Y, P

AUDIO INPUT1,
INPUT2

AUDIO OUT CH1,
CH2

Phones1, 2 Exclusive Cable 2 m

IEEE1394 (HDV/DV)

REMOTE Exclusive Cable 5 m

Caution: Where there are s trong electromagnetic waves or mag­netism, for example near a radio or TV transmitter, transformer,
motor, etc., the picture and the sound may be disturbed. In such
case, please keep the apparatus away from the sources of the dis­turbance.

Dear Customer,

This apparatus is in conformance with the valid European direc­tives and standards regarding electromagnetic compatibility and
electrical safety.

European representative of Victor Company of Japan Limited is:
JVC Technology Centre Europe GmbH
P.O. Box 10 05 52
61145 Friedberg
Germany

Shielded Cable 3 m

Shielded Cable 3 m

Exclusive Cable 4.5 m

WARNING:
TO REDUCE THE RISK OF FIRE OR
ELECTRIC SHOCK, DO NOT EXPOSE THIS
APPLIANCE TO RAIN OR MOISTURE.

This unit should be used with 12V DC only.
CAUTION:
To p re vent electric s hocks and fire hazards , do NOT
use any other power source.

NOTE:

The rating plate (serial number plate) is on the bottom of the unit.

CAUTION:

To prevent electric shock, do not open the cabinet. No user ser­viceable parts inside. Refer servicing to qualified service person­nel.

Due to design modifications, data given in this instruction book are
subject to possible change without prior notice.

The apparatus shall not be exposed to dripping or splashing and
that no objects filled with liquids, such as vases, shall be placed
close to the apparatus.

Worded - “CAUTION - Danger of explosion if battery is incorrectly
replaced. Replace only with the same or equivalent type.”

Information for Users on Disposal of
Old Equipment

Attention:

This symbol is only valid in the European
Union.

[European Union]

This symbol indicates that the electrical and electronic equip­ment should not be disposed as general household waste at
its end-of-life. Instead, the product should be handed over to
the applicable collection point for the rec ycling of electric al
and electronic equipment for proper treatment, recovery and
recycling in accordance with your national legislation.

By disposing of this product correctly, you will help to con­serve natural resources and will help prevent potent ial nega­tive effects on the environment and human health which
could otherwise be caused by inappropriate waste handling
of this product. For more information about collection point
and recycling of this product, please contact your local
municipal office, your ho usehold waste disposal service or
the shop where you purchased the product.
Penalties may be applicable for incorrect disposal of this
waste, in accordance with national legislation.

(Business users)

If you wish to dispose of this product, please visit our web
page www.jvc-europe.com
take-back of the product.

[Other Countries outside the European Union]

If you wish to dispose of this product, please do so in accor­dance with applicable national legislation or other rules in
your country for the treatment of old electrical and electronic
equipment.

to obtain information about the

III

IV

Thank you for purchasing the JVC HD CAMERA RECORDER.
These instructions are for the GY-HD200U/CHU, GY­HD200E/CHE and GY-HD201E/CHE.

•A lens is included with the GY-HD200U, GY-HD200E and
GY-HD201E.

•A lens is not included with the GY-HD200CHU, GY­HD200CHE and GY-HD201CHE.

•IEEE1394 input is possible with the GY-HD200U/CHU and
GY-HD201E/CHE.

Explanations concerning unique GY-HD200U/CHU and GY­HD201E/CHE functions are set off by the (GY-HD200U/GY­HD201E only) notice.
Information applicable only to the GY-HD200U/CHU is
marked by “(U model only)”.
Information applicable only to theGY-HD200E/CHE, GY­HD201E/CHE is marked by “(E model only)”.

Model (Accessories)

GY-HD200U
GY-HD200CHU

GY-HD200E
GY-HD200CHE

GY-HD201E
GY-HD201CHE

This device is a HDV/DV video system format camera
recorder.
Videocassettes marked with the A symbol can be used.

The following phenomena may occur when tapes recorded
on other units (including another GY-HD200U/GY-HD200E/
GY-HD201E) are recorded or played back on this device.

•The transient section between scenes recorded on other
units and those recorded on this device may appear dis­turbed.

•Digital noise may appear during playback due to track­ing errors.

•This device records and plays back in the SP mode.
Recording or playback in the LP mode is not possible.
(In DV format)

•Due to manufacturing dispersion of tapes, we recom­mend not to record pictures within the first 2 to 3 min­utes from the beginning of the tape.

•Before recording important scenes, be sure to perform a
test recording and confirm that both video and audio are
recorded correctly.

•Recorded video and audio contents are for private use.
Other use may infringe on the rights of copyright hold­ers.

•JVC cannot assume liabilities that may derive from the
impossibility of normal recording or playback of video or
audio due to malfunction of this device or the videocas­sette.

*All product names in this manual are trademarks or regis-

tered trademarks of their respective companies.
Marks such as ™, ® and © are not used in this manual.

Lens Availability

Yes

Yes

Yes

No

No

No

/

IEEE1394

Input

Yes
Yes

NoNoE model

Yes
Yes

Applicable

Model

U model

ACCESSORIES

(Excluding the CHU/CHE

model)

Lens

X See pages 10 and 33

Core Filter

For Viewfinder Cable

X See page 34

SD memory card
X See page 34

Microphone

X See page 33

Clamp Filters ×4

For DC (×2)/Earphone/

IEEE1394 Cable

X See pages 12, 36 and 63

MAIN FEATURES

This device records in HDV format or DV format. DV for­mat can record and play back SD (Standard Definition)
video on Mini DV videocassettes.
HDV format can record and play back HD (High Definition)
video on Mini DV videocassettes.
There are two types of recording formats within HDV f ormat.
HDV 720p (720 effective scan lines, progressive scan)
HDV 1080i (1080 effective scan lines, interlaced scan)

This device supports HDV 720p format. (HDV 720p)
HDV and are trademarks of Sony Corporation
and Victor Company of Japan, Limited.

•24p mode shooting function
In HDV format, it records in 24p mode.
It uses a 2:3:2:3 pulldown when recording to tape and con­verts the images to 60 frames. Component output is con­verted to 60 frames during playback as well.
24p DV format video uses a 2:3:2:3 pulldown (24p Mode).
A 2:3:3:2 pulldown (24p Advanced Mode) is also supported.
It can shoot with the same number of frames as movie
film.

•Tapes recorded in the DVCAM format can only be played
back (simple playback).
Recording in the DVCAM format is not possible.
DVCAM is a registered trademark of Sony Corporation.

•60 Hz/50 Hz HD or HDTV signals
Supports both 60 Hz/50 Hz HD or HDTV signals.
You can select this in a menu screen.

•Cross-convert video output
You can output converted video from the video output con­nectors. You can select this in a men u screen.

•Focus assist function
Enables easy and accurate focusing during shooting.

•User buttons added
Enables you to switch camera settings instantly to suit the
shooting conditions .

•Time code reader/generator
The built-in time code reader/generator can be used to
record the time code and user’s bits.

•Built-in large 3.5" color LCD display
In addition to displaying the camera image and the play­back image, the LCD monitor shows the status screens,
menu screens for settings, and alarm indications.

•Built-in monitor speaker for audio checking
The input audio can be monitored in recording or EE mode.
The playback sound can be monitored in the playback
mode. The speaker also outputs an alarm tone in case an
abnormal condition occurs in this device.

•Recording chec k function for convenient recording review
function

•Camera section designed with 3-CCD system for high­quality picture
1/3" 3-CCD with 1,110,000 effective pixels employed. Dig­ital signal processing for reproduction of HDV/DV high­quality picture.

•Multi-Zone Auto Iris Detection Circuit
Multi-zone auto iris detection circuit ensures optimum iris
position even in back light conditions or when a bright sub­ject moves in a frame.

•Safety Zone indication in viewfinder

•Zebra pa ttern video level indication in viewfinder

•Full Auto Shooting (FAS) function
Eliminates the need for troublesome switch or filter opera­tions by automatically providing a wide range of compati­bility with shooting conditions that change as you move
between indoors and outdoors or between bright and dark
locations.

• ND filters for 1/4ND, 1/16ND provided

• IEEE1394 connector
IEEE1394 connector (6-pin) provided. Enables transfer of
digital data to other equipment provided with IEEE1394
connector, such as a non-linear editing system. (Power
cannot be supplied.)

•1/3" bayonet type lens

•Built-in color bars (ARIB (multi-format color bars), SMPTE/
EBU type)

•Shutter speeds and menus can be selected using a dial,
making it very easy to use.

•Variable scan shutter
There is no flicker when shooting computer screens and
other non-NTSC/PAL format screens.

•Slow shutter
Makes it possible to brightly shoot video of dark subjects
with little motion by accumulating the images.

•Backup recording function
Continuous extended recording is possible by connecting
to HDV/DV devices.

2

3

CONTENTS

ACCESSORIES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2

MAIN FEATURES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3

INTRODUCTION

Precautions for Proper Use . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6

Routine and Periodical Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7

Precautions for Use of Head Cleaning Tape . . . . . . . . . . . . 7

Battery Pack to be Used . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8

Videocassette to be Used . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8

For recording and storing videotapes in the best

condition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8

Condensation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9

Characteristic CCD Phenomena . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9

CONTROLS, INDICATORS AND
CONNECTORS

ZOOM Lens . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10

Front Section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11

Rear Section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12

LCD Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13

Right Side Section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14

Left Side Section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .16

Top Section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .18

Recording and Image Output Formats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .20

Indications on the LCD Monitor and in the Viewfinder . . . . 22

Status Screens . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .22

Status Screens in the Camera Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . .23

Status Screen in VTR MODE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .28

Magnified Status Indications on the LCD Monitor. . . . . 29

Auto White Balance Indication

(Camera mode only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .30

Menu Setting Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30

Alarm Message Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .30

Safety Zone Indication (Camera mode only) . . . . . . . .30

Switching between the LCD Screen and Viewfinder

Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .31

PREPARATIONS

Basic System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32

Attaching the Zoom Lens . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .33

Attaching the Microphone (Provided) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .33

How to Attach the Viewfinder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .33

Inserting an SD Memory Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .34

Inserting an SD Memory Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34

Taking out the SD memory card. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .34

About SD Memory Cards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .34

Attaching the Tripod Base (Optional) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .35

AC Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .36

Charging the Built-in Battery. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .36

Battery Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .37

Attaching the Battery. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .37

Removing the Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .37

Precautions for the Battery Operation. . . . . . . . . . . . . .38

Remaining Battery Power Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .38

Operating Time with Battery Pack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .38

Precautions for the Battery Pack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .38

Recharging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .38

PREPARATIONS FOR OPERATION

Turning the Power ON . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .39

Turning the Power ON . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .39

Turning the Power OFF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .39

Loading/Unloading the Cassette . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .40

Cassette Loading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .40

Unloading the Cassette. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .40

Setting and Displaying the Date and Time . . . . . . . . . . . .41

Setting the Date and Time Style. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .41

Setting the Date and Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .42

Displaying the Time and Date on the Screen . . . . . . . .42

Displaying Time Code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .43

Time code input entered the IEEE1394 connector

(GY-HD200U/GY-HD201E only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .43

Presetting and Recording of Time Code . . . . . . . . . . . . . .44

Setting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .44

Presetting time code data. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .45

Presetting user’s bit data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .45

Zero-resetting the Time Code or User’s Bit Data . . . . .45

Presetting the Time Code from the LCD Screen . . . . . . . .46

Recording Time Codes in Continuation of Time Codes

Recorded on Tape . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .47

Playing Back Time Code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .47

Synchronizing with the Time Code of the IEEE1394

(DV)-Connected Master Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .48

Screen Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .49

Viewfinder Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .49

Back Focus Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .50

White Balance Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .51

White Balance Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .51

Full Auto White Balance (FAW) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .51

White Shading Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52

SETTING AND ADJUSTMENTS BEFORE
SHOOTING

Setting the Video Format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .53

Setting the FRAME RATE Item. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .53

Camera Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .54

Screen Size (4:3/16:9) Mode Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .54

Audio Input Signal Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .55

Selecting the CH-2 channel input connector. . . . . . . . .55

Selecting the audio signal input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .55

Adjusting Audio during Recording . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .55

Monitoring Audio during Recording . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .56

SHOOTING OPERATION

Basic Recording Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .57

If the Record-Standby Mode Continues . . . . . . . . . . . . 58

Checking Recorded Contents in Record-Standby Mode

(Recording Check Function) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .58

HEADER REC Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .59

PLAYBACK MODE

Playback Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .61

Fast-Forward, Rewind . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .61

Search . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61

Outputting Audio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62

USING EXTERNAL COMPONENTS

Connecting the Video Signal Cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .63

Connecting the IEEE1394 Cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .63

Dubbing with AV Devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .64

HDV/DV Dubbing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65

Backup Recording . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .67

Connect a Remote Control Unit (RM-LP55/RM-LP57) . . .68

MENU SCREENS

Menu Screen Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70

Setting Menu Screens . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .72

TOP MENU Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73

VIDEO FORMAT[1/2] Menu Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .74

VIDEO FORMAT[2/2] Menu Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .76

CAMERA OPERATION Menu Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77

CAMERA PROCESS[1/2] Menu Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78

CAMERA PROCESS[2/2] Menu Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79

ADVANCED PROCESS Menu Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .80

COLOR MATRIX ADJUST Menu Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . .81

SKIN COLOR ADJUST Menu Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .81

WHITE BALANCE Menu Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .82

SWITCH MODE Menu Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83

AUDIO/MIC[1/2] Menu Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .84

AUDIO/MIC[2/2] Menu Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .85

LCD/VF[1/4] Menu Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .86

LCD/VF[2/4] Menu Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .87

LCD/VF[3/4] Menu Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .88

LCD/VF[4/4] Menu Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .89

TC/UB/CLOCK Menu Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .90

HEADER REC Menu Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91

TIME/DATE Menu Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .92

OTHERS[1/2] Menu Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .93

OTHERS[2/2] Menu Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .94

FILE MANAGE Menu Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .96

Displaying the FILE MANAGE menu screen . . . . . . . .96

Loading a menu settings file. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .96

Saving settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .97

Resetting the menu settings to the factory settings . . .98

Initializing (formatting) an SD memory card . . . . . . . . .98

FEATURES OF THE CAMERA SECTION

How to Use Skin Detail . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .99

Outputting Color Bars . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .101

OTHERS

Warnings and Responses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .102

Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .106

How to Display the Hour Meter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .107

Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .108

EXTERNAL DIMENSIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .109

4

5

INTRODUCTION

Precautions for Proper
Use

•Supply voltage
Make sure that the power is between 11 V and 15 V DC. If
the power voltage is too low, abnormal color and
increased noise may oc cur.

•Allowable ambient temperature and humidity
Be sure to use this device within the allowable tempera­ture range of 0°C to 40°C and a relative humidity of 30% to
80%. Using this device at a temperature or humidity out­side the allowable ra nges could result not only in malfunc­tion but the impact on the CCD elements could be serious
as small white spots may be generated.

•Strong electromagnetic waves or magnetism
Noise may appear in the picture or audio and/or the colors
may be incorrect if the camera is used near a radio or tele­vision transmitting antenna, in places where strong mag­netic fields are generated by transformers, motors, etc., or
near devices emitti ng radio waves, such as transceivers or
cellular phones.

•Use of wireless microphone near the camera
When a wireless microphone or wireless microphone
tuner is used near the camera during recording, the tuner
could pick up noise.

•Avoid using or placing this device in places;

•subject to extreme h eat or cold;

•with excessive dirt or dust;

•with high humidity or moisture;

•subject to smoke or vapour such as near a cooking

stove;

•subject to strong vibrations or on an unstable surface;

•also do not leave this device for long hour s in a parked

car under direct sunlight or near room heating equip­ment.

•Do not leave this device where it is subject to radiation or
X-rays or where corrosive gasses occur.

•Protect this device from being splashed with water (espe­cially when shooting in the rain).

•Protect this device from being wet when shooting on a
beach.
In addition, salt and sand may adhere to the camera body.
Be sure to clean the camera after use.

•Protect this device against penetration of dust when using
it in a place subject to sandy dust.

•Optical perf ormance of lens
Due to the optical performance of the lens, color diver­gence phenomena (magnification chromatic aberration)
may occur at the periphery of the image.
This is not a camera malfunction.

•Noise may appear in the viewfinder when switching
between the playback picture and the EE picture.

•Use this device in an upright position.
If placed on its side, heat release efficiency will deterio­rate, adversely affecting the tape transport. Depending on
circumstances the tape may a lso be damaged.

•Vibrations
Colors may fail to appear and/or the image and sound
may be disturbed during VTR playback in locations sub­jected to strong vibrations.

•Precautions for transportation
Do not drop or hit this device against a hard object.

•Remove the videocassette before transporting this device.

•Do not insert an object other than a videocassette in the
cassette insertion s lot. Be sure to close t he cassette cover
when this device is not to be used for a long period.

•Do not set the POWER switch to OFF or remove the
power cable during recording or playback. Otherwise the
tape may be damaged.

•The sensitivity level of the provided microphone is set
lower than the reference input (–60 dBs) setting.

•When this device is not in use, be sure to set the POWER
switch to OFF in order to reduce power consumption.

•Cleaning the body: Wipe body with a dry, soft cloth. To
prevent deformation of the body, etc. and to avoid opera­tion hazards, do not allow volatile liquids suc h as benzine
and thinner to touch the body, and do not wipe it with a
cloth soaked in such a liquid. When it is extremely dirty,
soak the cloth in a solution of neutral detergent, wipe the
body with it, and then use a clean cloth to remove the
detergent.

•The camera may not show stable pictures in the period
immediately after the power is turned on, but this is not a
malfunction.

•A sound occurs when the built-in head cleaner that runs
when you load or eject a videocassette operates, but this
is not a malfunction.

•The LCD monitor and the viewfinder screen
The LCD monitor and the viewfinder screen are manufac­tured using high-precision technology. Black spots may
appear on the LCD monitor and the viewfinder screen, or
red, blue, green and/or white spots may not turn off. How­ever, this is not a malfunction and these spots are not
recorded on the tape.

• If you use this device continuously for a long period of
time, the characters displayed in the viewfinder may tem­porarily remain on the screen. This is not recorded on the
tape. In addition, they are no longer displayed if you turn
the power off and then on again.

• If you use this device in a cold location, the images may
appear to lag on the screen, but this is not a malfunction.
This is not recorded on the tape.

•Do not insert fingers or foreign objects into the cassette
insertion slot as this may result in personal injury or dam­age to the mechanism.

•To prevent damage to the connectors, use this device with
the connector covers on when you are not using the video/
audio signal output connectors.

CAUTION

•Do not point the lens or viewfinder directly at the sun or
other strong light source.

•Eye damage could result.

• If the lens or viewfinder is left pointed at the sun, rays

may collect inside this device and cause damage or a
fire.

•When carrying the camera, be sure to hold the carrying
handle. Holding the lens or viewfinder may result in
damage.

Routine and Periodical
Maintenance

This device incorporates precision mechanical parts, which
will collect dirt, wear out and deteriorate as this device is
used. After this device has been used for a long period even
in a normal environment, the heads , drums and tape tr ans­port mechanisms also collect dirt. Especially, dust which
penetrates the inside of the VTR section during outdoor use
will promote the wear and deterioration of mechanical parts
by causing poor contact between tape and heads or failing to
maintain the video and audio quality at high levels. To pre­vent wear and deterioration, clean the mechanical parts
using a head cleaning tape as routine maintenance. How­ever, cleaning with a head cleaning tape alone is not enough
for cleaning the entire tape transport mechanism, so it is also
recommended to apply periodical maintenance (inspection)
to prevent the sudden occurrence of failure. As the replace­ment, adjustment and servicing of parts require advanced
skill and equipment, please consult the person in charge of
professional video equipment at your nearest JVC-autho­rized service agent.

Head Cleaning

•To maintain beautiful pictures and sound, be sure to use a
head cleaning tape to clean the head periodically.
X See “Precautions for Use of Head Cleaning Tape”. If
head cleaning is not performed periodically, a type of
mosaic noise called block noise may appear in the picture
or sound may be interrupted.

•Please use cleaning tape produced by JVC. Do not use
head cleaning tapes other than specified.
X See “Precautions for Use of Head Cleani ng Tape”
about how to use the head cleaning tape and precautions
for use of the head cleaning tape.

•When dust adheres to the heads, the warning message
“HEAD CLEANING REQUIRED!” is displayed on the LCD
monitor, and in the viewfinder during playback and record­ing check using the RET button on the lens section.

Periodical Maintenance

Contents : Check or replace the following mechanical parts

according to the running time.

Usage Time 500H 1000H 1500H 2000H

Drum assembly (includ­ing heads)

Tape guides, rollers GEEF
Belt gears HEE F
Drive parts HHE F

G: Clean, check and adjust.
E: Clean and check. Replace as required.
F: Replace.

Block Noise

GEEF

•The maintenance contents vary depending on the operat­ing environment and method. Therefore, the data in the
chart should be considered as a reference.

Time management
The accumulated running time of this device can be con­firmed with the hour meter display (which shows the accu­mulated drum and fan motor running time). X See “How to
Display the Hour Meter” on page 107.

For consultations related to the maintenance planning or
cost, please contact the person in charge of professional
video equipment at your nearest JVC-authorized service
agent.

Precautions for Use of
Head Cleaning Tape

Please use cleaning tape produced by JVC.
Adhere to the following precautions when using the head
cleaning tape.

1. Insert the cleaning tape .

Press the PLAY/STILL button after the cleaning tape is
fully loaded.
The tape runs for 10 seconds at a time in the PLAY
mode. (The tape stops automatically and then this device
enters the STOP mode.)

2. Do not use the tape more than four times at the most for

each cleaning.

 Use the following chart as a guide for periodical head

cleaning.

Running

Operating envi­ronment

Yardstick for
use of cleaning
tape

Note 1) When used in a low humidity environment, head

Note 2) If an M-DV80 tape is used immediately after head

Note 3) Use the cleaning tape in the room temperature

Note 4) The cleaning tape case contains instructions for

Note 5) If the “HEAD CLEANING REQUIRED!” does not

Low
temperature

0°C to 10°C 10°C to 35°C 35°C to 40°C

1 to 2 times ev­ery 5 hours

cleaning should be conducted at intervals half of
those given in the chart above.

cleaning, the “HEAD CLEANING REQUIRED!”
indicator may remain on. In this case, let the tape
run as the indicator will turn off after the tape has
run for a while.

(10°C to 35°C).

use of the cleaning tape . However, some of these
instructions diffe r from the contents of this sheet.
When using the cleaning tape, please follow the
instructions of this sheet.

disappear after repeated head cleanings, the
recording tape may be abnormal. Avoid excessive
repeated use of the head cleaning tape.

Room
temperature

1 to 2 times ev­ery 20 to 30
hours

High
temperature

1 to 2 times ev­ery 5 hours

6

7

INTRODUCTION

Battery Pack to be Used

This device can use any of the following batteries. (Factory
setting)

U model: Anton Bauer battery
E model: IDX battery

Recommended batteries

U model: Dionic 90 (Anton Bauer)
E model: Endura-7 (IDX)

CAUTION

Use only the recommended batteries.
If a heavy battery is used, the battery may fall out depend­ing on the way the HD camera recorder is used.

Videocassette to be Used

•Use JVC’s videocassette tapes marked with the A

symbol.

•Mini DV videocassette : M-DV63HD

* Do not use M-DV80.

•Videocasse ttes cannot be used upside down.

•Avoid storing a videocassette with its tape not being com­pletely wound, as this may damage the tape. Rewind it to
the beginning before placing a cassette into storage.

•Store videocassettes in a place with little humidity and
good ventilation where mould does not form.

•After a videocassette tape h as been used repeatedly, it
becomes unable to maintain full performance due to an
increase in noise caused by dropouts, etc. Do not continue
to use a dirty or damaged tape, as this will reduce the
rotary head life.

•Videocasse tte tapes with the A symbol are provid ed
with a switch on the back to prevent accidental erasure.

•Slide the switch to SAVE to protect the required recording
in the tape from being overwritten.

•To record on the tape, slide the switch to REC.

M-DV63PROHD

Switch

For recording and storing
videotapes in the best con­dition

Observe the following instructions for the best recording and
storage of videotapes.

•Take care of the conditions of handling videotapes. It is
recommended that you record and store videotapes in the
environment below.

Recording

Temperature 17°C to 25°C 15°C to 23°C 15°C to 19°C

Humidity 30% to 70% 40% to 55% 25% to 35%

Hourly tempera-

ture change

Hourly humidity

change

•Do not leave the videotapes neglected for a long period. If
videotapes are left wound for a long period of time, it may
result in distortion of the tape. Also it may cause tape-to­tape adhesion (known as blocking). It is recommended
that videotapes be unspooled and rewound once a year
for refreshing.

•When tapes are not in use, store them in cases and on
end. Storage cases protect videotapes from humidity, dust
and ultraviolet light. Keep tapes in cases and do not store
them lying flat. When housed in a horizontal position, pres­sure from other tapes can cause distortions and deforma­tions of the tape edges.

Less than

10°C

Less than

10%

Storage

Short period

(Up to 10

Long period

years)

(Over 10

years)

HH

HH

Condensation

•If this device has been coole d down in a cold place and is
then carried to a warm place, the moisture contained in
the warm air may adhere to the head drum or tape guides
and be cooled into water droplets. This phenomenon is
referred to as condensation (dew). When this occurs, the
head drum and tape guides are covered with droplets
allowing the tape to be stuck to them, leading to tape dam­age.

•Condensation occurs in the following cases:

•When this device is suddenly

moved from a cold place to a
warm place.

•When a room heater has just

started or when this device is
exposed directly to cold air from
an air conditioner.

•When this device is placed in a

very humid place.

Do not leave the videocassette inserted when moving the
camera under conditions where the temperature environ­ment changes.
After moving this device, do not use until the internal parts
have stabilized.

•“CONDENSATION ON DRUM” is displayed on the LCD
monitor and in the viewfinder when condensation occurs
in this device.

Keep the power on until the warning message disappears.
If the power is turned off while the warning message is dis­played, condensation may remain in the device even if the
warning message is not displayed. Wait until this device is
completely dry before using.

•Pay attention to condensation even before the condensa­tion indication appears.
As condensation forms gradually, the condensation indica­tion may not appear for the first 10-15 minutes after con­densation has formed inside.
In an extremely cold place, the condensation could freeze
and turn into frost. In such a case, it takes an additional 2­3 hours for the frost to first melt into condensation and
then to be dissolved.

•To prevent condensation
When moving this de vice from one plac e to another wher e
the temperatures are greatly deferent, first remove the vid-

Head drum

Video tape

eocassette, place this device in a tightly sealed vinyl bag,
and then move it to a new environment.
To e ns u re no condensation occurs, allow the temperature
of this device in the bag to reach that of the new environ­ment before using it.

Characteristic CCD Phe­nomena

Smear and Blooming
Due to the physical structure of a CCD it is possible to induce
vertical streaking (called “smear”) when shooting an
extremely bright light source. Another effect is the expansion
of light around a bright light or object (called “b looming”).
The CCD employed in this device is characterized by induc­ing very little smear or blooming. Nevertheless, please take
note that smear or blooming may be induced when shooting
a bright light source.

Monitor screen

Moire or Aliasing
Shooting stripes or fine patterns may cause a jagged effect
or a banding in fine mesh patterns.

White dots
High temperatures can cause CCD sensor pixels to produce
the effect of white dots in the image. This condit ion is con­spicuous especially when gain is applied.
This is a characteristic of the charged-coupled de vice (CCD).
As far as possible, use this device under conditions where
the temperature of this device does not increase.

Smear
Verti cal pale streaking appearing at high
luminous object

High luminous object
(Electric light, sunlight, etc.)

Blooming
Blurring in highlight

8

9

CONTROLS, INDICATORS AND CONNECTORS

ZOOM Lens

The zoom lens is not provided with the GY-HD200CHU, GY­HD200CHE or the GY-HD201CHE.

Th16 × 5.5BRMU

32

4

0

1FOCUS ring

Manual focus ring.

2ZOOM lever/ring

This is the manual zoom ring equipped with a zoom lever.
To a dj us t t he zoom manually, turn the zoom mode knob b
to position “M”.

3IRIS ring

Manual iris ring. To activate the auto iris feature, set the
Iris Mode switch 7 to “A”.

4[VTR] VTR trigger button

To s ta rt/stop shooting.

5[RET] Return video button

You can only monitor the return video signal from the VTR
on the viewfinder, LCD monitor and video signal connector
while this button is pressed.
When the camera control unit is connected, you can moni­tor the return video signal on the viewfinder while this but­ton is pressed. You cannot monitor on the LCD monitor or
video output terminal.
When you set the LENS RET item to “FOCUS ASSIST” in
the SWITCH MODE menu screen, you can use this button
as the FOCUS ASSIST button.
X See page 83.

RET

5

WT

6

a

1

M
A

789

d

MACRO

bc

6ZOOM servo control lever

To o perate the servo zoom feature with this lever, set the
ZOOM knob b to “S”.

•Pressing the “W” section of this lever increases the
angle of the lens for a wider shooting angle.

•Pressing the “T” section of this lever narrows the lens
angle perspective for telephoto shots.

•Pushing harder changes the speed of the zoom.

7IRIS mode switch

A:Activates the auto iris feature.
M:Allows manual iris control.

8Momentary auto iris button

When the IRIS mode switch 7 is at “M”, pushing t his but-
ton activates the Auto Iris Function while it is held down
only.

9[S] IRIS speed adjusting control

For adjusting the iris operation speed.

MEMO

If the speed becomes too fast, hunting may occur. To avoid
the phenomena described above, perform adjustment
again.

0FILTER thread

Protect the lens with a clear filter or UV filter by screwing
the filter onto the thread inside the lens hood from the
front.
Other filters can be used for various effects.

aZOOM servo connector

Connect an optional zoom servo uni t here.

b[ZOOM] ZOOM mode knob

S:Servo zoom mode. Allows operation by the zoom

servo control lever 6.

M:Manual zoom mode. Allows zoom control by the

zoom lever/ring 2.

cBACK FOCUS ring/fixing screw

For back focus adjustment only. Secure with the screw
knob after adjustment. X See “Back Focus Adjustment”
on page 50.

dMacro focusing ring (for close-up shooting)

By rotating this ring in the direction of the arrow, close-up
shooting of very small objects becomes possible.
Normal focus adjustment and zooming are not available in
the macro mode.
To s ho o t i mages in the macro mode, set the focus ring 1
to the infinite position (f) and the zoom ring 2 to the max-
imum wide-angle position. To adjust the focus of the
macro image, rotate this ring in the direction of the arrow
until the object is focused.

CAUTION

•The back-focus knob is located close to the macro ring,
be careful not to mistake the back-focus knob for the
macro ring.

•After the required operation, be sure to return the macro
focusing ring to the normal position.

X See “Attaching the Zoom Lens” on page 33.
X See “Back Focus Adjustment” on page 50.

Front Section

32 1

4

8

5

1Shoe

Makes it possible to moun t separately sold lights and
accessories.

2Knob

This is the mounting knob for the microphone holder 3.

3Microphone holder

Makes it possible to attach the provided mic rophone or a
separately sold microphone.
X See “Attaching the Microphone (Provided)”
on page 33.

4Front tally lamp

This lamp lights up when this device enters the record
mode. It blinks during the transition to the record mode.
When the tape has run out, or the VTR enters the warning
mode, it blinks quickly.

•Use the FRONT TALLY item on the OTHERS[1/2] menu
screen to select whether or not the lamp should light
and the lighting pattern.
X See page 93.

5[LENS] Lens control connector

Connect 12-pin lens control cable from lens here.

Pin

Function

No.

1Return switch 7 Iris position

2VTR trigger 8 IRIS A/R INPUT

3GND 9EXTENDER position

Lens AUTO/MANU con-

4

trol

5IRIS control 11 –

6+12V DC 12 –

7

6

Pin

Function

No.

10 ZOOM position

6[ZEBRA] Zebra switch

When this switch is ON, a zebra pattern is imposed on the
viewfinder or LCD areas having luminance levels in accor­dance with the menu settings made for the video signal.
This pattern can be used as a reference for manual adjust­ment of the lens iris. Zebra patterns are also displayed
during color bar display when this switch is set to ON.

•The default value is 70% - 80%. The luminance level
can be changed with the ZEBRA setting in the LCD/
VF[1/4] menu screen.
X See page86.

While this switch is pressed to the SKIN AREA side, the
color tone areas specified with the SKIN COLOR ADJUST
item on the ADVANCED PROCESS menu are indicated in
the viewfinder. The switch returns to the OFF position
when released.
X See “How to Use Skin Detail” on pages 99 and 100.
*The Skin Detail color tone areas are not indicated while

the color bar or VTR pl ayback picture is shown in the
viewfinder or on the LCD monitor.

7[AWB] Auto white balance button

When the WHT.BAL switch c on page 15 is set to A or B
and you press this button, the white balance is automati­cally adjusted.
*It is not activated in preset, full auto shooting, full auto

white balance and color bar modes.
X See “White Balance Adjustment” on page 51.

8Lens mounting ring/Lens lock lever

Hold the lens and use the lever to turn the ring anticlock­wise to release lens.
To m ount lens make sure the lens guide pin fits well, and
then turn the ring clockwise until firm.
X See “Attaching the Zoom Lens” on page 33.

10

11

CONTROLS, INDICATORS AND CONNECTORS

Rear Section

1

3

4

1Back tally lamp

This lamp lights up when this device enters the record
mode. It blinks during the transition to the record mode.
When the tape has run out, or the VTR enters the warning
mode, it blinks quickly.

•Use the BACK TALLY item on the OTHERS[1/2] menu
screen to select whether or not the lamp should light
and the lighting pattern.
X See page 93.

2[PHONES] Earphone jack

This is a stereo mini-jack for connecting an earphone for
audio monitoring. Plug in an earphone or headphone with
a 3.5 mm diameter plug. The earphone can also be used
to monitor alarm tones in accordance with the circum­stances.
The audio channel to be output is selected with the AUDIO
MONITOR item on the AUDIO/MIC[2/2] menu screen and
MONITOR SELECT switch d on page 19.
The audio output level is adjusted with the Audio monitor
volume control 3 on page 14.

MEMO

•The volume of the alarm sound is set with the ALARM
VR LEVEL item on the OTHERS[1/2] menu screen.

•When using a stereotype jack and stereo sound should
be output, the following setting should be performed.
Set the MONITOR SELECT switch d on page 19 to
BOTH.
Set the AUDIO MONITOR item on the AUDIO/MIC[2/2]
menu screen to STEREO.

2

 Connecting the Earphone Cable
To r edu ce the emission of unwanted radio waves, be sure to
attach the provided clamp filter as shown in the figure below.

•Attach the clamp filter as close to this device as possible,
as shown in the figure.

Earphone cable

Clamp filter

3Shoulder belt hooks

Allows you to attach a separately sold shoulder belt.

4LCD monitor

Shows a color camera image or the VTR playback picture.
It is also used for displaying the following:

•Menu Setting screens

•Characters showing the whether this device is set to

shooting mode or VTR playback mode

•Date and time and time code

•Audio level meter

•Warning indications, etc.
X See page 22.

LCD Door

LCD BRIGHT

1

2

1[LCD BRIGHT +/–] LCD brightness +/– button

This button is for adjusting the brightness of the LCD mon­itor display.

•Pushing the bu tton in the + direction makes the monitor
brighter.

•Pushing the b utton in the – direction makes the monitor
darker.

•Pushing the + /– buttons simultaneously returns the set­ting to the standard setting.

2[CH-1/CH-2 AUDIO SELECT] CH-1/CH-2 audio selector

switch

Selects the method of adjusting the CH-1 and CH-2 audio
channel audio levels.

AUTO : The audio level is automatically adjusted

MANU : Allows you to adjust the audio levels using

3[TC DISPLAY] TC/UB display switch

Selects the contents displayed on the TC counter of the
LCD monitor or in the viewfinder. (This switch works when
the TC/UB item on the LCD/VF[3/4] menu screen is set to
ON.)

TC : Set to this position to display time code values.
UB : Set to this position to display the user’s bits values.

-

AUDIO SELECT

CH-1

according to the input level. When excessive
audio is input, the limiter works to suppress
the audio level.
The “AUTO” LED in the CH-1/CH-2 AUDIO
LEVEL area f on page 15 lights.

the CH-1/CH-2 AUDIO LEVEL volume con­trols f on page 15.
Set AUDIO LIMITER on the AUDIO/MIC[1/2]
menu screen to use lim iter functions when
excessive audio is input.
X See “AUDIO LIMITER” on page 84.

CAM/VTR

+

TC

GENE.

CH-2

DISPLAY

FREE

TC

AUTO
MANU

REC

UB

REGEN

4

3

5

4[TC GENE.] Time code generator setting switch

Switch for setting the time code generator to preset mode
or regeneration mode. It is also used to select the time
code run mode when the preset mode is selected.

FREE : The preset mode is selected, and the time

REC : The preset mode is selected, and the time

REGEN : Regeneration mode, in which this device

code run mode becomes the FREE run
mode.
Set to this position to record with the time
code or user’s bits set anew (preset). In this
setting, the time code always operates in the
run mode.
*If this setting is used when recording

scenes one after another, the time codes
become discontinuous at the transition
points between scenes.

code run mode becomes the REC run mode.
Set to this position to record with the time
code or user’s bits set anew (preset). The
time code operates in the run mode during
recording only. If this setting is used when
recording scenes one after another, the time
codes are recorded as continuous time
codes.

reads existing time codes on the tape and
records time codes in continuation of the
existing ones. Set to this position when you
want to add additional time codes to time
codes already recorded on the tape.

MEMO

Preset of time code and user’s bits is performed on the TC/
UB/CLOCK menu.

X See page 44.
X See “TC/UB/CLOCK Menu Screen” on page 90.

5[CAM/VTR] Camera/VTR mode switch button

Each time you press this button, the mode switche s
between camera mode and VTR mode.
When you do this, the VTR indicator f on page 19 dis-
plays the following statuses.
While the mode is being switched: Flashing
In VTR mode : Lit
In camera mode : Off

•Select the Camera mode to record the camera image.

•Select the VTR mode to playback VTR or to input the

HDV/DV signal from the IEEE1394 connector 0 on
page 16. (HDV/DV signal input is possible with the
GYHD200U/GY-HD201E.)

•When the power is turned on, the mode becomes the
Camera mode.

12

13

CONTROLS, INDICATORS AND CONNECTORS

Right Side Section

1

2

45

2

1

STATUS

WHT.BAL

ON

OFF

POWER

d

3

VF BRIGHT

USER 3USER 2USER 1

MENU

AUTO

AUTO

AUDIO
LEVEL

CH-1 CH-2

REC

efg

h

i

7

1Monitoring speaker (Cheek pad)

•In the Camera mode, the input sound can be EE moni­tored.
In the VTR mode, the speaker outputs the VTR play­back sound. In the VTR mode, the HDV/DV input sound
can be EE monitored. (HDV/DV signal input is possible
with the GY-HD200U/GY-HD201E.)
The sound to be output is selected with the MONITOR
SELECT switch d on page 19.

•The sound level is adjusted with the MONITOR sound
level volume 3. This speaker also outputs various
warning sounds superimposed on other sound.

X See “Alarm Sound” on page 105.

2Cheek pad set screw

Screw for adjusting the height of the cheek pad.

3[MONITOR] Audio monitor volume control

Adjusts the volume of the monitoring loudspeaker and ear­phone.

4[VF BRIGHT] Viewfinder brightness adjustment

To a dj us t the brightness of the viewfinder.
X See page 49.

5[PEAKING] Contour adjustment

To a djust the contours of the LCD monitor and viewfinder
image.
*When the Focus Assist function is running, this control

does not operate.

X See page 49.

6[FOCUS ASSIST] Focus assist button

When you press this button during shooting, the area of
focus is displayed in blue, red or green, making it easy to
focus accurately.

6

8

9

ND FILTER

0

a

b

c

MEMO

•When FOCUS ASSIST on the LCD/VF[1/4] menu screen is
set to ACCU-FOCUS and this button is pressed, ACCU
FOCUS functions with FOCUS ASSIST. This makes depth of
field shallower, making it easier to focus.

•This button has the same function as the FOCUS
ASSIST button 7 in the Top Section.

X See “LCD/VF[1/4] Menu Screen” on page 86.

7Clamp

Attach the cable from the viewfinder here.

8[USER1/2/3] User buttons

You c an assign camera functions to the USER1 - 3 but­tons.
Use them to switch shooting conditions depending upon
the subject.
Set them using the USER1 - 3 items in the SWITCH
MODE menu screen.
X See page 83.
Use this button to preset the time code.
X See page 46.

MEMO

•The USER buttons work together with the menu settings.

•When a menu screen is being displayed, they also func-

tion as menu operation bu ttons. X See “Setting Menu
Screens” on page 72.

9[SHUTTER] Shutter/Menu dial

•Every time this dial is pressed while in the normal
screen mode (when the menu screen is not displayed),
the shutter speed switches between on/off.

•When this dial is turned 1 click up or down in the normal
screen mode, the shutter speed indicator is shown for
about 3 seconds on the LCD monitor or in the view­finder. The shutter speed is changed when this dial is
turned while the shutter speed indicator is shown.
X See page83.

•When this dial turned upward or downward while the
menu screen is displayed, the cursor (K) also moves
upward or downward to al low selection of ite ms in the
menu. To change the setting value of the item, press
this dial. When the setting value starts blinking, turn this
dial upward or downward to change the setting.
X See “Setting Menu Screens” on page 72.

0[ND FILTER] ND filter switch

Switches the built-in ND filter.
OFF : Turns the filter OFF (FILTER OFF)

Cuts the light intensity to approximately 1/4. (1/4ND)

1:
2:

Cuts the light intensity to approximately 1/16. (1/ 16ND)
When you change this switch, the type of the new ND filter
is displayed in the LCD monitor or viewfinder.

CAUTION

If you switch the ND filter while shooting is in progress, the
picture may be disturbed or noise may occur in the audio.
X See “Camera Settings” on page 54.

a[STATUS] Status/Menu button

•Pressing this button in the normal screen mode (condi­tion in which the menu screen is not shown) displays a
status screen in the viewfinder or on the LCD monitor.
The displayed status screen changes each time the but­ton is pressed.
X See “Status Screens” on page 22.

•Pressing this button for more than 1 second in the nor­mal screen mode displays the menu screen in the view­finder or on the LCD monitor. Pressing this button while
the menu screen is displayed in the viewfinder or on the
LCD monitor makes the menu screen disappear.
X See “Setting Menu Screens” on page 72.

b[GAIN] Sensitivity selector switch

Electronically boosts the light sensitivity when there is
insufficient illumination on the subject.
The boosting level differs depending on the switch position
as follows:
(Factory presets)
L:0 dB (no boost ing is applied)
M:9 dB (boosted to approximately 3 times the original)
H:18 dB (boosted to approximately 8 times the original)

•The boosting level for each switch position can be
changed with the SWITCH MODE menu screen.
X See page 83.
The more the boosting level is increased, the more the
resulting image will be noisy.

•When the FULL AUTO switch g on page 19 is “ON”,
this is fixed at “ALC”.

c[WHT.BAL] White balance switch

Three white balance modes are selectable with this
switch.

B:Switch into white balance mode memorized

A:Switch into white balance mode memorized

PRST
(PRESET)

FAW ( Full Auto White Balance) mode can be set to A, B or
PRESET with the SWITCH MODE menu screen.
X See page 83.
In the FAW mode, video color temperatures are constantly
sampled for automatic adjustment to a proper white bal­ance.

•When the FULL AUTO switch g on page 19 is “ON”,

in B. If white balance is performed with the
switch in this positio n, it will be memorized
into B.

in A. If white balance is performed with the
switch in this positio n, it will be memorized
into A.

:Switch into white balance mode (3200K or

5600K) set in PRESET TEMP. item on the
CAMERA OPERATION menu screen.
X See page 77.

this is fixed at “FAW”.

MEMO

Fine-tune red and blue to match the white adjusted in auto
white balance in WHITE PAINT<R>/<B> on the WHITE
BALANCE menu screen. (Available only when this switch is
set to A or B.)
X See “WHITE BALANCE Menu Screen” on page 82.

d[POWER] Power ON/OFF switch

Switch that turns the power ON/OFF.
When the power is OFF, “POFF” is displayed in the LCD
monitor or viewfinder.
*Wait at least 5 seconds if you need to turn the power on

again.

e[REC] REC trigger button (start/stop recording)

Star t and s top recording using this button.
(This works together with the REC trigger button on the
top and the lens VTR trigger button.)
When “SPLIT” is set for the 1394 REC TRIGGER item on
the OTHERS[2/2] menu screen, this button becomes the
start/stop recording button for an external device.

X See page 94.
X See “Backup Recording” on page 67.

f[CH-1/CH-2 AUDIO LEVEL] CH-1/CH-2 Audio level con-

trols and AUTO LED

Allow you to adjust the audio level for the CH-1 and CH-2
audio channels.

•To use these controls, set the CH-1/CH-2 AUDIO

SELECT switch 2 on page 13 to “MANU”.

•When the FULL AUTO switch g on page 19 or the CH-
1/CH-2 AUDIO SELECT switch 2 on page 13 is set to
“AUTO”, “AUTO” LED lights. (The audio level controls
do not work.)

g[HDV/DV LED]

•In camera mode, this lights according to the setting for
the video format being shot.

•In VTR mode, it lights according to the video format
being recorded on tape or the IEEE1394 input video for­mat.

HDV : Lights when the format is HDV.
DV : Lights when the format is DV.
HDV/DV : Turns off when the format is 1080i.

MEMO

•During a system error, HDV/DV flash alternate ly.

X See page 104.

•Select whether or not to have this light in the FORMAT
LED item on the OTHERS[1/2] menu screen.
X See page 93.

hLCD door lock and release knob

To o pen the LCD door, move this knob on the direction
toward the rear section.

iLCD door

LCD monitor door.
The LCD monitor is located on the inner side of the door.
The LCD monitor can be viewed when this door is opened.
The door can be turned to change the orientation of the
LCD monitor, and it can be rotated so that it can be
accommodated in the main body of the camera.
X See page 49.

14

15

CONTROLS, INDICATORS AND CONNECTORS

Left Side Section

98 7

1

CH2-AUDIO OUT-CH1 VIDEO

IEEE 1394

0

1Viewfinder connector (6-pin)

Connect the cable from the viewfinder here.

2[CH-2 INPUT] CH-2 audio input connector selector

switch

Selects the CH-2 audio input connector.
INPUT1 : Inputs the audio from the INPUT1 connector

INPUT2 : Inputs the audio from the INPUT2 connector

4 into CH-2.

4 into CH-2.

MEMO

The audio from the INPUT1 connector is also input into
CH-1 regardless of the setting.

3[AUDIO INPUT] Audio input signal selector switch

This switch is used to select the input sound signal from
INPUT1 or INPUT2 connector.

LINE : Set to this position when connected to audio

MIC : Set to this position when the dynamic micro-

MIC+48V : Set to this po sition when a micropho ne

equipment, etc. The reference input level is
+4 dBs.

phone is connected.

requiring +48 V power supply (phantom
microphone, etc.) is connected.

CAUTION

When connecting a component that does not require +48 V
power supply, make sure that the switch is not set to
MIC+48V before the component is connected.

MEMO

You can select the normal input level for MIC and MIC+48V
in the INPUT1, 2 MIC REF. item on the AUDIO/MIC[1/2]
menu screen.
X See page 84.

4[INPUT1/INPUT2] INPUT1/INPUT2 audio input connec-

tors

These are audio input connectors for connecting to an
external audio device or microphone.

2

3

456

•Set the [AUDIO INPUT] switch 3 acco rding to the

device to be connected.

•Set the CH-2 audio input connector using the [CH-2

INPUT] switch 2.
The CH-2 audio from the set connector is recorded.

5Shoulder pad slide button

Button to adjust the position of the shoulder pad.
When you press this button, you can move the position of
the shoulder pad 6 forward or backward.

6Shoulder pad
7Cassette cover

Sliding the EJECT switch a on page 18 locat ed on the
top section opens this cover to allow insertion or removal
of the videocassette.

CAUTION

To p revent foreign objects from entering the internal parts of
the VTR unit, do not leave this device with the cover open
for extended periods of time.

8[VIDEO OUT] Video output terminal (RCA)

This is a terminal for composite video signal output.

•Select whether or not to output a signal with setup in
SET UP on the VIDEO FORMAT[2/2] menu screen.
(Only for U model)

•Set ANALOG OUT CHAR. item on the OTHERS[1/2]
menu screen to ON to output menu setting screens and
warnings from this terminal.

9[AUDIO OUTPUT CH-1/CH-2] Audio output connector

(RCA)

Output connector for audio signals.

•Outputs the input audio signal in the Camera mode.

•Outputs the playback audio signal in the VTR mode.

•When a HDV/DV signal (IEEE1394) is input, the EE
sound of the input audio signal is output in the VTR
mode. (HDV/DV signal input is possible with the
GYHD200U/GY-HD201E.)

MEMO

Alarm sound is not output.

0[IEEE1394] IEEE1394 connector (6-pin)

Using an IEEE1394 cable (optional), a digital video com­ponent with IEEE1394 connector can be connected here.

X See “Connecting the IEEE1394 Cable” on page 63.
X See “HDV/DV Dubbing” on page 65.

CAUTION

When connecting the IEEE1394 cable, confirm that the
connector is facing the right direction before inserting.
X See page 63.

MEMO

Put the covers on the connectors when you are not using
them.

a

CH2-AUDIO OUT-CH1 VIDEO

c

d

a[IEEE1394] IEEE1394 switch

Set according to the image format of the input/output sig­nal and playback signal of the IEEE1394 terminal.
HDV : Set to this for HDV format.
DV : Set to this for DV format.

B/PR] Component Y/PB/PR signal output terminal

b[Y/P

(BNC × 3)

Outputs analog component (Y/P

•Select whether or not to add setup signals to DV format
signals in SET UP item on the VIDEO FORMAT[2/2]
menu screen. (Only for U model)

•Set ANALOG OUT CHAR. item on the OTHERS[1/2]
menu screen to ON to output menu setting screens and
warnings from this terminal.

c[REMOTE] REMOTE terminal (Round 6-pin)

Some functions of this camera can be controlled exter­nally.
Connect to a remote control unit (RM-LP55/RM-LP57).
X See “Connect a Remote Control Unit (RM-LP55/RM­LP57)” on page 68 .

d[DC INPUT] DC input terminal (XLR 4-pin)

This is the 12V DC power input terminal. Connect to the
AC adapter.
When a battery is installed and a cable is connected to this
terminal, power supply from the battery stops and power is
supplied by this terminal.

IEEE 1394

B/PR) signals.

b

16

17

CONTROLS, INDICATORS AND CONNECTORS

Top Section

5

4
3

2

1

d
e

f
g

h

i

j

k

1Viewfi nder

Displays the camera image and the playback picture.

2Eyepiece

Ensures that ambient light does not reach the viewfinder
screen or falls into the eye of the camerama n.

3Eyepiece focus ring

You can adjust the focus by turning this ring.

4Eyepiece mounting ring

You c an adjust the position of the eyepiece forward or
backward by loosening this ring.

5Slide mounting ring

You can adjust the position of the viewfinder left or right by
loosening this ring.

6Clamp

Attach the microphone cable here.

7[FOCUS ASSIST] Focus assist button

When you press this button during shooting, the area of
focus is displayed in blue, red or green, making it easy to
focus accurately.

6

7

8

9

0

l

a

b

c

MEMO

•When FOCUS ASSIST on the LCD/VF[1/4] menu screen
is set to ACCU-FOCUS and this button is pressed,
ACCU FOCUS functions with FOCUS ASSIST. This
makes depth of field shallower, making it easier to focus.

•This button has the same function as the FOCUS
ASSIST button 6 in the Right Side Section.

X See “LCD/VF[1/4] Menu Screen” on page 86.

8[REC] REC trigger button (start/stop recording)

Star t and stop recording using this button.
(This works together with the REC trigger button on the
right panel and the lens VTR trigger button.)

9[REC LOCK] REC LOCK switch

Slide this switch in the direction of the arrow to lock the
[REC] trigger button 8. Use this to prevent unwanted
recording.
(The REC trigger button on the right panel and the lens
VTR trigger button are not locked .)

0SD memory card cover

When you open this cover, you can inser t and remove the
SD memory card.
X See “Inserting an SD Memory Card” on page 34.
When an SD memory card is loaded

•You can sav e, call up and reset the menu settings on
this device.

•You can initialize (format) an SD memory card.

X See “FILE MANAGE Menu Screen” on page 96.

a[EJECT] Eject switch and LED

Slide this switch to the side to insert or eject a videocas­sette tape.
The LED lights while ejecting is in progress.

MEMO

• It takes a few seconds before the videocassette is
ejected. Do not close the cassette cover during the eject
operation.

•Do not touch the cassette insertion slot or cassette dur­ing the eject operation. This could result in damage.

bOperation cover

Open this cover when operating in the playback mode.
Otherwise, keep this cover closed.
This cover can be opened by sliding it to the side.

MEMO

When the STOP button h is pressed in the Camera mode
to set the VTR operation mode indicator to indicate STOP,
playback operations become possible.

cBattery adapter

Attach the battery.
U model: Anton Baue r battery
E model: IDX battery
X See “Battery Operation” on page 37.

d[MONITOR SELECT] Audio monitor selector switch

This switch is used to select the monitor sound output and
playback sound output from the monitoring speaker 1 on
page 14 or the PHONES jack 2 on page 12.

CH-1 : T he CH-1 channel audio is output.
BOTH : CH-1 and CH-2 channel audio are output mixed.

When this setting is selected, the menu screen
can be used to select whether the mixed sound
or stereo sound should be output via the
PHONES jack. (AUDIO MONITOR item on the
AUDIO/MIC[2/2] menu screen)
When AUDIO MONITOR item on the AUDIO/
MIC[2/2] menu screen is set to “STEREO”, only
the audio of CH-1 is output from the monitoring
speaker.

CH-2 : T he CH-2 channel audio is output.

X See “Outputting Audio” on page 62.
X See “AUDIO/MIC[2/2] Menu Screen” on page 85.

CAUTION

Make sure to move switches all the way. Do not leave a
switch stopped in a midway position. Noise will be gener­ated and operation irregularities will occur.

e[DISPLAY] Display button

•When LCD+VF in the LCD/VF[4/4] menu display is set
to OFF, press the DISPLAY button for 2 seconds to
switch between the LCD screen and the viewfinder
screen.

•When LCD+VF in the LCD/VF[4/4] menu display is set
to ON, press the DISPLAY button for 2 seconds to
switch the LCD screen ON and OFF. Press the DIS­PLAY button briefly to change the display mode for the
LCD screen as follows.

Only image displayed

Characters shown enlarged

Image and characters displayed

X See “Magnified Status Indications on the LCD Monitor”
on page 29.

f[VTR] VTR indicator

This indicator lights when the camera is in the VTR mode.
To p e r f o r m V TR p layback or to input the HDV/DV signal
from the IEEE1394 connector 0 on page 16, press the
CAM/VTR button 5 on page 13 to turn on this indicator.
It flashes when the mode is being changed.
(HDV/DV signal input is possible with the GY-HD200U,
GY-HD201E.)

g[FULL AUTO] Full auto shooting (FAS) switch

This is the ON/OFF switch for FAS mode.

•During FAS mode, “FAS” is displayed on the LCD moni­tor or the viewfinder.

•FAS mode works together with the auto iris and auto
level control (ALC) modes and automatically adjusts to
the optimal video signal level and white balance.

•You can s elect automatic adjustment mode or manual
adjustment mode for audio recording level.
X See “AUDIO/MIC[2/2] Menu Screen” on page 85.

•Even if there are color bars, this automatically sets to
camera video.

•Auto iris mode operates even if the lens iris mode
switch is set to the manual position.

•The gain changes continuously until it reaches the max­imum ALC MAX setting, and the shutter speed also
changes continuously.

•When you release FAS mode, all of the settings return
to their previous modes.

CAUTION

When the power is turned on while the camera is in the
FAS mode, it takes about 10 seconds before the automatic
adjustment of FAS is compl eted.
All of the previous setting contents are recalled when the
FAS mode is cancelled.

h[STOP] Stop button

Press to enter the stop mode.

i[REW] Rewind button

Press this button to rewind the tape.

•Pressing this button in the stop or fast forward mode ini­tiates the rewi nd mode. (Only for VTR mode)

•Pressing this button during playback, still picture play­back or forward sear ch initiates rever se search.

j[PLAY/STILL] Play/still button

Press to start playback. Press to enter the still picture
mode during playback, in the stop mode or in the search
mode.
Depending on the ambient temperature, if still image play­back mode continues for between 30 seconds and 3 min­utes, it stops automatically. (Tape protect mode)
During still picture playback and search mode, press this
button to return to the normal playback mode.
*If the auto tracking is active at the moment the play

mode is entered, the playback video will be interfered
with digital noise.

k[FF] Fast forward button

Press this button to fast forward the tape.

•Pressing this button in the stop or rewind mode initiates
the fast forward mode. (Only for VTR mode)

•Pressing this button during playback, still picture play­back or reverse search i nitiates forward se arch.

lScrew holes for mounting accessories

You can mount li ghts and other accessories.

18

19

CONTROLS, INDICATORS AND CONNECTORS

Recording and Image Out­put Formats

This device supports HDV and DV image formats. This device also has various output terminals. (Composite, analog component,
IEEE1394)
During recording and playback, image formats from each of the output terminals are as shown in the table below.

Notes about the table

(Shaded): Indicates the setting item in the VIDEO FORMAT m enu screen.

N/A: Terminal is not available.
q :Same format as the left.

 When recording camera images

HD

(HDV)

DV

HD

 In PLAY mode

HDV

DV

MEMO

Synchronize the setting for FRAME RATE in the VIDEO FORMAT menu screen with the frame rate of the playback signal.

Recording (Shooting)

[REC] menu item Format

HDV-HD60P

HDV-HD30P

HDV-HD50P

HDV-HD25P

HDV-HD24P

DV-60I

U model only

DV-24P

DV-24PA

E model only

[1080I CAMERA]

DV-50I

DV-25P

menu item

720/60p qq q 480/60i

720/30p qq 720/60p 480/60i

720/50p qq q 576/50i

720/25p qq 720/50p 576/50i

720/24p qq 720/60p 480/60i

480/60i qq q q

480/60i(24p) qq q q

480/60i(24p) qq q q

576/50i qq q q

576/50i(25p) qq q q

Frame rate

ON

Playback

720/60p qqq1080/60i 480/60i N/A 480/60i
720/30p q 720/60p q 1080/60i 480/60i N/A 480/60i
720/50p qqq1080/50i N/A 576/50i 576/50i
720/25p q 720/50p q 1080/50i N/A 576/50i 576/50i
720/24p q 720/60p q 1080/60i 480/60i N/A 480/60i

480/60p N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A

576/50p N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A

U model

480/60i(24p) qq q

E model

576/50i(25p) qq q

IEEE1394 Out

480/60i qq q

576/50i qq q

Rec on Tape IEEE1394 Out

Rec on Tape IEEE1394 Out Component Out Composite Out

60/30 N/A N/A 1080/60i 480/60i

50/25 N/A N/A 1080/50i 576/50i

Component Out

[HDV PB OUTPUT] menu item

NATIVE 720P 1080I NTSC PAL

Component Out

(EE Out)

Composite Out

(EE Out)

Composite Out

 When Recording HDV or DV Images from the IEEE1394 Terminal (Only with the GY-HD200U and GY-HD201E)

Component Out

[HDV PB OUTPUT] menu item

Composite Out

HDV

DV

Recording

(IEEE1394 In)

720/60p qqq1080/60i 480/60i N/A 480/60i
720/30p q 720/60p q 1080/60i 480/60i N/A 480/60i
720/50p qqq1080/50i N/A 576/50i 576/50i
720/25p q 720/50p q 1080/50i N/A 576/50i 576/50i
720/24p q 720/60p q 1080/60i 480/60i N/A 480/60i

480/60p N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A

576/50p N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A

U model

E model

480/60i qq q

480/60i(24p) qq q

576/50i qq q

576/50i(25p) qq q

Rec on Tape

NATIVE 720P 1080I NTSC PAL

MEMO

Synchronize the setting for FRAME RATE on the VIDEO FORMAT menu screen with the frame rate of the IEEE1394 input signal.

20

21

CONTROLS, INDICATORS AND CONNECTORS

Indications on the LCD
Monitor and in the View­finder

In addition to showing the EE image and the playback pic­ture, the LCD monitor and viewfinder are also used for the
following character displays.
To s how characters on the LCD monitor, press the DISPLAY
button briefly.

DISPLAY button

 Stat us scr eens (screens for checking the current cam-

era settings)

 Auto white display (only displayed in the Camera

mode)

 Menu setting screens
 Alarm message display
 Safety zone display (only displayed in the Camera

mode)

MEMO

When ANALOG OUT CHAR. on the OTHERS[1/2] menu
screen is ON, characters are also shown on images from

B/PR OUT and VIDEO OUT terminals.

the Y/P

Status Screens

Press the STATUS button while normal screen is displayed
to show one of the status screens.

USER 3USER 2USER 1

SHUTTER

ND FILTER

2

1

MENU

STATUS

STATUS button

The contents of the status di splay are divided into those for
the Camera mode and those for the VTR mode.

•Each time the STATUS button is pressed in the Camera
mode, one of 5 status screens is displayed. (STATUS 0, 1,
2, 3, 4)

•One type of screen is displayed in the VTR mode.

•CAMERA MODE (display example)

STATUS 1STATUS 0

STATUS 4

STATUS 2

•VTR MODE
(display example)

STATUSSTATUS 3

MEMO

•When the STATUS button is pressed for 1 second or
longer, the menu setting screen is displayed.
To d i s pl a y t he Status screen while the menu setting
screen is displayed, press the STATUS button to return
to the normal screen.

•You can switch between the LCD monitor and the view­finder by holding down the DISPLAY button for about 2
seconds. (When the LCD+VF item on the LCD/VF[4/4]
menu screen is set to OFF.)

Status Screens in the Camera Mode

1

23

STATUS 0 Screen

STATUS 0

1 Event Indication

When the Gain or Shutter Speed is changed manually, the setting condition is displayed for about 3 seconds at the time the
change is made.

•Set the shutter display method to seconds or angle in SHUTTER DISP. on the LCD/VF[3/4] menu screen. (Only when
frame rate is 24p or 25p mode)

Gain value was changed GAIN 0 dB, 3 dB, 6 dB, 9 dB, 12 dB, 15 dB, 18 dB

Gain value reached the ALC GAIN ALC

FULL AUTO was turned ON/OFF FULL AUTO ON, FULL AUTO OFF

ZEBRA was turned ON/OFF ZEBRA ON, ZEBRA OFF

Shutter speed value was changed
(When SHUTTER DISP. is set to SEC)

Variable shutter speed value was changed
(When SHUTTER DISP. is set to SEC)

Shutter was turned OFF SHUTTER OFF [1/**]

Shutter speed value was changed
(When SHUTTER DISP. is set to DEG)

Variable shutter speed value was changed
(When SHUTTER DISP. is set to DEG)

White balance value was changed (Example)

FILTER value was changed FI LTER OFF, FILTER ND 1 [1/4ND], FILTER ND 2 [1/16ND]

AE LEVEL value was changed

BLACK gain value was changed

PRESET TEMP. value was changed

HEADER REC is running HEADER REC

FOCUS ASSIST was turned ON/OFF FOCUS ASSIST ON, FOCUS ASSIST OFF
Time code was set to zero reset TC ZERO PRESET X See page45.
REC LOCK switch was turned ON/OFF REC SWITCH LOCKED, REC SWITCH UNLOCKED X See page 18, 9 REC LOCK switch.

A REC command was sent from the IEEE1394
connector

Setting Status Contents of Indications

0

DD

266S

9

8
7
6
5
4

*1

SHUTTER 1/6, 1/6.25, 1/7.5, 1/12, 1/12.5, 1/15, 1/24, 1/25, 1/30, 1/48, 1/50, 1/60, 1/100, 1/120,
1/250, 1/500, 1/1000, 1/2000, 1/4000, 1/10000

*1

V. SHUTTER 1/24.01 to 1/10489.5

SHUTTER 360.0°, 180.0°, 172.8°, 150.0°, 144.0°, 135.0°, 120.0°, 105.0°, 90.0°, 75.0°, 60.0°,

45.0°, 30.0°, 22.5°, 11.2°

24p: 0.82° to 359.4°
25p: 0.85° to 359.4°

WHITE BAL A [3200K]
Numeric value: Any of 2300, 2500, 2800, 3000, 3200, 3400, 3700, 4300, 5200, 5600, 6500,

*2

*2

AE LEVEL –3, –2, –1, NORMAL, +1, +2, +3

BLACK NORMAL
BLACK STRETCH 1, 2, 3, 4, 5
BLACK COMPRESS 1, 2, 3, 4, 5

*2 *3

WHITE BAL PRST [3200K], WHITE BAL PRST [5600K]

TRIGGER TO HDV, TRIGGER TO DV

*4

8000

22

23

CONTROLS, INDICATORS AND CONNECTORS

Indications on the LCD Monitor
and in the Viewfinder (Cont’d)

FF/REW button was pressed in CAMERA
mode

REC/VTR trigger button was pressed when
1080I CAMERA in the VIDEO FORMAT[1/2]
menu screen was set to ON

Other Displays X See “F ILE MANAGE Menu Screen” on pages 96-98.

*1

*2

*3

*4

Setting Status Contents of Indications

The range for the shutter speed differs depending on the video format setting. X See page 83.
Displayed if functions were assigned to the USER1 - 3 buttons. X See page83.
Displayed when the [WHT.BAL] white balance selector switch c on page 15 is set to PRST (PRESET).
“ ** ” depends on the video format.

No. Item Contents

2 VTR mode indication STBY : In record standby mode (record-pause mode)

3 Indication of date and time Indicates the date and time.

LCD BRIGHT indication When the brightness of the monitor screen is adjusted with the LCD BRIGHT button, the date and time

4 Indication of Black operation B : Displayed when the black stretch or black compress settings are other than NORMAL.
5 Indication of skin tone detail

color operation

6 Indication of Iris level opera-

tion

7 Indication of FAW operation FAW : Indicated when Full Auto White Balance is ON.
8 Gain operation indication * dB : Indicates gain value when gain is other modes than 0 dB and ALC.
9 Indication of various function

operations

0 Indication of DR-HD100 Oper-

ation

SWITCH TO VTR MODE

1080I REC INVALID

X See “W arnings and Responses” on page 102.

REC : During recording
PLAY : During playback
FF :During fast forward
REW : During rew ind
STL : During still picture playback mode
FWD:During playback in forward direction (FWD1: About ×2 speed, FWD2: About ×5 speed, FWD3:

About ×10 speed)

REV : During playback in reverse direction (REV1: About ×2 speed, REV2: About ×5 speed, REV3:

About ×10 speed)
STOP : Stop m ode (Tape protect mode)
EJECT : Cassette being ejected

- - - : No tape loaded

Whether or not the date and time should be displayed as well as the display style are set on the TIME/
DATE menu.

indications and the VTR mode indication 2 are turned off and the LCD BRIGHT indicator is displayed.
(Example)
BRIGHT +5 •••••+•••• •O
Numeric value: Any of –5, –4, –3, –2, –1, 0, +1, +2, +3, +4, +5.

SD : Indicated when skin tone detail is ON.

I : Displayed when the AE LEVEL setting is other than NORMAL

FOCUS : Displayed when the Focus Assist function is ON.
SKIN AREA : Blinks while the skin detail color area is displayed.
ALC : Display ed when ALC function alone is ON.
FAS:Displayed when the Full Auto Shooting function is ON.
S:Displayed when the shutter speed is a setting other than the default setting.

When a DR-HD100 (HDD unit by FOCUS enhancements) is connected, its operation status is displayed.

[: DR-HD100 is connected (displays white)
[: Recording with DR-HD100 (displays red)

(For details, refer to the DR-HD100 INSTRUCTION MANUAL.)

X See page 83.

12

3

7

0

9

8

65a

STATUS 1 Screen

4

STATUS 1

In addition to the information on the STATUS 0 screen, this screen displays the following items.

No. Item Contents

1 VIDEO FORMAT display Displays the currently selected video format.

2 Time Code (TC)/User’s Bits

(UB) indication

3 Remaining tape indication Remaining tape indication (displayed in 1-minute steps)

4 Voltage indication (Examp le) 12.2V: Indicates remaining battery level in 0.1V steps.

Allows you to select the REC item on the VIDEO FORMAT[1/2] menu screen. X See page 74.
You can switch this display ON/OFF using the VIDEO FORMAT item on the LCD/VF[3/4] menu screen.
X See page 88.

Indicates the time code (h:m:s:frame) or user’s bits data.

(Example) Time code TC 00 : 00 : 00 : 00

User’s bits UB FF EE DD 20

Whether or not to display this item is set with the TC/UB item on the LCD/VF[3/4] menu screen.
X See page 88.
Whether the time code or user’s bits should be shown is selected with the TC DISPLAY switch inside the
LCD door.

This indicator blinks when remaining tape time is equivalent to less than 3 minutes.
Whether or not to display this item is set with the TAPE REMAIN item on the LCD/VF[3/4] menu scr een.
X See page 88.
*When inserting a brand-new tape, the remaining tape time is not indicated.

When the tape has been run, the indication will appear.
*The remaining tape indication is to be regarded only as a guide.
*When this device is used at low temperatures, it may take a while before the indication of the remaining

tape time appears.

Battery voltage and remaining battery are displayed. Select the display method in BATTERY INF O. on the
LCD/VF[3/4] menu screen. X See page 88.
Anton Bauer battery: Voltage/remaining c apacity (%)/remaining time
IDX Endura battery : Voltage/remaining capacity (%)

Colon (:) when non-drop frame mode
Dot (.) when drop frame mode

24

25

CONTROLS, INDICATORS AND CONNECTORS

Indications on the LCD Monitor
and in the Viewfinder (Cont’d)

No. Item Contents

5 Audio sampling frequency in-

dication

6 Audio level meter indication Displays the CH-1, CH-2 audio level meters.

7 Standard audio level indication T he level at which audio is recorded on the tape is indicated by “O”.

8 Iris indicator display M :Iris set higher than normal

9 Iris F-value indication Indicates the F-number of the connected lens.

0 Filter position indication Indicates t he current filter position.

a Audio Lock Indication Displayed when the audio signal is locked to the video signal.

32 K : Indicated when the AUDIO MO DE item on the AUDIO/MIC[1/2] menu screen is set to 32 K. (Audio

is recorded with 12-bit, 32 kHz sampling.)

48 K : Indicated when the AUDIO MO DE item on the AUDIO/MIC[1/2] menu screen is set to 48 K. (Audio

is recorded with 16-bit, 48 kHz sampling.) When HDV form at is set, 48K is displayed.

X See page 84.
Whether or not to display this item is set with the AUDIO item on the LCD/VF[3/4] menu.

Whether or not to display this item is set with the AUDIO item on the LCD/VF[3/4] menu.
X See page 88.

–20 dB, –12 dB
X See “AUDIO REF.LEVEL” on page 84.

–20 dB –12 dB

CH-1 OOOOOOOOO\\\]
CH-2 OOOOOOOOO\\\]

b:Iris set to normal
N:Iris set lower than normal

The indication can be switched ON/OFF with the F.NO/IRIS IND. item on the LCD/VF[1/4] menu screen.
X See page 86.

OPEN, F2, F2.8, F4, F5.6, F8, F11, F16, CLOSE
It is not displayed when the lens is removed. For some lenses, no display appears.
The indication can be switched ON/OFF with the F.NO/IRIS IND. item on the LCD/VF[1/4] menu screen.
X See page 86.

No display : FILTER OFF
ND1 : FILTER ND1 (1/4ND)
ND2 : FILTER ND2 (1/ 16ND)
The indication can be switched ON/OFF with the FILTER item on t he LCD/VF[1/4] menu screen.

X See page 86.

OO

STATUS 2

This screen displays the camera setup statuses.
Event display is not available while this screen is displayed.

Indication Indication Contents

FILE FILE F CAM1 [********], CAM2-4 [********], and EXT1 - 4 [********] * indicates SUB NAME X See pages 96-98.

FULL AUTO ON, OFF

GAIN 0dB, 3dB, 6dB, 9dB, 12dB, 15dB, 18dB, ALC

*

SHUTTER

WHT. BAL A[##00K], B[##00K], PRESET[##00K], FAW, MANUAL (Only when the remote control unit is used)

AE LEVEL –3, –2, –1, NORMAL, +1, +2, +3

FILTER OFF, ND1 [1/4ND], ND2 [1/16ND]

ZEBRA 60-70%, 70-80%, 85-95%, OVER 95%, OVER 100%

REMAIN Displays the remaining tape (minutes)
AUDIO Displays the audio sampling frequency and the audio level adjustment mode (Ex: 32K (CH1 Z CH2 a) Z (for AUTO

*When SHUTTER DISP. on the LCD/VF[3/4] menu screen is set to DEG, the shutter display for the frame rate in 24p or 25p mode is degrees.

Indication Indication Contents

SHUTTER (When STEP is selected)

STATUS 3

Displays a list of setting statuses for USER1, 2, and 3 as well as LENS RET item on the SWITCH MODE menu screen.
X See page 83.
Events are not displayed while these statuses are being displayed.

Indication Indication Contents

USER1
USER2

USER3 NONE, BARS, PRESET TEMP., B.STRETCH1 to 5, B.COMPRESS1 to 5, RET, LOAD FILE

LENS RET RET, FOCUS ASSIST

STATUS 4

This screen only displays VTR mode indication, date and time, event display and alarm indications.
*Whether or not date and time should be displayed and the display style are set on the TIME/DATE menu screen.
X See “Displaying the Time and Date on the Screen” on page 42.

STATUS 2 Screen STATUS 3 Screen

A F symbol is displayed when a menu setting read from LOAD FILE was changed.
The display disappears when the setting is saved using STORE FILE.

(When STEP is selected)
OFF, 1/6, 1/6.25, 1/7.5, 1/12, 1/12.5, 1/15, 1/24, 1/25, 1/30, 1/48, 1/50, 1/60, 1/100, 1/120, 1/250, 1/500, 1/1000, 1/2000,
1/4000, 1/10000
(When VARIABLE is selected)
1/24.01 - 1/10489.5
(Displayed when FAS or ALC mode is selected)
EEI
* The range for the shutter speed differs depending on the video format. X See page 83.

For A and B, ## represents 23, 25, 28, 30, 32, 34, 37, 43, 52, 65, or 80. For PRESET, 32 or 56.

mode) a (for MANUAL mode)

360.0°, 180.0°, 172.8°, 150.0°, 144.0°, 135.0°, 120.0°, 105.0°, 90.0°, 75.0°, 60.0°, 45.0°, 30.0°, 22.5°, 11.2°
(When VARIABLE is selected)
24p: 0.82° to 359.4°, 25p: 0.85° to 359.4°

NONE, BARS, PRESET TEMP., B.STRETCH1 to 5, B.COMPRESS1 to 5, AE LEVEL+, AE LEVEL–, RET, LOAD FILE

26

27

CONTROLS, INDICATORS AND CONNECTORS

Indications on the LCD Monitor
and in the Viewfinder (Cont’d)

Status Screen in VTR MODE

1

4

5

6

78

No. Item Contents

1 VIDEO FORMAT display Displays the video format recorded on the tape when in VTR mode. Also displays t he video format of the

2 Time code (TC) and user’s bits

(UB) display

3 Remaining tape time Remaining tape indication (displayed in 1-minute steps)

4 Event display Displays messages related to VTR operations. X See pages 102-104.
5 Audio sampling frequency in-

dication

6 Audio level meter indication Displays the audio level meters during playback.

7 VTR mode indication Indicates the VTR operation status

2

3

0

9

HDV/DV input signal.
You can switch this display ON/OFF using the VIDEO FORMAT item on the LCD/VF[1/2] menu screen.
X See page 88.

Displays the time code data being recorded (hour, minute, second, frame) when in VTR mode.
You can switch this display ON/OFF using the TC/UB item on the LCD/VF[1/2] menu screen.
X See page 88.
You can select to display either the time code or the user’s bits using the TC DISPLAY switch in the LCD
door.

This indicator blinks when remaining tape time is equivalent to less than 3 minutes.
Whether or not to display this item is set with the TAPE REMAIN item on the LCD/VF[1/2] menu screen.
X See page 88.
*When inserting a brand-new tape, the remaining tape time is not indicated.

When the tape has been run, the indication will appear.
*The remaining tape indication is to be used only as a guide.
*When this device is used at low temperatures, it may t ake a while before the indication of the remaining

tape time appears.

The audio sampling frequency used for the recording is displayed during playbac k.
(32 K, 48 K, 44.1 K)
Whether or not to display this item is set with the AUDIO item on the LCD/VF[1/2] menu screen.
X See page 88.

Whether or not to display this item is set with the AUDIO item on the LCD/VF[1/2] menu screen.
X See page 88.

STBY, STOP, PLAY, REC, FF, REW, FWD, REV, STL, - - - (No tape loaded), SLOW: During variable play­back in forward direction (Displayed when using non-linear editing software.)
(SLOW+1: About ×0.1 speed, SLOW+2: About ×0.2 speed, SLOW+3: A bout ×0.5 speed)
During variable playback in reverse direction (Displayed when using non-linear editing software.)
(SLOW–1: About ×–0.1 speed, SLOW–2: About ×–0.2 speed, SLOW–3: About ×–0.5 speed)

No. Item Contents

8 Time/Date indication Recorded data are displayed during playback, fast forward, and rewind.

9 Voltage indication (Example) 12.2V : Indicates remaining battery level in 0.1V steps.

0 Audio Lock indication Displayed when the audio signal from DV recording or playbac k is locked to the video signal.

During recording in DV format, the data from the IEEE1394 co nnector is displayed.
During recording in HDV format, the data of internal clock is displayed.
(HDV/DV signal input is possible with the GY-HD200U, GY-HD201E.)
Whether or not the date and time should be displayed and the display style are set on the TIME/DATE
menu screen. X See page 92.
When the date and time have not been set, the following indication appears.

- -/- -/- - - -: - -: - -

Battery voltage and remaining battery are displayed. Select the display method in BATTERY INF O. on the
LCD/VF[1/2] menu screen X See page 88.
Anton Bauer battery: Voltage/remaining c apacity (%)/remaining time
IDX Endura battery : Voltage/remaining capacity (%)

Magnified Status Indications on the
LCD Monitor

The characters on the status screens can be showed alone
in magnified size on the LCD monitor.

DISPLAY button

3

1. Set the LCD+VF item on the LCD/VF[4/4] menu screen to ON. X See page 89.

2. When th e DISPLAY button is briefly pressed while the LCD monitor is displayed, the displayed contents change ever y time the

DISPLAY button is pressed.

Only image displayed

Image and characters displayed

No. Item Contents

1 Audio Lock Indicator Displayed during recording and playback when the audio signal is locked to the video signal.
2 Time Code Generator Setting

Indicator

3 Drop/Non-drop Indicator Indicates the framing mode of t he time code.

4 Indication of DR-HD100 Oper-

ation

MEMO

When characters indicating the status are displayed in
magnified size on the LCD monitor, the viewfinder display
the image.

Characters shown enlarged

Indicates the set status of the TC GENE switch on the side section.
FREE : TC GENE switch is set to PRESET-FREE RUN MODE.
RECR : TC GENE switch is set to PRESET-REC RUN MODE.
REGN : T C GENE switch is set to REGEN MODE.
DUPL : There is 1394 input in VTR mode and TC DUPLI. menu is set to ON.

DF : Drop frame mode
NDF : Non-drop frame mode

When a DR-HD100 (HDD unit by FOCUS enhancements) is connected, its operation status is displayed.
(For details, refer to the DR-HD100 INSTRUCTION MANUAL.)

1

4

DD

2

266S

28

29

CONTROLS, INDICATORS AND CONNECTORS

Indications on the LCD Monitor
and in the Viewfinder (Cont’d)

Auto White Balance Indication
(Camera mode only)

The AUTO WHITE indication and the result of the operation are dis­played during the auto white balance adjustment operation.
X See “White Balance Adjustment ” on page 51.

Menu Setting Screen

Screen used for making various settings .
The Menu Setting Screen appears when the STATUS button is
pressed for 1 second or more.
X See “Setting Menu Screens” on page 72.

TOP MENU screen (Camera mode)

Safety Zone Indication (Camera mode only)

The indication of the following saf ety zone and center mark indicat ions can be turned ON/OFF with the S AFETY ZONE item and CEN­TER MARK item on the LCD/VF[1/4] menu sc reen. X See page86.
In addition, the safety zone display is on or off depending o n the REC item setting and the ASPECT item se tting in the VIDEO FOR­MAT[1/2] menu screen, as shown below.

SAFETY ZONE OFF 4:3 14:9 16:9 16:9+4:3

CENTER MARK - OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON

REC ASPECT

DV-60I
DV-50I
DV-24P
DV-24PA
DV-25P

HDV-HD60P
HDV-HD50P
HDV-HD30P
HDV-HD25P
HDV-HD24P

4:3

16:9

[16:9]

Alarm Message Display

•The following alarm messages are displayed while the STA­TUS (0, 1, 4) screen is shown in the Ca mera mode, or a STA­TUS screen is shown in the VTR mode.
If an alarm is generated while the STATUS 2, 3 screen is
shown, the STATUS 0 screen returns to display the alarm.
X See page102.

•When an abnor mality occurs in the VTR, a warning message
with an error code is displayed .
X See pages 102-104.

Alarm display area

Cannot be selected

SAFETY ZONE 2.35:1CE 2.35:1CH

CENTER MARK OFF ON OFF ON

DV-60I
DV-50I
DV-24P
DV-24PA
DV-25P

HDV-HD60P
HDV-HD50P
HDV-HD30P
HDV-HD25P
HDV-HD24P

4:3 Cannot be selected

16:9

[16:9]

Switching between the LCD Screen
and Viewfinder Display

 When the LC D+VF item in the LCD/VF[4/4] menu is set to

OFF, the LCD monitor and viewfinder (VF) displays are as
shown below.

LCD Monitor Status LCD Display VF Display

LCD Closed Normal LCD OFF ON

LCD Open Normal LCD ON OFF

MEMO

•You can switch between the LCD monitor and the view-

•After you set up the function that switches the display

• If the LCD monitor is closed inside this device with the

 When the LC D+VF item in the LCD/VF[4/4] menu is set to

LCD Closed Normal LCD OFF ON

LCD Open Normal LCD ON ON

MEMO

•Press the DISPLAY button for 2 seconds to switch the

•The viewfinder screen is always displayed.

Inverted LCD ON OFF

Inverted LCD ON OFF

finder by holding down the DISPLAY button for about 2
seconds.

between the LCD monitor and the viewfinder by holding
down the DISPLAY button, the display mode is cancelled
by the LCD monitor open/close and normal/inverted
operations.

screen in the norm al display orienta tion, holding down
the DISPLAY button does not work.

ON, the LCD monitor and viewfinder (VF) displays are as
shown below.

LCD Monitor Status LCD Display VF Display

Inverted LCD ON ON

Inverted LCD ON ON

LCD screen display ON and OFF.

Inverted LCD

DISPLAY button

Normal LCD

LCD open 40° or
more

LCD close less
than 40°

30

31

PREPARATIONS

Basic System

Shoulder Belt

Microphone

XLR 3P

Earphone

Focus Manual Unit
*1 HZ-FM13 (FUJINON)

HZ-FM15 (CANON)

Microphone

1/3 Zoom Lens
Th13 × 3.5BRMU (FUJINON)

Wide Converter

WCV-82SC

Focus Manual Unit
*1

Zoom Servo Unit

HZ-ZS13B

1/2 Zoom Lens

S14 × 7.3B12U (FUJINON)
S17 × 6.6BRM (FUJINON)
S20 × 6.4B12U (FUJINON)
YH16 × 7K12U (CANON)
YH19 × 6.7K12U (CANON)

2/3 Zoom Lens

*1An HZ-FM13 cannot be used with a Th16 × 5.5BRMU or S14 × 7.3B12/U zoom lens.

Use a FUJINON focus manual unit (FMM-8, CFH-3, CFC-12-990).
For details, please consult your JVC authorized dealer.

1/3 Zoom Lens
Th16 × 5.5BRMU (FUJINON)
(Excluding the CHU/CHE model)

GY-HD200U/GY-HD200E/GY-HD201E
Standard Package

Mount Converter
(1/2r1/3): ACM-12
(2/3r1/3): ACM-17

MACRO

Carrying Case

ND FILTER

2

1

ON

SD Memory Card

Tripod Ba se

Dolly

VF BRIGHT

USER 3USER 2USER 1

MENU

STATUS

WHT.BAL

AUTO

AUTO
AUDIO
LEVEL

CH-1 CH-2

OFF

POWER

REC

Tripod

Battery mount
GY-HD200U: Gold Mount
GY-HD200E: V Mount
GY-HD201E: V Mount

XLR 4P

Anton Bauer

IDX (Endura)

Component Cable
BNC

Composite Cable
RCA pin

Audio Cable
RCA pin

IEEE1394 Cable

6P-6P

For GY-HD200U

Anton Bauer

Battery Charger

Battery

For GY-HD200E/GY-HD201E

IDX

Battery Charger

Battery

AC Adapter

HDD Unit

DR-HD100

Non-linear Editing Syste m

AC

Remote Control Unit

RM-LP55/RM-LP57

Monitor

DV VTR

BR-HD50

Monitor

Attaching the Zoom Lens

1. Loosen the mount ring.

2. Attach the lens with its pin aligned with the hole in the

mount.

3. Ti ghten the mount ring.

4. Connect the cable connector.

5. Cla mp the lens cable.

Hole

Pin

Clamp

CAUTION

•Be sure to tighten the mount ring completely. Incomplete
tightening may result in the lens dropping off or disturbed
back focus.

•Set this device’s power switch to “OFF” before the zoom
lens is attached or detached.

Attaching the Microphone
(Provided)

Connect the provided microphone to the microphone holder.
Provided microphone is a phantom microphone.

1. Tu rn t he knob on the microphone holder anticlockwise to

loosen it and open the microphone holder.

2. Place the microphone in the microphone holder.

Place the microphone toward the front to prevent it from
interfering with the cassette cover.

3. Tu rn t he knob on the microphone holder clockwise to

secure the microphone.

4. Connect the microphone cable to the INPUT1 or INPUT2

input connector on this device.

5. Attach the microphone cable to the clamp.

6. Make sure to perform the correct setting for use of a

phantom microphone.
X See page 55.

1. 3. Knob

2. Microphone

Microphone
holder

5. Clamp

4. INPUT1, 2 connector

How to Attach the View­finder

1. To a t ta c h t he viewfinder, slide it in the direction of the

arrow.

2. Set the viewfinder to a comfortable position and then turn

the slide mounting ring and mount.

 To t a k e o ff the viewfinder, pull the knob in the direction of

the arrow as you slide the viewfinder.

Knob

Tak i ng off the viewfinder

2.

Slide mounting ring

1.

32

33

PREPARATIONS

How to Attach the Viewfinder
(Cont’d)

About the Viewfinder Cable

Attach the viewfinder cable to the clamp 7 on page 14.
To r edu ce the emission of unwanted radio waves, be sure to
attach the provided core filter as shown in the figure below.

•Attach the core filter (black) as close to this device as pos­sible, as shown in the figure.

3. Close the SD memory card cover.

Cutout

SD memory card cover

Attaching the Tripod Base
(Optional)

Use the optional tripod base to place the camera on a tripod.

1. Attach the tripod base on the tripod by using the hole that

balances this device most optimally.

CAUTION

•The front base mount may be locked while the pin of the
tripod base is not inserted into the hole on the rear base
mount of this device. Therefore, after mounting, make
sure that these parts are engaged properly.

•When moving this device mounted on a tripod, any
impact or vibration should be avoided as this may cause
this device to become detached and to drop from the tri­pod.
Be sure to remove this device from the tripod before
transporting it.

Core filter (black)

Inserting an SD Memory
Card

By using an SD memory card, you can save and call up menu
settings and camera settings for this device.
X See “FILE MANAGE Menu Screen” on page 96.

Check that the POWER switch is OFF.

Inserting an SD Memory Card

1. Ope n the SD memory card cover.

2. Face the cutout end of the SD memory card inward and

insert it in the direction of the arrow.

CAUTION

Be sure not to touch the metal connector area of the SD
memory card.

Taking out the SD memory card

1. Push the SD memory card in the direction of the arrow.

•The SD memory car d comes out slightly.

2. Pull the SD memory card straight out.

About SD Memory Cards

•When you use an SD memory card that is either new or
was formatted on a device other than this device, format it
on this device.
X See page 98.
Recommended SD memory cards
Panasonic: 16 MB to 2 GB

•You can write-protect the card so that saved files are not
mistakenly erased. Set the switch on the side of the SD
memory card to the “LOCK” position.

LOCK switch

MEMO

SDHC-compliant memory car ds cannot be used with this
device.

1. Tripod mounting holes

2. While pushing the safety lever, pull the lock lever toward

the front until the front mount clip clicks into place.

Front mount clip

3. Pin

2. Safety lever

2.

Lock lever

3. Place this device on the tripod base by aligning the rear

base mount of this device with the pin on the tripod base.

4. Front base mount

4. Hol d the camera on the top and slide forward so that the

base mount of the camera is locked by the front mount
clip of this device as it clicks into place.

3. Rear base mount

4.

VF BRIGHT

USER 3USER 2USER 1

MACRO

ND FILTER

2

1

MENU

STATUS

WHT.BAL

AUTO

AUTO
AUDIO
LEVEL

CH-1 CH-2

ON

OFF

POWER

REC

34

35

PREPARATIONS

AC Operation

This device is operable with AC power supply or battery
pack.
Use the AC adapter as the AC power supply.

1. After making su re that the power switches of this de vice

and of the AC adapter are set to OFF, connect the DC
cable to the DC OUTPUT connector of the AC adapter
and the DC INPUT connector of this device as shown in
the illustration.

•To lessen the amount of unnecessary radio waves
emitted, attach a provided Clamp filter near both ends
of the DC cable as shown in the diagram.

CH2-AUDIO OUT-CH1 VIDEO

Clamp filter

DC INPUT

DC cable

DC OUTPUT

Clamp filter

2. Press the POWER switch of this device to ON. Power is

supplied to the VTR section and the camera.

CAUTION

•Do not remove or connect the DC cable while recording
is being performed.

•Do not use any power source with large fluctuations in
the power source voltage, power sources generating
noise, such as ripples or power sources with lower volt­age.

IEEE 1394

AC adapter

Charging the Built-in Battery

The built-in, rechargeable backup battery retains the date
and time and the time code data.
The built-in battery is constantly being charge whenever this
device is connected to a power supply, but it gradually dis­charges while this device is disconnected from a power sup­ply. The battery will be fully discharged when this device is
not used for about three months, in which case the set date
and time and time code data are reset.
In this case, recharge the built-in battery and then set the
date and time and time code data again.
However, it is possible to use this device even if the built-in
battery is discharged but the date and time and time code
data cannot be recorded.

How to charge the built-in battery

1. Connect the AC adapter to this device and an AC outlet

or mount a charged battery on this device.

2. Set the POWER switch on this device to “ON” or “OFF”

(charging takes places with the POWER switch set to
either of the positions).

3. Leave the equipment in this condition for about 4 hours.

•The built-in battery will remain charged for about 3
months after being charged for about 4 hours.

Battery Operation

The attachable battery varies depending on location.
Recommended batteries

U model: Dionic 90 (Anton Bauer)
E model: Endura-7 (IDX)

CAUTION

Use only the recommended batteries.
If a heavy battery is used, the battery may fall out depend­ing on the way the HD camera recorder is used.

GY-HD200U

Use an Anton Bauer battery.

Attaching the Battery

1. Align the battery guide pins (three places) with the bat-

tery adapter guide holes and insert straight. Battery will
not be properly attached if guide pins are not straight.

Cassette cover
side panel

Release lever

LCD screen
side panel

2. Slide the battery towards the Cassette cover side panel

until it clicks.

•The battery is attached.

Removing the Battery

Slide the battery towards you (LCD screen side panel) while
holding down the release lever, and pull away from the
device to remove the battery.

Release lever

Guide
holes (×3)

Guide pins

Battery

Battery pack
(trim pack)

GY-HD200E/GY-HD201E

Use an IDX (Endura) battery.

Attaching the Battery

1. Face the battery terminals down and align the battery V-

mount with the battery adapter V-mount attachment.

V-mo unt
attachment

2. Slide the battery down until it clicks and locks.

•The battery is attached.

Removing the Battery

Slide the battery up while holding down the lock release but­ton to remove the battery.

Release button

V-mou nt

Battery

36

37

PREPARATIONS

Battery Operation
(Cont’d)

Precautions for the Battery Opera­tion

•Do not detach the battery pack while recording is taking
place.

•Do not connect or disconnect the DC cable while operat­ing with a battery pack.
The following symptoms may occur if the DC cable is con­nected or disconnected while operating with a battery
pack.

•The power is cut off for a moment when the DC cable is

disconnected.

•Noise to the video and audio signals occurs. Audio sig-

nal are muted.

•When operation is continued with DC input after the bat­tery pack capacity has been used up, set the POWER
switch to OFF after the DC power is applied. Then switch
ON again.

•If this device is left with the b attery pack attached, a small
amount of power is con sumed even if the PO WER switch
on this device is set to OFF.
Remove the battery pack when this device is not going to
be used.

Remaining Battery Power Display

LCD monitor/Viewfinder

When the remaining battery power is nearly exhausted, the
following warnings will be generated.
 Vie wfinder screen or LCD monitor

When a Status screen is displayed (excluding the STATUS
2, 3 screen in the Camera mode)

•Alarm indication: LOW VOLTAGE displayed.

 FRONT and BACK TALLY lamp on camera: Blinks
 Monitori ng loudspeaker and PHONES jack: Alarm sound

MEMO

•After the remai ning battery power warnings appear, this
device automatically stops operation if the battery power
operation is continued.

•When you use an Anton Bauer battery, the remaining
battery (capac ity or time) can be di splayed in the STA­TUS 1 screen of the LCD screen or viewfinder. Set BAT­TERY INFO. on the LCD/VF[3/4] menu screen to
CAPA% or TIME to display the remaining battery. When
using the IDX Endura battery, the remaining capacity (%)
can be displayed. X See page 88.

Operating Time with Battery Pack

When a fully charged battery pack is attached, the approxi­mate continuous operating time is as follows

Battery Pack Continuous Operating Time (at 25°C (77°F))

Dionic 90
(U model)

Endura-7
(E model)

•Battery operating time may differ depending on the age of
the battery pack, charging conditions and the operating
environment, etc. Use the values in the table on the above
for approximate reference times.

•Operating time is reduced in areas with a cold environ­ment.

•Operating time is reduced when the power zoom lens and
LCD are used frequently.

Approx. 3.2 hours

Approx. 2.5 hours

Precautions for the Battery Pack

•When the battery pack is not in use, it must be stored in a
cool, dry place.
Do not leave the battery pack in a place where it might be
subject to a high temperature (under direct sunlight in a
car, etc.), this could caus e leakage of the fluid or shorten
service life.

•When the terminal section of the battery pack gets dirty,
the operating time will be shortened.

• If the operating time becomes greatly reduced even imme­diately after recharging, the service life of the battery pack
is nearly finished.
Purchase a new battery pack.

Recharging

•Recharge the battery pack after completely discharging it.
Repeated recharging with residual charge remaining could
result in reduced battery capacity.

• If the battery capacity is reduced by repeating incomplete
recharging, or recharging without discharging, once dis­charge the batte ry pack completely, then recharge it to
restore the battery capacity.

• If the battery pack is recharged with its internal tempera­ture raised immediately after use, recharging may not be
performed completely.

•Perform charging in an environment where the tempera­ture is between 10°C (50°F) and 35°C (95°F). 20°C (68°F)
to 25°C (77°F) is the ideal temperature range for charging.
If the environment is too cold, charging may not complete.

PREPARATIONS FOR OPERATION

Turning the Power ON

Turning the Power ON

1. Set the POWER switch to ON.

This device turns on in Camera mode.

 The operation differs according to whether this device is in

the Camera mode or in the VTR mode.
The mode switches each time you press the CAM/VTR button.
When the mode is switched, the VTR indicator displays
the following statuses.

While the mode is being switched : Flashing
In VTR mode : Lit
In Camera mode : Off

VTR indicator

VF BRIGHT

USER 3USER 2USER 1

ND FILTER

2

1

MENU

STATUS

WHT.BAL

AUTO

AUDIO
LEVEL

CH-1 CH-2

ON

OFF

POWER

REC

Camera mode

This device enters the Camera mode. The camera image
is displayed in the viewfinder or on the LCD monitor. When
a recordable videocassette is loaded, this device enters
the record-standby mode automatically. “STBY” is dis­played in the VTR operation mode indication area of the
LCD monitor and/or in the viewfinder. In this condition,
press the REC/VTR trigger button to start recording.
*Playback is also possible in the Camera mode.

VTR mode

This device enters the VTR mode. The camera im age will
not be displayed in the viewfinder or on the LCD monitor.
When a videocassette is loaded, this device enters the
stop mode.
“STOP” is displayed in the VTR operation mode indication
area of the LCD monitor and/or in the viewfinder.
HDV/DV input is possible through the IEEE1394 connector.

POWER switch

Playback operation becomes possible when the STOP
button is pressed to set the VTR operation mode indica­tor to indicate “STOP”.

LCD BRIGHT

CAM/VTR

­+

TC

AUDIO SELECT

GENE.

CH-2

DISPLAY

CH-1

FREE

TC

AUTO

REC

MANU

UB

AUTO

REGEN

CAM/VTR button

Tur n ing th e Power OFF

1. Place this device in the record-standby or STOP mode.

2. Set the POWER switch to OFF.

3. Remove the battery pack or the power supply to the DC

INPUT connector. (When the camera is not going to be
used for a longer period.)

CAUTION

•Do not set the POWER switch to OFF while recording is
taking place.
Confirm that the “STBY” or “STOP” indication is shown in
the VTR operation mode indication area before the
power is turned off.
Should the POWER switch acciden tally be set to OFF
during a recording, wait at least 5 seconds before turning
the power on again.

•Always set the POWER switch to OFF before discon­necting the power supply.
Do not remove the battery pack or turn AC adapter OFF
while the POWER switch on the camera is still set to ON.

38

39

PREPARATIONS FOR OPERATION

Loading/Unloading the
Cassette

Cassette Loading

Use a videocassette tape marked MiniDV.

•To record, slide the switch on the back for use in prevent­ing accidental erasure to the “REC” side.

•Remove any the tape slack before loading.

1. Tu rn the POWER switch ON.

2. Slide the EJECT switch on the top panel of this device to

the side.
The videocassette cover opens automatically and a vid­eocassette tape can be insert ed.

3. Insert a videocassette tape into the videocassette holder.

With the tape window facing out, move the switch on the
back of the videocassette up and firmly push the center
back of the videocassette straight in as far as it will go.

4. Carefully push the center (“Push here” sticker) of the vid-

eocassette cover in the direction of the arrow as far as it
will go to close it.

•After the cover is closed , it takes about 10 s econds
until recording can begin or this device can enter
STOP mode.

REC/SAVE

EJECT switch

Cassette holder

Videoc assette cover

 If the power is on, the modes are as shown below.

MODE

Camera Record-standby mode STOP mode

VTR STOP mode

REC/SAVE switch

REC SAVE

Tap e window

switch

Inner cover

REC INHIBIT is displayed
on the LCD monitor and in
the viewfinder.

Unloading the Cassette

1. Tu rn the POWER switch to ON.

2. When this device is in shooting standby mode or stop

mode, slide the EJECT switch to the side and wait until
the videocassette cover opens completely.

•The LED next to the EJECT switch flashes.
A few seconds pass before the videocassette tape is
ejected.

3. The LED turns off and the videocassette cover opens.

•Take out the videocassette tape.

4. Caref ully push the center of the videocassette cover in

the direction of the arrow as far as it will go to close it.

CAUTION

•When you close the videocassette cover, push it in firmly
as far as it will go. If the videocassette cover is not closed
properly, it becomes half-locked and this device cannot
function.
If this happens, firmly push the videocassette cover in
again as far as it will go to lock it.

•The videocassette cover does not open during recording
even if you slide the EJECT switch.

•Do not leave the videocassette cover open for a long
time.
Dust or dirt may enter the inside and cause damage.

•Do not touch the vide ocassette cover or interfere with the
eject operation while ejecting is in progress. This will
cause damage.

•When you close the videocassette cover, do not press
the black area of the inner cover.

Setting and Displaying the
Date and Time

The date and time of the built-in clock should be set. Pow­ered by the built-in backup battery the set date and time data
continue to count even when the power is switched off.

•The set date and time data are displayed on the LCD mon­itor or in the viewfinder and recorded on the tape in accor­dance with the settings made on the menu screen.

Setting the Date and Time Style

The date and time are set on the menu screen.
When setting while observing on a monitor connected to the
connector, set the ANALOG OUT CHAR. item on the OTH­ERS[1/2] menu screen to ON.

1. Set the POWER switch to ON.

2. Press the STATUS button for 1 second or longer to dis-

play the TOP MENU screen.

3.

SHUTTER dial

2.

STATUS button

3. Rotate the SHUTTER dial to align the cursor (K) with the

TC/UB/CLOCK item, and then press the SHUTTER dial
in the direction of the camera body.

•The TC/UB/CLOCK menu screen appears.

4. Rotate the SHUTTER dial to align the cursor (K) with the

TIME/DATE item, and then press the SHUTTER dial.

•The TIME/DATE menu screen appears.

•Set the DISPLAY item on the TIME/DATE menu
screen to ON.

ND FILTER

2

1

WHT.BAL

ON

OFF

POWER

POWER switch

1.

STATUS

USER 3USER 2USER 1

MENU

AUTO

AUDIO
LEVEL

CH-1 CH-2

REC

AUTO

TC/UB/CLOCK menu screen

5. Make settings on the TIME/DATE menu screen. (This

includes display style, etc.)

TIME/DATE menu screen

DATE STYLE : Selects the style for displaying the

TIME STYLE : The time can be set to display as a 12-

SEC DISPLAY : To select whether or not indication of

TIME SHIFT : Adds time to the built-in clock (time

1Rotate the SHUTTER dial to align the cursor (K) with

the item to be set, and then press the SHUTTER dial.

•The setting area of the selected item starts blinking.

2Rotate the SHUTTER dial to change the setting, and

then press the SHUTT ER dial.

•The setting area stops blinking and the setting is
entered.

MEMO

The TIME STYLE, SEC DISPLAY, DATE STYLE and TIME
SHIFT items can also be set and changed after the date
and time have been set.

date.
YY/MM/DD (Year, month, day)
MM/DD/YY (Month, day, year)
DD/MM/YY (Day, month, year)

hour or 24-hour clock system.

seconds should be displayed on the
screen.

compensation) and displays it. The
adjusted time is also recorded on the
tape.

40

41

PREPARATIONS FOR OPERATION

Setting and Displaying the Date
and Time (Cont’d)

Setting the Date and Time

1. Disp lay the CLOCK ADJUST menu screen.

Select the CLOCK ADJUST item on the TIME/DATE
menu screen.

2. Set the date and time.

The blinking digit is the one to be set.

Time (Hour:Min)

1When the SHUTTER dial is pressed, the blinking digit

moves to the next digit.

2When the SHUTTER dial is rotated, the value of the

blinking digit changes.
When the SHUTTER dial is rotated upward, the value
becomes higher. When rotated downward, the value
becomes smaller.

3Repeat the procedure described in 1 and 2 above to

set the day, month, year, hours, minutes.
The digits indicating seconds cannot be set.

4Press the SHUTTER dial in sync with a time signal to

enter the date and time precisely.

3. When all the settings are completed, rotate the SHUT-

TER dial to align the cursor with the PAGE BACK item,
and then press the SHUTTER dial.

•The TIME/DATE menu screen returns.

4. To re tu rn to the normal screen, use either of the following

methods.
Press the STATUS button
or
Return to the TOP MENU screen and then select the
EXIT item on the TOP MENU screen before pressing the
SHUTTER dial.

Date

TIME/DATE menu screen

CLOCK ADJUST menu screen

Displaying the Time and Date on the
Screen

Whether or not the time and date should be displayed on the
screen and how to display them are set on the TIME/DATE
menu screen.

Date Time

1. Display the TIME/DATE menu screen.

1

Select the TC/UB/ CLOCK item on the TOP MENU
screen.

2Select the TIME/DATE item on the TC/UB/CLOCK

menu screen.

2. Set the TIME/DATE menu screen.

•DISPLAY item : Sets whether or not date and time

•DISPLAY MODE
item

BARS :

CAM : Displayed when outputting the color

BARS+CAM :

•DISPLAY
STYLE item
DATE+TIME : Date and time are displayed.
DATE : Date only is displayed.
TIME : Time only is displayed.

 Display of dat e and time in the various operation modes.
In Camera mode : The date and time of the internal

In VTR playback mode : The date and time recorded on the

In VTR stop mode : The last read date and time values

When an HDV/DV sig­nal is input from the
IEEE1394 connector

should be displayed.
Set to ON to display the indications.

:Sets the video output mode in

which date and time should be dis­played.
Displayed when outputting the color
bar.

camera image.
Date and time are always displayed.

:Sets the style in which the date and

time are displayed.

clock are displayed.

tape are displayed.

are displayed.

:The date and time of the DV input

are displayed in DV format. The
date and time of the internal clock
are displayed in HDV format.
(GY-HD200U/GY-HD201E only)

Displaying Time Code

This device records SMPTE-standard (NTSC) or EBU-stan­dard (PAL) time codes and user’s bits. In the play mode or
the record mode, the reproduced time codes or user’s bits
are shown on the LCD monitor or in the viewfinder.

The time codes or user’s bits can be shown on the LCD mon­itor or in the viewfinder during playback and recording as fol­lows. (Status screen)

Setting

1. Set the TC/UB item on the LCD/VF[3/4] menu screen to

ON.

•Time codes or user’s bit data are displayed on the
STATUS screen.

Time cod e indication

STATUS 1 screen

2. Whether time codes or user’s bit data should be dis-

played is selected with the TC DISPLAY switch inside the
LCD door.

TC : Time codes are displayed.
UB : User’s bit data is displayed.

LCD BRIGHT

-

+

AUDIO SELECT

CH-2

CH-1

AUTO
MANU

TC DISPLAY switch TC GENE. switch

DISPLAY

TC

TC
UB

CAM/VTR

GENE.

(Example)
Time c ode indication

00:00:00:00

User’s bits indication

FF EE DD 20

FREE
REC
REGEN

Time code input entered the
IEEE1394 connector (GY-HD200U/
GY-HD201E only)

Pressing the STOP button for 1 second in the EJECT or stop
mode displays the DV input time code data or user’s bit data
from the IEEE1394 connector on the STATUS screen.

DTCG :The time code data from the IEEE1394 connector
DUBG : The user’s bit data from the IEEE1394 connector

To r e t urn to display of the original time code or user’s bit,
press the STOP button. (Display of the normal time code or
user’s bit is also restored by performing VTR operation.)

MEMO

•To record HDV/DV input time code and user’s bit from
the IEEE1394 connector, set the TC DUPLI. item on the
TC/UB/CLOCK menu screen to ON.
X See page 90.

•To maintain the continuity of time code data, use with the
TC GENE. switch set to REGEN mode when recording
HDV/DV input signal from the IEEE1394 connector.

• There is no time code display for HDV input.

CAUTION

A time code with a durati on of more than 2 hours ma y not
be displayed correctly by DV components for general con­sumer use, as some of these lack the capability to display
longer time codes.

42

43

PREPARATIONS FOR OPERATION

Presetting and Recording
of Time Code

The time codes from the internal time code generator can be
recorded at the time of recording scenes.

•The TC/UB/CLOCK menu screen differs depending on
whether the FRAME RATE item on the VIDEO FORMAT
menu screen is “60/30” or “50/25”.

There are two ways to preset the time code.

•Set from the TC /UB/CLOCK menu screen.

•Set in the LCD screen without opening the menu screen.

This section explains how to set from the TC/UB/CLOCK
menu screen.
*See page 46 for inst ructions of setting from the LCD

screen.

Menu and switch settings to set the time code preset are the
same as the settings below.

Setting

To p res et the Time Code, make the following settings.
 TC GENE. switch

Set to REC or FREE.
REC : The data preset in the time code generator

FREE : The time code starts to run from the time it is

runs only during recording.
Use this setting if it is necessary to record
continual time codes across different scenes.
*However, approximately ±1-fr ame varia-

tions may occur in scene accuracy.

preset in the time code generator.

 TC/UB/CLOCK menu screen (FRAME RATE: 60/30)

Use the DROP FRAME item to select the framing mode
for the time code generator.

DROP : Th e time code generator’s running method is

NON
DROP

MEMO

Drop frame/Non-drop frame mode

In the NTSC syste m, the actual number of frames per 1
second is approxima tely 29.97 frames, but per time code
30 frames are processed. To compensate for this differ­ence, the mode cal led “drop mode” dr ops frame 00 and 0 1
for every minute no t divisible by 10.
The “non-drop frame mode” is when no frames are dropped
and the actual tim e shift neglected.

 TC/UB/CLOCK menu screen (FRAME RATE: 50/25)

Whether or not user’s bit data should be recorded can be
selected with the UB REC item on th e TC/UB/CLOCK
menu screen.

set the drop frame mode.
Use this setting when plac ing emphasis on
the recording time.

:The time code generator’s running method is

set to the non drop frame mode.
Use this setting when plac ing emphasis on
the number of frames.

TC/UB/CLOCK menu screen

(FRAME RATE: 60/30)

Framing mode:
Drop frame/
Non-drop setting

TC/UB/CLOCK menu screen

(FRAME RATE: 50/25)

Presetting time code data

The time code and user’s bit data are preset on the TC/UB/
CLOCK menu screen.

1. Disp lay the TC/UB/CLOCK menu screen.

Select the TC/UB/CLOCK item on the TOP MENU
screen.

Time c ode (hour, min, sec, frame)

2. Set the time code (hours, minutes, seconds, frames).

1Rotate the SHUTTER dial to align the cursor (K) with

TC PRESET, and then press the SHUTTER dial.

•The first digit of the time code blinks.
The blinking digit is the one to be set.

2When the SHUTTER dial is pressed, the blinking digit

changes.

3When the SHUTTER dial is r otated, the value o f the

blinking digit changes.
When the SHUTTER dial is rotated upward, the value
becomes higher. When rotated downward, the value
becomes smaller.

4Repeat the procedure described in 2 and 3 above to

set the desired value for all digits.

5After setting the frame digit, press the SHUTTER dial to

make EXECUTE blink. The setting values are con­firmed when the SHUTTER dial is pressed again.
To c ancel the setting, select CANCEL and press the
SHUTTER dial.

3. When all the digits are set

•Press the STATUS button to return to the normal
screen
or

•Rotate the SHUTTER dial to align the cursor (K) with
the PAGE BACK item, and then press the SHUTTER
dial to return to the TOP MENU screen.

Presetting user’s bit data

The user’s bit data are preset with the UB PRESET item on
the TC/UB/CLOCK menu screen.
The method for setting is the same as the method for setting
the time code described on the left.

•The user’s bit can be specified using numerals or alpha­betic letters from 0 to F for each digit.

•To record user’s bit data, set the UB REC item to ON (Only
when set to FRAME RATE 50/25).

CAUTION

It is not possible to set all the digits of the user’s bit data to
“F”.
Reading of the data during playback will not be possible for
an all-F setting.

Zero-resetting the Time Code or
User’s Bit Data

This is performed with the TC or UB PRESET item on the
TC/UB/CLOCK menu screen. (Performed separately for the
time code and the user’s bit data.)

1Rotate the SHUTTER dial to align the cursor (K) with the

TC or UB PRESET item, and then press the SHUTTER
dial.

2Rotate the SHUTTER dial to select ZERO PRESET as the

setting value, and then press the SHUTTER dial.

MEMO

When a menu screen is not being displayed, you can zero
reset the time code data by simultaneously holding down
the USER2 button and the STOP button for about 1 sec­ond.

44

45

PREPARATIONS FOR OPERATION

Presetting the Time Code
from the LCD Screen

The time code can be preset directly from the LCD screen
without opening the TC/UB/CLOCK menu screen.

CAUTION

PRESET mode is not available in the following.

•TC GENE. switch is set to REGEN.

•TC DUPLI. item in the TC/UB/CLOCK menu screen is
set to ON.

•Menu screen is displ ayed.

•RECORDING mode is act ive.

•Switching to CAM/VTR mode (When VTR indicator is
blinking).

Setting

 TC/UB/CLOCK menu screen

•Set framing of the time code generator in DROP
FRAME. (When set to FRAME RATE 60/30)

•Set to enable/disable user’s bit recording in UB REC.
(When set to FRAME RATE 50/25)

 Set the TC GENE switch to REC or FREE.

MEMO

See page 44 for details on the above settings.

 Set the TC DISPLAY switch.
Set to TC to preset time code and UB to preset user’s bit.

Operation

This section describes presetting of the time code.

ND FILTER

2

1

OFF

USER 2 button

SHUTTER

MENU

STATUS

USER 3 button

USER 3USER 2USER 1

SHUTTER dial

STATUS button

USER 1 button

VF BRIGHT

USER 3USER 2USER 1

ND FILTER

2

1

MENU

STATUS

WHT.BAL

AUTO

AUTO
AUDIO
LEVEL

CH-1 CH-2

ON

OFF

POWER

REC

1. In Standby or Stop mode, press the USER1 button for

about 2 seconds while holding down the STATUS button.

•The current time code generator data is displayed in
enlarged display mode on the LCD screen. The hour
digit starts blinking.

Blink

2. Press the USER2 button to reset all data.

•Data becomes “00:00:00:00” and the hour digit starts
blinking.

3. Set the time code (hour, minute, second and frame).

The blinking digit can be set.

1Turn t he SHUTTER dial to change the value of the

blinking digit. Turn the SHUTTER dial up to increase the
value and down to decrease the value.

2Press the SHUTTER dial to change the blinking digit.
3Repeat steps 1 and 2 and continue setting for eac h

row.

4. Press the USER3 button to confirm the setting data.

•The LCD screen returns to the original screen.

Presetting User’s Bit

You can specify the user’s bit with a number or character
between 0 - F.

CAUTION

All digits of user’s bit cannot be set to F.
If all digits are set to F and read, user’s bit is deemed as
undefined during p layback.

Aborting Preset Operation

While presetting, press the USER1 button while holding
down the STATUS button.

•Preset operation stops and the LCD screen returns to
the original screen.

CAUTION

 Preset operation is terminated in the following.

•TC DISPLAY switch is changed

•CAM/VTR mode switch is changed

•VTR operations are performed

 USER1, USER2, and USER3 presetting in the SWITCH

MODE menus screen is not available when t he Time Code
Preset screen is displayed.

 The time code preset scr een is displayed on the LCD

screen or viewfinder. It will not be output from the VIDEO
OUT terminal.

Recording Time Codes in

Playing Back Time Code
Continuation of Time
Codes Recorded on Tape

This device also incorporates a time code reader. Therefore,
when this device enters record mode from record-standby
mode, it can read the time code data recorded on the tape
and record time codes in continuation of the existing data.
The recorded user’s bit data are identical to the user’s bit
date recorded on tape.
*However, approximately ±1-frame variations may occur in

scene accuracy.
To enable this function, set the time code related switches as
follows before starting recording.

Setting

•Set the TC GENE. switch inside the LCD door to REGEN.

•Set TC DUPLI. item on the TC/UB/CLOCK menu screen

to OFF.

MEMO

The time code framing mode automatically becomes the
mode (drop frame or non drop frame) already recorded on
the tape.

About Time Code Mode

 Camera mode

FREE REC REGEN

TC PRESET mode TC REGENE mode

 VTR mode/IEEE1394 input mode

TC/UB/CLOCK menu TC GENE. switch

TC DUPLI. item FREE REC REGEN

*

IEEE1394 TC SLAVE mode is performed with special operations. X See page 48.

TC GENE. switch

OFF

ON IEEE1394 TC DUPLI. mode

IEEE1394 TC

SLAVE mode*

TC PRESET mode TC REGENE mode

This device features a time code reader. During pl ayback,
the time code or user’s bit data recorded on the tape is dis­played on the LCD screen or viewfinder status screen.

MEMO

•During playback, if a portion of tape without recording
time code runs through, the time code stops running.
Playback continues.

•When a tape with a time code that is longer than two
hours is played on home-use DV equipment, time code
may not be played properly on some models.

46

47

PREPARATIONS FOR OPERATION

Synchronizing with the
Time Code of the IEEE1394
(DV)-Connected Master Unit

You c an s y nchronize the time c ode when performing multi-camera recording. The internal time code generator will be synchro­nized with the time code in the signal input from the IEEE1394 terminal. After synchronization (slave lock), the internal time code
generator continues to run even if the IEEE1394 cable is disconnected.

Master unit Slave unit

VF BRIGHT

USER 3USER 2USER 1

MACRO

ND FILTER

2

1

MENU

STATUS

WHT.BAL

AUTO

AUTO
AUDIO
LEVEL

CH-1 CH-2

ON

OFF

POWER

REC

switch to the [DV] side.

You can use the GY-HD200U or GY-HD201E as a slave unit.
You cannot use the GY-HD200E as a slave unit.

IEEE1394 terminal IEEE1394 terminalSlide the IEEE1394

Connections

Connect the master unit and the slave unit with an IEE E1394
cable.

Settings and Operations

•Master unit (GY-HD200U/GY-HD200E/GY-HD201E/GY­HD250U/GY-HD251E/GY-HD100, 101 series/GY-HD110,
111 series)

1. Set the IEEE1394 switch on the left side to [DV].

2. Set to Camera mode.

3. Set the recording format to DV-60I or DV50I.

4. Set the TC GENE. switch to [FREE].

•Slave unit (GY-HD200U/GY-HD201E)

1. Set the IEEE1394 switch on the left side to [DV].

2. Set to VTR mode.

3.

Check that the camera image from the master unit is input.

4. Set the TC GENE. switch to [FREE] and the TC DISPLAY

switch to [TC].

5. Set to STOP mode or EJECT mode.

6. Press the STOP button for 1 second.

•The DV input time code data from the IEEE1394 termi­nal is displayed in the status display. (When status is in
magnified size, characters are displayed.)

7. Press the USER1 button to begin slave lock.

(To skip slave lock, press the USER3 bu tton and clear
the status display.)

IEEE1394 cable

8. Check that the time code that is synchronized with the

master unit is running.

9. Disconnect the IEEE1394 cable.

10.The slave unit finally returns to Camera mode.

MEMO

 Slave lock cannot be performed in the following

instances.

•Slave unit is in CAMERA mode

•Slave unit is in VTR mode and there is no DV signal

•The TC GENE. switch on the s lave unit is not set to
FREE

•The slave unit is GY-HD200E

• HDV format

 If slave lock is performed in DV format and is then

switched to HDV format, frame digit may deviate.

 If power is turned off, slave lock is disabled. Perform

slave lock operation again.

 Slave lock cannot be performed for UB (User’s bit).

 If the frame rate for the master unit and slave unit is not

synchronized, it will not run properly. Synchronize frame
rate before using.

 If DROP/NON DROP is not synchronized, it will not run

properly. Synchronize DROP/NON DROP before using.

VF BRIGHT

USER 3USER 2USER 1

MACRO

ND FILTER

2

1

MENU

STATUS

WHT.BAL

AUTO

AUDIO
LEVEL

CH-1 CH-2

ON

OFF

POWER

REC

EXECUTE USER1
CANCEL

AUTO

Slide the IEEE1394
switch to the [DV] side.

Statu s displ ay

00 : 00 : 00 : 00

DTCG

TC SLAVE LOCK ?

USER3

Screen Adjustment

LCD monitor direction, angle, screen brightness, etc. can be
adjusted.

Adjusting the Direction and Angle of the
LCD monitor

•With the LCD door in the open condition, rotate the LCD
door.

•It can be turned 180° in upward direction and 90° in down­ward direction.
When turned 180° upward direction, the LCD monitor can
be viewed from the le ns side (vertically inverted image).

PEAKING volume

LCD BRIGHT
button

L

CD

BRI

G
HT

­+

C
A

M

/
V
T

R

AUDIO

SELE

C
T

T

C

C

H­1

C
H-

2

D

A

I
S

U

PL

TO

A

Y

GENE.

M

TC

A

N
U

F
R
E
E

UB

R
EC
R
EG

180° up

Adjusting the LCD monitor

• PEAKING:
Adjusts the contour of the LCD moni tor.

•LCD BRIGHT:
Adjusts the brightness of the LCD monitor.

Adjustments are made on the LCD/VF[2/4] menu screen.
X See page 87.

•LCD MIRROR MODE:
Sets the LCD monitor to display mirrored images when
shooting facing the subject.

Adjustments are made on the LCD/VF[4/4] menu screen.
X See page 89.

•LCD CONTRAST:
Adjusts the contrast of the LCD monitor.

•BLACK & WHITE:
Sets the LCD monitor and viewfinder to black and white
display.

EN

90° down

LCD lock release lever

Viewfinder Adjustment

Direction of the Viewfinder

Adjust the position and angle of the viewfinder.

Diopter Adjustment

Rotate the eyepiece focusing ring until the viewfinder screen
image is clearly visible.

Adjustment of the Viewfinder Screen

• PEAKING:
Adjusts the contour of the LCD monitor and the viewfinder
screen.

•VF BRIGHT:
Adjusts the brightness of the viewfinder screen.

Eyepiece focusing ring

VF BRIGHT volu me

PEAKING volume

Sliding securing ring

Adjustments are made on the LCD/VF[4/4] menu screen.
X See page 89.

•VF CONTRAST:
Adjusts the contrast of the viewfinder screen.

•BLACK & WHITE:
Sets the LCD monitor and viewfinder to black and white
display.

MEMO

The screen size of the viewfinder can be changed by
selecting the desired size with the ASPECT item on the
VIDEO FORM AT[1/2] menu screen (4:3 or 16:9).

Eyepiece

Viewfinder mount base

48

49

PREPARATIONS FOR OPERATION

Back Focus Adjustment

It is only necessary to perform this when the lens is attached
for the first time or when focusing is not correct in both the
telephoto and wide-angle positions.

•It is easier to adjust back focus when the subject is more
than 3 meters from the camera.
The optimal subject for this adjustment is a Siemens star
chart.

4, 6

3

5

1

27, 8, 10

Siemens star chart

1. Set the IRIS mode switch to M (Manual).

2. Set the zoom mode to M (Manual).

3. Open the iris by turning the iris ring.

If the illumination is too strong, reduce it or move to a
darker place.

4. Tu rn the zo om lever u ntil the lens is at t he maximum tele-

photo position.

5. Bring the subject into focus.

6. Set the lens to maximum wide-angle.

7. Loosen the back focus ring retaining knob.

8. View the same subject and adjust the back focus ring for

the best possible focus.

9. Repeat steps 4. through 8. about three times for fine

adjustment until the subject remains in focus in both the
telephoto position and the wide-angle position.

10.Tight en the back focus ring retaining knob to secure the

ring.

White Balance Adjustment

Since the color of light (color temperature) varies depending on
the light source, it is necessary to re-adjust the white balance
when the main light source illuminating the subject changes.

White Balance Adjustment

Two k inds of whit e balance adjustment results can be stored
in memories AUTO A and AUTO B.

Adjustment procedure

1. Set the following switches.

•Set the POWER switch to ON.

•Set the IRIS mode switch of the lens to A (Auto).

•Set the FULL AUTO switch to OFF.

2. Set the ND filter switch according to the current lighting.

3. Set the WHT.BAL switch to A or B.

4. Place a white object ne ar the center of t he screen under

the same lighting conditions as the target subject and
zoom in to fill the screen with white.

5. Press the AWB (Auto White Balance) button.

“AUTO WHITE A, B OPERATION” is displayed in the view­finder while the auto white balance adjustment circuit operates.
When correct white balance is obtained , the approximate
color temperature is displayed together with “AUTO
WHITE A, B OK” for about 5 seconds.

Iris mode switch (7 on page 10)

ND filter

WHT.BAL

AWB button

MEMO

Fine-tune red and blue to match the white adjusted in white
balance in WHITE PAINT<R>/<B> on the WHITE BAL­ANCE menu screen. X See page 82.

POWER switch

Error messages

If the adjustment ends abnormally, an error message, as
described below, blinks for about 5 seconds.

•NG: OBJECT (Improper object)
Displayed when there is not enough white color on an
object or the color temperature is not suitable.
Replace the color temperature conversion filter or use
another white object and re-adjust the white balance.

switch

•ERROR: LOW LIGHT (I nsufficient illumination)
Displayed when the illumin ation is dim. Increase the illumi­nation and then re-adjust the white balance.

•ERROR: OVER LI GHT (Excessive illumination)
Displayed when the light is excessively bright. Decrease
the illumination and then re-adjust the white balance.

During operation Result message

Improper object Insufficient illumination

Excessive illumination

CAUTION

•Do not adjust using any highly reflective objects, such as
metal, etc., as this may result in improper white balance
adjustment.

•The FAW (Full Auto White balance) function cannot pro­vide optimum white balance with a subject outside the
FAW ad justment range, for example when it contains
only a single color or not enough white color.

•The accuracy of the FAW (Full Auto White balance) is
inferior to that of the Auto white balance.

•When the power is turned on with the FAW mode
selected, it takes about 10 seconds fo r the FAW adjust­ment to be completed.
Do not shoot within this interval.

Full Auto White Balance (FAW)

The FAW function adjusts the white balance value automati­cally as the lighting condition changes.

This mode is convenient when you have no time to adjust the
white balance or when the camera is moved frequently in
and out of places under different lighting conditions.
 Setting procedure

The FAW function can be activated with the FAW item on
the SWITCH MODE menu screen. The FAW function can
be allocated to one of the white balance switching
switches A, B, or PRESET.
X See page 83.

50

51

PREPARATIONS FOR OPERATION

White Shading Adjustment

It is necessary to perform this adjustment to the camera
when attaching a lens that is different from the previously
attached lens.
Even if white balance is achieved in the middle of the screen,
it may not be achieved at the top and bottom of the screen.
Greens and magentas may be colored. This is due to char­acteristics of the lens. Correcting this phenomenon is called
White Shading Adjustment.
Perform this after adjusting white balance.
White shading adjustment is performed on the WHITE BAL­ANCE menu screen.

Adjustment procedure

1. White balance the camera.

2. Set the camera’s lens controls as follows:

a.Set the IRIS opening to F4 or higher number.
b.In the case of a zoom lens set the ZOOM at the center

of its range.

3. Shoot a uniformly lit white sheet of paper and fill the mon-

itor screen with it.

4. Set th e monitor CHROMA level to maximum.

5. Ch eck the color of the monitor screen. If the top and the

bottom of the monitor screen are white then no adjust­ment is necessary. If the top of the monitor screen is
greenish and the bottom is reddish or if the top is reddish
and the bottom is greenish then continue with this adjust­ment.

6. Adjust the LEVEL G in the SHADING menu item to mini-

mize the color difference between the top and bottom of
the screen.

7. It is recommended that only LEVEL G be adjusted.

1 Display the WHITE BALANCE menu screen.

Follow the steps in “Setting Menu Screens” on page 72
and proceed as follows.
MENUrCAMERA PROCESS[1/2]rCAMERA PRO­CESS[2/2]rADVANCE PROCESSrWHITE BALANCE

Setting in the WHITE BALANCE screen is performed as fol­lows.

 Selecting an item
Turn t he SHUTTER dial to align the cursor (j) with the
desired item, and press the SHUTTER dial.

•The item is selected and the setting value blinks.
 Changing the setting value
Turn t he SHUTTER dial to change the blinking value. When
the SHUTTER dial is pressed, the value s tops blinking and
the setting is changed.

2 Perform the above steps to set SHADING to MANUAL.
3 Select LEVEL R, LEVEL G, LEVEL B and press the

SHUTTER dial.

•The setting value for the selected LEVEL blinks and
becomes available for changing.

4 Change the setting values for LEVEL R, LEVEL G, and

LEVEL B with the SHUTTER dial while referring to the
monitor.
When setting values are increased, colors at the bottom
of the screen are suppressed and the top is enhanced.
LEVEL R: Adjusts reds.
LEVEL G: Adjusts greens.
LEVEL B: Adjusts blues.
<Range: -128 to +127>

5 Press the SHUTTER dial after changing the setting val-

ues to save in the memory.

6 Press the STATUS button to return to the normal screen.

8. When white shading adjustment is completed, adjust

white balance again.
X See “White Balance Adjustment” on page 51.

CAUTION

• If the lens setup is incorrect, the white shading adjust­ment might result in over compensation. When perform­ing this adjustment, set the lens to the recommended
settings. Do not open the lens IRIS beyond F4; do not
set a telephoto lens to its extreme wide position or tele­photo position.

•White shading occurs due to the optical characteristics of
the mounted lens, it is not a camera malfunction.

SETTING AND ADJUSTMENTS BEFORE SHOOTING

4. Tu rn the SHUTTER dial, change the setting and push the

Setting the Video Format

Set the video format using the FRAME RATE item and the
REC item on the VIDEO FORMAT menu screen.

Setting the FRAME RATE Item

1. Press the STATUS button for at least 1 second.

•The TOP MENU screen is displayed.

SHUTTER dial

USER 3USER 2USER 1

SHUTTER

ND FILTER

2

1

MENU

STATUS

STATUS button

2. Tu rn t he SHUTTER dial and bring the cursor (K) to the

VIDEO FORMAT.. item and press the SHUTTER dial.

•The VIDEO FORMAT[1/2] menu screen is displayed.

3. Tu rn t he SHUTTER dial and bring the cursor (K) to the

FRAME RATE item and press the SHUTTER dial.

•The setting for the selected item flashes and can be
changed.
“CHANGE THE SYSTEM” is displayed on the screen.

5. Push the SHUTTER dial.

Setting the REC Item

Set the REC item using the same steps as for the FRAME
RATE item.

MEMO

• If you change the FRAME RATE item setting, the system

•The synchronous video signal is momentarily disturbed

•We recommend th e following settings for REC item (in

SHUTTER dial.

•The setting stops flashing and is temporarily set.

•Move the cu rsor (K) to the EXECUTE item and EXE-

CUTE flashes.

•“REBOOT! SYSTEM CHANGE” is displayed on the
screen and after a few seconds the system is reboo­ted.

is rebooted.

when the REC item setting is switched.

HDV format).
When recording images with a lot of motion:
Set to HDV60p or HDV50p
When recording images with little motion:
Set to HDV30p or HDV25p

52

53

SETTING AND ADJUSTMENTS BEFORE SHOOTING

Camera Settings

ASPECT item

4:3 4:3 TV

Audio Input Signal Selec­tion

MEMO

You can sel ect the normal input level for MIC and MIC+48V
in the INPUT1, 2 MIC REF. item on the AUDIO/MIC[1/2]
menu screen.

1. Set the switch positions.

A. [GAIN] switch: Set to L ( 0 dB).
B. [WHT. BAL] (Auto White Balance) switch: Set to A or

B.

2. Set the lens’ iris mode switch to “A” (Auto iris side).

3. Select the ND filter.

ND FILTER Suitable Location

OFFOFF Indoors, dark outdoors

11/4ND Outdoors under clear sky

21/16ND Outdoors under extremely clear sky

4. Set the shutter speed to OFF with the SHUTTER dial.

VTR indicator

VF BRIGHT

4.

3.

1.

USER 3USER 2USER 1

ND FILTER

2

1

MENU

STATUS

WHT.BAL

AUTO

AUDIO
LEVEL

CH-1 CH-2

A

ON

OFF

B

POWER

REC

LCD BRIGHT

CAM/VTR

­+

TC

AUDIO SELECT

GENE.

CH-2

DISPLAY

CH-1

FREE

TC

AUTO

REC

MANU

UB

AUTO

REGEN

CAM/VTR button

Screen Size (4:3/16:9)
Mode Selection

The screen size of recorded images can be selected with the
ASPECT item on the VIDEO FORMAT[1/2] menu screen.
X See page 75.

•To record using the standard screen, set ASPECT to 4:3.

•To record using the 16:9 screen, set ASPECT to 16:9.

16:9 TV

4:3 TV16:9

[SQUEEZE]

4:3 TV

[LETTER]

16:9 TV

•In DV mode, selection of SQUEEZE and LETTER is not
possible. The screen display mode becomes SQUEEZE.

MEMO

•When you set the REC item on the VIDEO FORMAT[1/2]
menu to HDV format, the ASPECT item is fixed at 16:9
and “[16:9]” is displayed.

• If the above applies, you can set to display the image in
the style of 4:3 televisions.
X See “DOWN CON. [HDV]” on page 75.

•In the SAFETY ZONE item on the LCD/VF[1/4] menu
screen, you can display the safety zone for a standard
screen as well as a 16:9 screen in the viewfinder or LCD
monitor.
X See page 86.

•When the ASPECT item is set to 4:3, the screen that is
displayed may differ depending on the 16:9 television
you are using.

This device is provided with the INPUT1 connector and the
INPUT2 connector for audio input.
Select the audio from the INPUT1 connector or the INPUT2
connector using the CH-2 INPUT switch for the audio to be
recorded in CH-2.

Selecting the CH-2 channel input
connector

Select using the CH-2 INPUT switch.
INPUT1 : Inputs the audio from the INPUT1 connector

INPUT2 : Inputs the audio from the INPUT2 connector

into CH-2.

into CH-2.

CH-2 INPUT switch

AUDIO INPUT
switch

MEMO

The audio from the INPUT1 connector is also input into CH­1 regardless of the setting.

Selecting the audio signal input

Select the sound to be input to the INPUT1 or INPUT2 con­nector using the AUDIO INPUT switch.
The setting is made for each of INPUT1 or INPUT2 connector.

LINE : Set to this position when connected to audio

MIC : S et to this position when using a dynamic

MIC+48V : Set to this position when a microphone (phan-

equipment, etc.
The reference input level is +4 dBs.

microphone.

tom microphone) requiring +48 V DC power
supply is connected.

CAUTION

When connecting a component that does not require +48 V
power supply, make sure that the sw itch is not set to
MIC+48V before the component is connected.

Adjusting Audio during Recording

For each audio channel, use the CH-1/CH-2 AUDIO
SELECT switch to select whether the audio level adjustment
should be set to AUTO mode or MANUAL mode.

 Adjusting the audio input level control
The audio input level can be adjusted manually when this device
is in the record, record-standby or stop mode.

1. Set the CH-1/CH-2 AUDIO SELECT switch of the chan-

nel whose audio level that you want to adjust manually to
MANU.

Monitor
speaker

MONITOR SELECT
switch

MONITOR
volume

CH-1 audio input
level volume

2. Rotate t he audio input level control corresponding to the

audio input level to be adjusted.

•Adjust so that the peak level does not exceed the –3 dB
point when a loud sound is input.

FULL AUTO switch

VF BRIGHT

USER 3USER 2USER 1

ND FILTER

2

1

MENU

STATUS

WHT.BAL

AUTO

AUTO
AUDIO
LEVEL

CH-1 CH-2

ON

OFF

POWER

REC

CH-2 audio input level
volume

STATUS 1 screen

Indicator level (reference)

LCD BRIGHT

CAM/VTR

­+

TC

AUDIO SELECT

CH-2

DISPLAY

CH-1

TC

AUTO
MANU

UB

CH-1/CH-2
AUDIO SELECT switch

Audio level

GENE.

FREE
REC
REGEN

54

55

SETTING AND ADJUSTMENTS BEFORE SHOOTING

Audio Input Signal Selection

•The loudspeaker or earphone outputs an alarm tone in the

(Cont’d)

MEMO

•When AUDIO LIMITER in the AUDIO/MIC[1/2] menu
screen is set to ON, the AUDIO LIMITER functions in
manual adjust mode. Recording level is suppressed
when excessive audio is input.
X See “AUDIO LIMITER” on page 84.

•The reference level for audio recorded on the tape can
be set with the AUDIO REF. LEVEL item on the AUDIO/
MIC menu screen. (–20 dB or –12 dB) The level will
change for both CH-1 and CH-2.

CAUTION

•When the AUDIO INPUT switch is set to MIC, be sure to
check that the microphone is connected to the INPUT1/2
connector. If the microphone is not connected, increasing the
audio level could cause noise from the input con nector to be
recorded on the tape. When the microphone is not con­nected to the INPUT1/2 connector, set the AUDIO INPUT
switch to “LINE” or turn down the audio level con trol.

•In the FULL AUTO mode, the audio level volume cannot
be adjusted with the audio level controls on the CH-1 and
CH-2.

MEMO

•When connecting a stereotype earphone, make the fol-

•When AUDIO MONITOR item on the AUDIO/MIC[2/2]

•The volume of the alarm tone is set with the ALARM VR

case of an abnormal condition occurring in this device.
An alarm tone is also output when the tape end is reached
or when the battery is running down.
*Do not i ncrease the audio monitoring volume exces-

sively; otherwise howling with the camera microphone
may occur.

lowing settings to output stereo sound.

1Set the MONITOR SELECT switch to BOTH.
2

Set the AUDIO MONITOR item on the AUDIO/MIC[2/2]
menu screen to STEREO.

menu screen is set to “STEREO”, only the audio of CH-1
is output from the monitoring speaker.

LEVEL item on the OTHERS[1/2] menu screen. (OFF/
LOW/MIDDLE/HIGH)

SHOOTING OPERATION

Basic Recording Opera­tion

1. Set the POWER switch to ON.

•This device turns on i n camera mode.

2. St art recording.

Press the REC/VTR trigger button on this device to start
recording.
Once recording has started, the FRONT TALLY lamp and
BACK TALLY lamp light red.

FRONT TALLY lamp

FOCUS ASSIST button

MEMO

The way the FRONT TALLY and the BACK TALLY lamps
flash differ depending on what you set in the FRONT
TAL LY a nd BACK TALLY items on the OTHERS[1/2] menu
screen. X See page 93.

CAUTION

•This device enters the stop mode automatically at TAPE
END. If this mode continues for 3 minutes, the mode
switches to the tape protect mode.

X

See “OTHERS[1/2] Menu Screen” on page 93.

(LONG PAUSE TIME item)

• If the REC/VTR trigger button is pressed very quickly
and repeatedly, or the POWER switch is moved immedi­ately after the trigger button is pressed, this device may
not enter the record mode.
To r e m edy this condition set the POW ER switch to OFF
and wait for 5 seconds or more before turning the power
on again.

•A neat transition to the next recorded scene cannot be
guaranteed if a recording is ended by turning the
POWER switch or DC power supply OF F, or by removing
the battery pack.

•Trial-shooting is always recommended before recording
important events to confirm the recording is satisfactory.

•The microphone may pick up the sound of the lens’ iris if
the iris is changed abruptly or the iris is manually moved
abruptly during recording.

Monitoring Audio during Recording

The audio input during recording, in record-pause or stop
mode can be monitored through the monitoring speaker or
earphone.

PHONES jack

•Select the audio channel to be monitored using the MONI­TOR SELECT switch.

CH-1 : The sound input to the CH-1 channel is output.
BOTH : The sound input to the CH-1 and CH-2 chan-

nels is output mixed.

CH-2 : The sound input to the CH-2 channel is output.

•The MONITOR volume control adjusts the monitoring vol­ume.

56

BACK TALLY lamp

POWER switch

REC trigger button

REC trigger button

FOCUS ASSIST
button

VTR trigger button

RET button

About the QUICK REC START Mode

If the REC/VTR trigger button is pressed immediately after
the videocassette is inserted, the mode becomes the
QUICK REC START mode that enables quick start of
recording.
However, when shooting starts in the middle of the tape, a
blank space appears as the new scene will not be linked
smoothly with the previous image.
Also, the time code does not continue. (Some overlap may
also occur.)

About the Focus Assist Function

When you press this button during shooting, the area of
focus is displayed in blue, red or green, making it easy to
focus accurately.
X See “LCD/VF[1/4] Menu Screen” on page 86.
You can also set this function from the RET button.
X See “SWITCH MODE Menu Screen” on page 83. (LENS
RET item)
When FOCUS ASSIST on the LCD/VF[1/4] menu screen is
set to ACCU-FOCUS, ACCU FOCUS functions with FOCUS
ASSIST. This makes focusing with shallower depth of field
easier. ACCU FOCUS automatically turns OFF after approxi­mately 10 seconds. X See page 86

57

SHOOTING OPERATION

Basic Recording Operation
(Cont’d)

If the Record-Standby Mode Contin­ues

Setting the time before the tape protection mode is engaged
The time before the tape protection mode is engaged from
the record-standby mode can be set to 5 minutes or 3 min­utes with the LONG PAUSE TIME item on the OTHERS[1/2]
screen menu. X See page93.

When the record-standby mode has continued for about 5
minutes or 3 minutes, this device automatically stops drum
rotation in order to protect the tape. (Tape protect mode)

In the tape protect mode, STOP is shown as the VTR
mode indication on the LCD monitor and in the viewfinder
screen. (STATUS 1 screen)

VTR mode indication

 To s t a r t recording from the tape protect mode, press the

REC/VTR trigger button.

• The drum starts rotating, and recording starts after

about 3 seconds.

 To re tu rn to the record-standby mode from the tape protect

mode, press the RET button.

CAUTION

This function does not work when using RET button is used
as FOCUS ASSIST button.

Checking Recorded Contents in
Record-Standby Mode (Recording
Check Function)

This function is available only when this device is in the
standby mode.
In standby mode, about 5 seconds of the last part of the con­tent recorded in DV format can be played back, and about 7
seconds when the content was recorded in HDV format can
be played back.

•The recorded contents can be checked on the LCD moni­tor, in the viewfinder or on a monitor connected to the
video signal output connectors.

1. In the record-standby mode, press the RET button on the

camera lens section.

1. RET button

•The tape rewinds and about 6 seconds of the content
recorded in DV format is played back, and about 8 sec­onds of the content recorded in HDV format is played
back. After playback, this device returns to standby
mode at the position on the tape where the RET button
was pressed.

 If you continue to hold down the RET button, up to about

18 seconds of content recorded in DV format and up to
about 20 seconds of content recorded in HDV format can
be rewound and played back.

•Pressing the REC/VTR trigger button during playback
will put this device in REC standby mode. The camera
will automatically return to recording mode after play­back.

CAUTION

•This function does not work when using RET button is
used as FOCUS ASSIST button.

•This function does not work when this device is in the
stop mode.

•Durin g recording check, the following indication will
appear if the error rate increases due to head clogging,
etc.
“HEAD CLEANING REQUIRED!” is shown on the LCD
monitor or in the viewfinder. (When the STATUS 0, 1, 4
screen is displayed.)

HEADER REC Function

When the REC/VTR trigger button is pressed while the STOP button is pressed, this function first records the color bar video and
the test tone (1 kHz sine-wave) of the built-in signal generator at the beginning of the tape. Then it records the black video signal
and the mute audio signal for the duration specified in advance. When the recording is completed, this device enters the Record­Standby mode. The time code value at the Record-Standby position becomes the time code specified in advance. (HEADER
REC function)

•Settings related to the HEADER REC function, such as whether the HEADER REC function should be enabled, the HEADER
REC execution duration, and the time code value setting when the HEADER REC recording is completed, etc., are made on
the HEADER REC menu screen.

•The HEADER REC function is executed under the following circumstances:
CAM/VTR button: Set to CAM mode.

In the Record-Standby or Stop mode

Tap e beginn ing

(Example) 30 sec (Example) 30 sec

Color bar video signal
Tes t t one (1 kHz)
(Setting range: 0 to 99 sec)

Time c ode, user’s bits recording Time code, user’s bits recording

Time code :
The value specified on the HEADER
REC menu screen- HEADER REC time.
(Example) 23:59:00:00

HEADER REC

Black video signal
Mute audio (No sound)
(Setting range: 0 to 99 sec)

User’s bits:
The value specified for the UB
DATA item on the HEADER REC
menu screen.

 HEADER REC menu screen contents

Item Function/Initial Setting

START KEY Sets w hether the HEADER REC operation should be executed when the REC/VTR trigger button is pressed while the

TC DATA Set s the time code value for the point when the Record-Standby mode is engaged following completion of HEADER

UB DATA Set s the user’s bits of the HEADER REC section.

BARS TIME Sets the duration (seconds) in which the color bar signal and test tone (1 kHz) is recorded during HEADER REC. (1-sec

BLACK TIME Set s the duration (seconds) in which the black signal is recorded during HEADER REC. (1-sec steps)

PAGE BACK The TC/UB/CLOCK menu screen returns when the SHUTTER dial is pressed.

STOP button is pressed.
DISABLE : HEADER REC operation is not executed.
STOP+REC : HEADER REC operation is executed.

REC.
EXECUTE : Confirms the set time code.
ZERO PRESET: Resets all time codes to zero “0”.
CANCEL : Clears the set time code.
The frame mode is set depending on the setting in the DROP FRAME item on the TC/UB/CLOCK menu screen.
*The time code value at the point when the Record-Standby mode is engaged may differ some frames from the value

set for this item.

EXECUTE : Confirms the set user’s bits.
ZERO PRESET: Resets all user ’s bits data to zero “0”.
CANCEL : Clears the set user’s bits.

MEMO

The user’s bits for the normal recording section are set on the TC/UB/CLOCK menu screen.

steps)
[Initial Setting: 0SEC - 30SEC - 99SEC]

[Initial Setting: 0SEC - 30SEC - 99SEC]

Record-Standby mode

Time code:
The value specified on the HEADER
REC menu screen.
(Example) 00:00:00:00

Normal recording

User’s bits:
The value specified for the UB
PRESET item on the TC/UB/
CLOCK menu screen.
(only when set to REC RUN or
FREE RUN mode)

58

59

SHOOTING OPERATION

HEADER REC Function
(Cont’d)

How to set the HEADER REC menu screen

1. Disp lay the HEADER REC menu screen.

1Select the TC/UB/CLOCK.. item on the TOP MENU

screen.

2Select the HEADER REC item on the TC/UB/CLOCK

menu screen.

TC/UB/CLOCK menu screen

2. While pressing the STOP button, press the REC/VTR

trigger button.

•The tape automatically rewinds to the beginning, and
HEADER REC operation starts from the beginning of
the tape.
After HEADER REC recording is performed for the
specified duration only, the Record-Standby mode is
engaged automatically.

•During HEADER REC recording, “HEADER REC” is
shown (blinking) on the LCD monitor and in the view­finder.

PLAYBACK MODE

Playback Procedure

Recorded pictures can be viewed in the viewfinder, or on the
LCD monitor, or on the monitor connected to the video output
connector.

STOP button PLAY/STILL button

•When the automatic tracking function is activated at the
start of the playback mode, digital noise may appear in
the playback image.

•This device doe s not allow manual tr acking adjustment.

•When playing back a tape that was recorded on another
unit, digital noise may appear during playback.

•Following loading of the tape, the built-in head cleaner
will emit a sound while operating. This does not indicate
a malfunction.

•The data recorded for the date and time or time code on
the tape can be shown on the screen. To enable or dis­able the display is selected on the menu screen:

Display of date and time : TIME/DATE menu screen
Display of time code : LCD/VF[1/2] menu screen

HEADER REC menu screen

2. Setting the HEADER REC menu screen.

1Select the menu item.

Rotate the SHUTTER dial to align the cursor (K) with
the item to be set, and then press the SHUTTER dial.

•The setting area of the selected item starts blinking.

2Changing the setting value.

Rotate the SHUTTER dial to change the setting, and
then press the SHUTTER dial.

Cursor Item S et value

 In the case of the TC DATA item and the UB DATA

item, the blinking digit position moves when the SHUT­TER dial is pressed. When the SHUTTER dial is
rotated, the value of the blinking digit changes. After all
the digits have been set and the SHUTTER dial is
pressed, EXECUTE starts blinking. Press the SHUT­TER dial once more to confirm the set value.

3. To te rm in at e the setting, press the STATUS button.

Executing the HEADER REC Function

The START KEY item on the HEADER REC menu screen
should be set to STOP+REC.

1. Load the cassette and engage the Record-Standby mode

or the Stop mode.

During HEADER REC

•The menu screen is not displayed during HEADER REC
recording.

3. After HEADER REC recording is completed and the

Record-Standby mode is engaged, normal recording
starts when you press the REC/VTR trigger button.

•When the TC GENE. switch is set to either REC or
REGEN, the time code value at the start of the
HEADER REC menu screen.

MEMO

•To stop during HEADE R REC operation, press the REC/
VTR trigger button or the STOP button.

•The HEADER REC menu screen cannot be opened dur­ing HEADER REC recording.

•HEADER REC operation is accepted even during load­ing of the cassette tape.

•The test tone (1 kHz sine-wave) recorded in the color bar
section will be recorded unrelated to the setting for the
TEST TONE item on the AUDIO/MIC[1/2] menu screen.

•The time code preset on the TC/UB/CLOCK menu
screen becomes invalid when HEADER REC recording
is performed.

•The user’s bits following completion of HEADER REC
recording will be the user’s bits value set on the TC/UB/
CLOCK menu screen.

•The running of the time code following completion of
HEADER REC recording will be in accordance with the
setting of the TC GENE. switch.
FREE RUN : Continuous running.
REC RUN or REGEN: Runs only during REC.

•Camera images are not output to the LCD monitor, view­finder or video output during REW mode when the
HEADER REC operation begins.

REW button FF button

MEMO

This device can play back the following two types of video­cassettes:

•MiniDV videocassette

•DVCAM videocassette
Tapes recorded in the LP mode cannot be played back.

1. Set the POWER switch to ON.

2. Set this device to the VTR mode.

Press the CAM/VTR button to turn on the VTR indicator.
*Playback is also possible in the Camera mode.

Playback operation becomes possible when the STOP
button is pressed to set the VTR operation mode indi­cator to indicate STOP.

3. Load the recorded videocassette correctly.

•When the videocassette is loaded, this device enters
the Stop mode.

4. Ope n the operation cover on the upper section of this

device.
Slide the operation cover to the side to open.

5. Press the PLAY/STILL button.

•Playback starts.

6. Press the PLAY/STILL button to stop playback tempo-

rarily.

•This device enters the still mode.

7. To re -start playback, press the PLAY/STILL button.

8. To s t op playback or the still mode, press the STOP but-

ton.

MEMO

•In the VTR mode, the camera image is not output on the
LCD monitor, in the viewfinder or through the video out­put connector.

•When the still picture mode or stop mode has continued
for a while, this device automatically switches to the tape
protect mode.

Tap e protect mode : Drum rotation is stopped in order to

•Noise may appear in the picture in the still mode.

protect the tape.

Fast-Forward, Rewind

 Press the FF button in the stop mode to fast forward the

tape. Press the REW button in the stop mode to rewind
the tape. (VTR mode only)
*“SWITCH TO VTR MODE” is displayed and the function

does not work if the “FF” or “REW” buttons are pressed
when Camera mode is in the stop mode.

 Press the STOP button to stop fast forwarding or rewind-

ing.

MEMO

•When the tape approaches the end during fast forward­ing or rewinding, the tape speed decelerates to protect
the tape.

• The time required for fast forwarding and rewinding may
become longer when used in a cold environment. This is
not a malfunction.

Search

 Press the FF button in the play mode or still mode to

search the tape in the forward direction. Playback takes
place while fast forwarding.
Pressing the REW button executes search of the tape in
the reverse direction. Playback takes place while rewind­ing.
(Each press on the button switches the speed to ×2, ×5,
and ×10.)

 Press the PLAY/STILL button to resume normal playback.
 Press the STOP button to stop.

MEMO

•To output sound during the search, set the SEARCH
AUDIO [DV] item on the AUDIO menu screen to ON.

•Block noise may appear in the picture or the image may
freeze during the search.

60

61

PLAYBACK MODE

1. Display the AUDIO menu screen .

Outputting Audio

Setting

Confirm that this device is in the VTR mode.
(VTR indicator: On)

MONITOR

VTR indicator

SELECT switch

VF BRIGHT

USER 3USER 2USER 1

SHUTTER
dial

STATUS
button

 Earphone terminal output audio

ND FILTER

2

1

STATUS

WHT.BAL

ON

OFF

POWER

Audio output is as shown in the table below depending on
the MONITOR SELECT switch and AUDIO MONITOR
and PB AUDIO CH [DV] settings on the AUDIO menu
screen.

MONITOR

SELECT

CH-1 - L/R: CH1 L/R: CH1+CH3 L/R: CH3

BOTH MIX

CH-2 - L/R: CH2 L/R: CH2+CH4 L/R: CH4

LCD BRIGHT

-

MENU

AUDIO SELECT

CH-1

AUTO

AUTO

CH-1 CH-2

MANU

AUTO
AUDIO
LEVEL

REC

AUDIO menu screen

PB AUDIO CH [DV]

AUDIO MONITOR

STEREO

CAM/VTR

+

TC

GENE.

CH-2

DISPLAY

FREE

TC

REC

UB

REGEN

CAM/VTR button

L/R: CH1+CH2
L: CH1 R:CH2

*In HDV format, you can only select the settings within the bold frame.

Select the AUDIO item on the TOP MENU screen.

2. Set the AUDIO menu screen.

• PB AUDIO CH [DV] Items
CH1/2 : To reproduce the sound (CH-1, CH-2)

MIX : To reproduce the sound recorded during

CH3/4 : To reproduce the sound after-recorded

recorded during sh ooting.

shooting (CH-1, CH-2) and the after­recorded sound (on CH-3 and CH-4)
simultaneously.

on CH-3 and CH-4.

PB AUDIO CH [DV]

CH1/2 CH1 CH2

MIX CH1+CH3 CH2+CH4

CH3/4 CH3 CH4

For HDV format, audio is output to CH1 and CH2 no matter
the settings.

3. Either of the following operations returns you to the nor-

mal screen.

•Press the STAT US button

or

•Return to the TOP MENU screen, select the EXIT item

and press the SHUTTER dial.

MEMO

The DV format is capable of recording up to 4 channels
when the 12-bit, 32 kHz sampling frequency is employed.
This device records audio on the two channels CH-1 and
CH-2. (4-channel recording is possible in the case of DV
input.)
When this device is used for playback of a tape that was
recorded on another unit with audio recorded on the CH-3
and CH-4 channels, the PB AUDIO CH [DV] item on the
AUDIO menu scre en must be set.
After-recording on the CH-3 and CH-4 channels is not pos­sible.

CH1/2 MIX CH3/4

L/R: CH1+CH2+CH3+CH4
L: CH1+CH3 R: CH2+CH4

AUDIO OUT connector

CH-1 CH-2

L/R: CH3+CH4
L: CH3 R: CH4

USING EXTERNAL COMPONENTS

Connecting the Video
Signal Cables

Connecting the IEEE1394 Cable

To r e d u ce t h e em ission of unwanted radio waves, be sure to
attach the provided clamp filter as shown in the figure below.

•Attach the clamp filter as close to this device as possible,
as shown in the figur e.

•Set the IEEE1394 switch on the left panel of this device.
DV : DV format

HDV : HDV format

IEEE1394 switch

Clamp filter

Wind once

CAUTION

When connecting the IEEE1394 cable from/to Camcorder,
VCR and other IEEE1394 device, make sure the following
instructions, otherwise the IEEE1394 circuit device may be
destroyed.

•Turn the power of both devices OFF and connect the
IEEE1394 cable.

•Do not insert incorrectly (in reverse) the IEEE1394 cable
end to IEEE1394 port of both devices.

X

•Do not connect the IEEE1394 cable under the condition
of static electricity.

•Turn the power of both devices OFF when changing the
IEEE1394 switch from/to HDV/DV.

CH2-AUDIO OUT-CH1 VIDEO

IEEE 1394

IEEE 1394IEEE 1394

Displaying Alarms

• CHANGE 1394 SWITCH
Displayed when the setting for the input/output video format
from the IEEE1394 connector and the setting for the
IEEE1394 switch are different.
Set the IEEE1394 switch so it matches the video format.

CHANGE 1394 SWITCH

62

63

USING EXTERNAL COMPONENTS

Dubbing with AV Devices

By connecting the video signal output terminal and the
AUDIO OUTPUT terminal on this device to an AV device,
analog signal dubbing is possible.

1. Connect the cables.

Composite cable
or
Component cable

Signal flow

CH2-AUDIO OUT-CH1 VIDEO

IEEE 1394

AUDIO
OUTPUT
connector

2. Tu rn both devices on.

3. Set this device to VTR mode.

Press the CAM/VTR button. The VTR indicator lights.

4. Set the video output.

Set the VIDEO FORMAT menu screen. X See page 74.

VIDEO FORMAT menu screen

Recording unit

Signal flow

5. Set the audio output. X See page 62.

Set the AUDIO menu screen. X See page 84.

•PB AUDIO CH [DV] item:

Set the audio channel to be output.

6. Insert the videocassettes.

This device : Insert the recorded videocas-

Recording unit : Insert the videocassette to be

7. Press the PLAY/STILL button on this device to start play-

back.

8. St art r ecording on the recording unit.

For details, see the instructions to the unit used for
recording.

9. When dubbing is completed.

Stop r eco rding on the rec ording unit, and then press the
STOP button on this device to stop playback.

AUDIO menu screen

sette.

dubbed to.

HDV/DV Dubbing

Connecting this device to another video component
equipped with HDV/DV connector (IEEE1394 standard)
using a IEEE1394 cable (optional) enables dubbing of digital
signals with high picture quality and high-quality sound.

Using this device as the playback unit
(Dubbing to another video)

1. Set the IEEE1394 switch on the left panel of this device.

DV : When dubbing in DV format
HDV : When dubbing in HDV format

2. Connect the IEEE1394 cable.

3. Tu rn both devices on.

4. Set this device to VTR mode.

Press the CAM/VTR button. The VTR indicator lights.

1.

IEEE1394 switch

CH2-AUDIO OUT-CH1 VIDEO

IEEE 1394

Signal flow

CAUTION

•Set the IEEE1394 switch on both devices to either HDV
or DV.

•Start recording after making sure that both devices are
properly connected.

Recording unit

IEEE1394 cable

2.

5. Set the PB TAPE item on the VIDEO FORMAT menu

screen. X See page 76.
Select whether to automatically detect the playback tape
video format or play back only a particular format.
Normally, use the “AUTO” setting.

6. Insert a videocassette tape.

This device : Recorded videocassette tape
Recording unit : Videocassette you want to dub

7. Press the PLAY/STILL button on this device to start play-

back.

8. St art r ecording on the recording device.

See the recording device user manual for more informa­tion.

9. When dubbing is finished, stop recording on the record-

ing device, press the STOP b utton on this device, an d
stop the playback.

MEMO

•Switch the IEEE1394 switch when this device is OFF.

•When you dub still images, they are low resolution
images. Noise may also enter the audio.

•Operations may differ depending on the features and
specifications of the connected device, and operations or
data exchange may not be possible even if the devices
are connected.

• If noise appears on the screen or the audio cuts out, re­connect the IEEE1394 cable or turn this device on again.

• If you turn the power to the device connected to the
IEEE1394 connector on and off or switch the video input,
noise may occur in the audio. If you perform this type of
operation, set the speaker volume as low as possible on
the audio device connected to this device.

•Recording may not be possible in some cases even if the
recorder is equipped with a IEEE1394 connector.

VIDEO FORMAT menu screen

• HDV PB OUTPUT item:

Set the video format to be output from the video output
terminal during tape playback.

•PB TAPE item:

Select whether to automatically detect the playback tape
video format or play back only a particular for mat.
Normally, use the “AUTO” setting.

64

65

USING EXTERNAL COMPONENTS

HDV/DV Dubbing
(Cont’d)

When Using the GY-HD200U/GY-HD201E
as Recording Unit
(Dubbing From Another Videocassette)

1. Set the IEEE1394 switch on left side of the GY-HD200U/

GY-HD201E.

DV : When dubbing in DV format
HDV : When dubbing in HDV format

2. Connect the units with the IEEE1394 cable.

3. Tu rn ON both units.

4. Place the GY-HD200U/GY-HD201E in the VTR MODE.

Press the CAM/VTR button to turn on the VTR indicator.

5. Set the frame rate.

Set the FRAME RATE item (60/30, 50/25, 24) on the
VIDEO FORMAT[1/2] menu to match the HDV/DV signal
frame rate input from the IEEE1394 connector.
X See page 74.

1.

IEEE1394 switch

CH2-AUDIO OUT-CH1 VIDEO

IEEE 1394

Signal flow

CAUTION

•Set the IEEE1394 switch on both devices to either HDV
or DV.

•Start recording after making sure that both devices are
properly connected.

6. Set the time code and user bit recording.

Set the TC DUPLI. item on the TC/UB/CLOCK menu
screen.

OFF : Records the TC/UB set in this

ON : Records the TC/UB for the

Date and time data : Records t he data sent from t he

device.

IEEE1394 input.

playback device in DV format.
Records the data of the internal
clock in HDV format.

Recording unit

IEEE1394 cable

2.

MEMO

In HDV format, the UB set in this device is recorded regard­less of the setting.

TC/UB

Date and Time

7. Insert the videocassettes.

GY-HD200U/
GY-HD201E
Playback unit : Insert the recorded videocassette.

8. St art playback on the playback unit.

For details, see the instructions to the u nit used for play­back.

•The playback picture from the playback unit appears
on the GY-HD200U/GY-HD201E’s LCD monitor and
viewfinder screen.

9. Press the REC/VTR trigger button on the GY-HD200U/

GY-HD201E to start recording.
 To t em p o ra ril y pause the reco rding, press the REC or

VTR trigger button.

 To r es tar t the recording, press the REC or VTR trigger

button again.

10.When dubbing is completed.

Press the REC/VTR trigger button or the STOP button on
the GY-HD200U/GY-HD201E to stop recording, and then
stop playback on the playback unit.

MEMO

Depending on the player, sound may not be heard momen­tarily from this device when switching modes from STILL to
PLAY.

:Insert the videocassette to be dubbed

to.

Backup Recording

Backup Recording of this Device’s Cam­era Image and Sound Through the
IEEE1394 Connector

This device’s camera image and sound can be recorded for
backup on another component that is equipped with
IEEE1394 connector.

Connections

Use this device as the master unit.
Connect the master unit and the backup unit with a
IEEE1394 cable.

1.

IEEE1394 switch

CH2-AUDIO OUT-CH1 VIDEO

IEEE 1394

Master unit
(this device)

Signal flow

Settings

 Master unit (this device)

1. Set the IEEE1394 switch on left side of this device.

DV : When backup in DV format
HDV : When backup in HDV format

2. Place in Camera mode.

3. Set the 1394 REC TRIG. item on the OTHERS[2/2] menu

screen. X See page94.
For HDV mode, set the BACK SPACE [HDV] item.
X See page 94.

OTHERS[2/2] menu screen

Backup unit

IEEE1394 cable

 Backup unit

•Place in HDV/DV signal input mode.
*Depending on the used component, it may be neces-

sary to set “REMOTE SELECT”.

•When BR-HD50 is used, set the Backup Recording
function to OFF.
Also, set REM SEL HDV/DV in the REMOTE[1/2] menu
of the BR-HD50 to ON or LOC+REM.

•Insert the tape and set to STOP or REC PAUSE status.

CAUTION

•Set the IEEE1394 switch on both devices to either HDV
or DV.

•Start recording after making sure that both devices are
properly connected.

• If the RET button is pressed during backup recording,
output from the IEEE1394 terminal is stopped, the image
is switched to the image recorded on this device, inter­rupting the backup recording image.

Operation

Start and stop of recording on the backup unit takes place in
accordance with the operation of the REC/VTR trigger button
on the master unit.
(Depending on this device or the backup unit, the image,
audio, and/or time code may deviate from what they should
be at the points where the recording is started or stopped.)

MEMO

•When the backup recording is started, the “TRIGGER
TO DV” or “TRIGGER TO HDV” indication is shown on
the LCD or in the viewfinder for approx. 3 seconds.

•When the Series Recording function of BR-HD50 is
used, this device’s 1394 REC TRIG. item should be set
to OFF.

• If the backup device is equipped with a feature to record
time codes input from the IEEE1394 connector (TC
DUPLICATE feature), time code data the same as on the
master side can be recorded.
If the master unit tape is paused or stopped when th e
master unit time code running mode is in REC RUN
mode, the time code for the slave unit stops.

•When using BR-HD50 as a backup device and switching
this device from the playback mode to the record mode,
noise will be noticed on the monitor output screen of BR­HD50 (backup will be correctly recorded).

66

67

USING EXTERNAL COMPONENTS

Connect a Remote Con­trol Unit (RM-LP55/RM­LP57)

Set camera switch functions with the remote control unit
(RM-LP55/RM-LP57).

Connection

Connect the remote control unit cable to the REMOTE termi­nal.

Clamp filter

Wind once

REMOTE

RM-LP55

•Attach the clamp filter included with the remote control unit
to the remote cable.(The clamp filter can be substituted
with the clamp filter included with this device.)
Consult your JVC dealer if you do not have a clamp filter.

CAUTION

Turn t he power OFF when connecting.

Operation

1. Tu rn the device ON.

2. Tu rn O N the OPERATE switch on remote control unit to

activate the remote control unit.
See page 69 for details on functions that can be operated
with the remote control unit.

CH2-AUDIO OUT-CH1 VIDEO

IEEE 1394

Notes on Using the Remote Control Unit

•When the switch function of this device and the remote
control unit are the same, the remote control switch func­tion is prioritized.

•FOCUS and ZOOM c annot be adjusted with the remote
control unit.

•Shutter speed slightly differs from the value displayed on
this device.

•Shutter Speed in 24p Mode

When this device is in 24p mode, shutter speed cannot be
set to 1/60 (U mode l) or 1/50 (E model) with the remote
control unit.
Even if shutter speed is set to 1/60 or 1/50 with the remote
control unit when in 24p mode, the shutter speed for the
device is 1/48.

•AUTO WHITE Function
When the device is in VTR mode, during playback or
HEADER REC, the AUTO WHITE function does not work
even if the auto white operation is performed with the RM­LP55 and RM-LP57.
In the case of the RM-LP55, “LOW LIGHT ERROR” is dis­played on the LCD screen of the RM-LP55.

Remote Control Unit Functions List

Function

RM-LP55 RM-LP57

BARS [OFF/ON] qG
CONTOUR [OFF/ON] qG
CONTOUR V/H LEVEL qG
IRIS [MANU/AUTO] qG
IRIS LEVEL qG

IRIS DETECT X
WHT.BAL AUTO1 qG

AUTO WHITE qG

MANUAL WHITE BALANCE R/B
LEVEL

PAINT R/B LEVEL qG
GAIN 0dB qG

NEGA [OFF/ON] X
SHUTTER NORMAL qG

ZOOM q X
FOCUS q X

HI-RESO [OFF/ON] X
MASTER BLACK LEVEL qG

GAMMA [OFF/ON] X

GAMMA MASTER LEVEL X

KNEE MASTER LEVEL X

TITLE [OFF/ON] X

TITLE POSITION X

TITLE CLEAR X
H PHASE q X
SC COARSE [0°/90°/180°/270°] q X

AUTO2 qG

FAW qG

PRESET G

MANU G

6dB qG
9dB qG

12dB qG

LOLUX X

–3dB X

–6dB X

ALC+EEI qG

ALC q X

1/100 qG *
1/120 qG *
1/250 qG

1/500 qG
1/1000 qG
1/2000 qG
1/4000 G

1/10000 G

EEI q X

V.SCAN X

Action

G

1

2

SC FINE q X

RANDOM SHUTTER X

VARIABLE SHUTTER LEVEL X

SLOW SHUTTER LEVEL X

q: Same as RM-LP55 G: Available

: None X: Not available

*1Only when frame rate is 60p, 60i, 30p, or 24p

2

Only when frame rate is 50p, 50i, or 25p

*

68

69

MENU SCREENS

Menu Screen Configura­tion

The Menu Screen consists of multiple layers of menu screens as shown below. The menu screen to be set is selected from the
TOP MENU in accordance with the function or purpose.
The items on the menu screens differ with the Camera mode and the VTR mode. The contents of set items are stored in this
device’s memory and are retained even when the power is turned off.
The FILE MANAGE menu screen can be used to store the menu setting contents on this device or SD memory card.
 Camera Mode

TOP MENU screen (CAM)

 VTR Mode/IEEE1394 Input Mode
(HDV/DV signal input is possible with the GY-HD200U, GY-HD201E.)

TOP MENU screen (VTR)

70

71

MENU SCREENS

Setting Menu Screens

Make the settings while observing the LCD monitor or the
viewfinder screen.
If the ANALOG OUT CHAR. item on the OTHERS[1/2]
screen is set to ON, the menu screen can also be viewed on
a monitor connected to the video signal output connector.

1. Set the POWER switch to ON.

2. Set the mode of this device with the CAM/V TR button.

(Camera mode or VTR mode)

3. Press the STATUS button for 1 second or longer.

•The TOP MENU screen appears.

SHUTTER dial

USER1 USER2 USER3 button

USER 3USER 2USER 1

SHUTTER

ND FILTER

2

1

MENU

STATUS

STATUS button

Menu screenCursor

TOP MENU screen

4. Select the menu screen to be set.

Rotate the SHUTTER dial to align the cursor (K) with the
menu screen to be set, and then press the SHUTTER
dial.

•The selected menu screen appears.

5. Select the menu item on the menu screen.

Rotate the SHUTTER dial to align the cursor (K) with the
item to be set, and then press the SHUTTER dial.

•The setting area of the selected it em starts blinking,

6. Change the setting.

Rotate the SHUTTER dial to change the setting, and then
press the SHUTTER dial.

•The setting area stops blinking and the setting is

 To c hange multiple items, repeat the procedures in steps

5. and 6. above.

7. Return to the TOP MENU screen.

Rotate the SHUTTER dial to align the cursor (K) with the
PAG E BACK item, and then press the SHUTTER dial.

 To c h a nge settings on other menu screens, repeat the

procedures in steps 4. to 7. above.

 To s a ve the set cont ents in FILE, select the FILE MAN-

AGE menu screen and perform the operations for saving
to file.
X See “FILE MANAGE Menu Screen” on page 96.

8. To r e tu rn to the normal screen after completing the set-

tings, use either of the following methods.
Press the STATUS button
or
Return to the TOP MENU screen and align the cursor (K)
with the EXIT item, and then press the SHUTTER dial.

Item Setting

VIDEO FORMAT[1/2] menu screen

and the setting can now be made.

entered.

MEMO

•While the menu screen is being displayed, the USER1,
USER2 and USER3 buttons can also perform menu
operations.
USER1 button : Raises the cursor (K)/Changes the set-

USER2 button : Lowers the cursor (K)/Changes the set-

USER3 button : Confirms the menu item/Confirms the

•The menu screen is not displayed when switching
between Camera and VTR mode (VTR indicator
flashes).

ting

ting

setting

TOP MENU Screen

Different menu screens are displayed depending on whether this device is in the Camera mode or in the VTR mode. In the VTR
mode, the CAMERA OPERATION, CAMERA PROCESS and SWITCH MODE menu screens are not displayed.

Item Function

VIDEO FORMAT.. Displays the menu screen fo r setting the video format for shooting and playing back video.

CAMERA OPERATION.. Displays a menu screen for setting the operation mode for camera shooting.

CAMERA PROCESS.. Displays a menu screen for adjustments of the picture quality of the camera image.

SWITCH MODE.. Displays the menu screens related to the camera switch functions.

AUDIO/MIC.. Displays a menu screen related to audio.

LCD/VF.. Displays a menu screen for selecting whether to display characters on the LCD monitor or in the viewfinder, and for

TC/UB/CLOCK.. Displays a menu screen for setting the time code, user’s bit data, date and time.

OTHERS.. Displays a menu screen for setting other functions and to display the hour meter.

FILE MANAGE.. Displays the FILE MANAGE menu screen.

EXIT The normal screen returns when the SHUTTER dial is pressed while the cursor is aligned with this item.

Camera mode: It consists of two s creens.
VTR mode : It consists of one screen.

•The cursor (K) does not move to this item when this device is recording.

•This item is only displayed in the Camera mode.

It consists of two screens.
The ADVANCED PROCESS menu screen, WHITE BAL ANCE menu screen, and SKIN COLOR ADJUST screen can
be displayed through the CAMERA PROCESS menu screen.

•This item is only displayed in the Camera mode.

•The cursor (K) does not move to this item when this device is in VTR mode (PLAY, STL, FWD, REV).

•This item is only displayed when in camera mode.

Camera mode: It consists of two screens.
VTR mode : It consists of one screen.

•In VTR mode, the screen changes to the AUDIO menu screen.

•The cursor (K) does not move to this item when this device is recording.

adjustments of the picture quality of LCD monitor.
Camera mode: It consists of four screens.
VTR mode : It consists of two screens.

The ways that the date and time are recorded together with the display style are set here.
The TIME/DATE menu screen and CLOCK ADJUST scr een can be displayed through the TC/UB/CLOCK menu
screen.

•The cursor (K) does not move to this item when this device is recording.

It consists of two screens.

Saves the menu screen settings as a file on this device or an SD memory card, or reads the menu screen settings
saved in the file. It is also possible to reset the menu settings to default settings or initialize (format) an SD mem ory
card.
X See“FILE MANAGE Menu Screen ” on page 96.

•The cursor (K) does not move to this item when VTR is activated.

72

73

MENU SCREENS

VIDEO FORMAT[1/2] Menu
Screen

The VIDEO FORMAT menu screen consists of two screens (1/2 screen, 2/2 screen).
In VTR mode, this screen consists of one screen.
*This is not displayed in VTR mode.

Item Function/Setting (bold characters indicate initial settings)

FRAME RATE Sets the frame rate for shooting.

1080I CAMERA* Selects whether or not to output camera image s in HDV1080i signals. HDV1080i signals are output from component

REC* Sets the video format for shooting. (Can only be displayed and set in camera mode)

U model
60/30 :Shoots at 480/60i, 720/60p, 720/30p.

50/25 : Shoots at 720/50p, 720/25p.
24 : Shoots at 480/24p (2:3:2:3 pulldown), 480/24p advance mode (2:3:3:2 pulldown), 720/24p.

E model

60/30 : Shoots at 720/60p, 720/30p.
50/25 :Shoots at 576/50i, 720/50p, 576/25p, 720/25p.
24 : Shoots at 720/24p.
CANCEL : Cancels the settings.

EXECUTE :Executes the settings.

MEMO

•If you change the FRAME RATE item setting, the system is rebooted. X See page53.

•The curs or (K) does not move to this item when this device is in VTR mode or is ejecting a tape.

output of the Y/P
OFF :No HDV1080i signal is output. Output setting of camera images is based on the REC settings below.
ON :HDV1080i signal is output. (60/30 Frame rate: 1080 /60i, 50/25 Frame rate: 1080/50i)

•ON/OFF is set when the SHUTTER dial is pressed.

MEMO

•Tape recording and IEEE1394 output are not available when this is ON.

•REC item cannot be set when this is ON.

•The curs or is positioned on 1080I CAMERA in the VIDEO FORMAT[1/2] menu screen when this is ON.

•When the FRAME RATE is set to 24, this is fixed to OFF.

You can set the following according to the FRAME RATE.

DV-60I DV format Shoots using a 480/60i signal. (U model Only)

HDV-HD30P HDV format Shoots using a 720/30p signal.

HDV-HD50P HDV format Shoots using a 720/50p signal.

HDV-HD25P HDV format Shoots using a 720/25p signal.

DV-50I DV format Shoots using a 576/50i signal. (E model Only)

DV-25P DV format Shoots using a 576/25p signal. (E model Only)

DV-24P DV format Shoots at 480/24p (2:3:2:3 pulldown). (U model Only)

HDV-HD24P HDV format Shoots using a 720/24p signal.

CANCEL : Cancels the settings.

EXECUTE :Executes the settings.

MEMO

•The sync hronous video signal is momentarily disturbed when the REC item setting is switched.

•On t he E model, the video format is fixed at HDV-HD24P when the FRAME RATE item is set to “24”. “[HDV-

B/PR terminal. However, they are not recorded on this device.

480/60i or 576/50i signals are output from the VIDEO OUT terminal. (Composite signal)

Setting Description FRAME RATE

60/30HDV-HD60P HDV format Shoots using a 720/60p signal.

50/25

24DV-24PA DV format Shoots at 480/24p (2:3:3:2 pulldown). (U model Only)

HD24P]” is displayed.

*This is not displayed in VTR mode.

Item Function/Setting (bold characters indicate initial settings)

ASPECT* Sets the screen size for the recording video signal. (Can only be displayed and set in camera mode)

HDV PB OUTPUT When playing back an HDV recorded tape, set video format for component output from the Y/PB/PR terminal.

DOWN CON. [HDV] Set the style to display down-converted images in aspect ratio 4:3.

NEXT PAGE To display the VIDEO FORMAT[2/2] menu scr een, move the cursor to this position and press the SHUTTER dial.

PAGE BACK The TOP MENU returns when the SHUTTER dial is pressed with the cursor at this position.

4:3 :Outputs the video with an aspect ratio of 4:3.
16:9 : Outputs the video with an aspect ratio of 16:9.

MEMO

•When th e format setting is HDV, the ASPECT item is fixed at 16:9. (“[16:9]” is displayed.)

•The sync hronous video signal is momentarily disturbed when the ASPECT item setting is switched.

You can set the following depending on the FRAME RATE of the HDV recorded tape.

NATIVE Outputs the signal being recorded on the tape. 60/30

720P Converts the signal being recorded on tape to 720p and outputs it. 50/25

1080I Converts the signal being recorded on tape to 1080i and outputs it. 24

NTSC Converts the signal being recorded on tape to 480i and outputs it. 60/30

PALConverts the signal being recorded on tape to 576i and outputs it. 50/25

MEMO

•If you convert video recorded in HDV format to DV format and output it, the colors may change.

•This item is also applied to EE images when HDV signals are input to the IEEE1394 terminal.

•Fixed at NATIVE during DV recorded tape playback or DV signal input.

SQUEEZE : Image that is squeezed horizontally is displayed.

LETTER :Wide image with the top and bottom blackened is displayed.

MEMO

This setting is only valid in HDV mode.
In DV mode, the style becomes SQUEEZE regardless of the setting of th is item.

The resolution in the vertical direction drops compared to 4:3 video.

Setting Description FRAME RATE

24

74

75

MENU SCREENS

VIDEO FORMAT[2/2] Menu
Screen

*This is not displayed in VTR mode.

Item Function/Setting (bold characters indicate initial settings)

PB TAPE Selects whether to automatically detect the playback tape video format or play back only a particular format.

SET UP Selects whether to add a setup signal to the composite signal from the VIDEO OUT terminal.

PAGE BACK When the cursor is in this position, press the SHUTTER dial to the VIDEO FORMAT[1/2] menu screen.

Normally, use the “AUTO” setting.
AUTO :During tape playback, the format signal is switched automatically and played back.
DV : During tape playback, only the part of the tape recorded in DV format is played back.
HDV : During tape playback, only the part of the tape recorded in HDV format is played back.
DVCAM : During tape playback, only the part of the tape recorded in DVCAM format is played back.

MEMO

If you play back a tape containing both DV and HDV formats, the video signal is disturbed when the signal is
switched.

In DV format, a setup signal can be added to COMPONENT output.
*You can also select a setup signal in the IEEE1394 signal input mode.

0.0% : No setup signal is added.

7.5% : A setup signal is added.

Initial settings : U model: 7.5% E model: 0. 0%

MEMO

When the FRAME RATE item is set to 50/25, this item is not displayed.

CAMERA OPERATION
Menu Screen

The CAMERA OPERATION menu screen is only displayed in the Camera mode.

Item Function/Setting (bold characters indicate initial settings)

*1

AE LEVEL

ALC MAX Sets the maximum “ALC” value to automatically change the signal intensity level depending on the brightness.

PRESET TEMP. Sets the basic color temperature when the [WHT.BAL] white balance selector switch c on page 15 is in the PRST

SMOOTH TRANS

*1

BARS

PAGE BACK The TOP MENU returns when the SHUTTER dial is pressed with the cursor at this position.

*1

REMOTE appears as the setting value of this item when the remote control unit is connected.

For adjusting the image level when using auto iris, “ALC” or “EEI”.
Increase value : Increases level.
Decrease value : Decreases level.
[Settings: –3, –2 - NORMAL (0) - 2, 3]

[Setting: 6 dB, 12 dB, 18 dB]

(PRESET) position.
3200K :Sets the basic color temperature to 3200K. (Use for light sources with a low color temperature,

5600K : Sets the basic color temperature to 5600K. (Use for light sources with a high color temperature,

MEMO

This item does not function when the FAW item on the SWITCH MODE menu screen is set to “PRESET”.

*1

Smoothens the transition when the [GAIN] switch b on page 15, or [WHT.BAL] switch c on page 15 is switched
over and achieves gradual change in place of sudden change.
However, the smooth transition function does not function when switching the [GAIN] switch set in ALC, FULL AUTO
ON.
OFF :Deactivates the smooth transition function.
ON :Activates the smooth transition function.

Sets whether or not color bars are output. (This is fixed at “O FF” when in FULL AUTO mode)
OFF :Color bar s are not output.
ON :Color bars are output.

such as halogen lamps.)

such as sunlight.)

76

77

MENU SCREENS

CAMERA PROCESS[1/2]
Menu Screen

The CAMERA PROCESS menu screen consists of two screens. (1/2 screen, 2/2 screen)
The CAMERA PROCESS menu screen is only displayed in camera mode.

Item Function/Setting (bold characters indicate initial settings)

MASTER BLACK

DETAIL

V/H BALANCE

H FREQUENCY

V FREQUENCY

SKIN DETECT

NEXT PAGE To display the C AMERA PROCESS[2/2] menu screen, move the cursor to this position and press the SHUTTER dial.

PAGE BACK The TOP MENU returns when the SHUTTER dial is pressed while the cursor is at this position.

*1

*2

*2

Adjusts the pedestal level (master black) that serves as the reference black.
Increase the number : Raises the pedestal level.
Decrease the number : Lowers the pedestal level.

*2

LEVEL Sets the contour compensation level (amount of softening) for the skin detail function.

When the REC item on the VIDEO FORMAT[1/2] menu is set to “DV-60I” or “DV-50I”, “-----” is displayed and this cannot be
selected.
REMOTE appears as the setting value of this item when the remote control unit is connected.

[Settings: MIN (–10), –9 - NORMAL (0) - 9, MAX (10)]

Adjusts the contour (detail) sharpness level.
Increase the number : Sharpens the contour.
Decrease the number : Softens the contour.
OFF:Does not function.
[Settings: O FF, MIN (–10), –9 - NORMAL (0) - 9, MAX (10)]
When this item is set to “OFF”, “-----” is displayed for the following menu items and they cannot be selected.

*2

Sets which contours (details) to sharpen, those in the horizontal (H) direction or those in the vertical (V) direction.
Increase the number : Sharpens H direction.
Decrease the number : Sharpens V direction.
[Settings: H-MIN (–5), –4 - NORMAL (0) - 4, H -MAX (5)]

*2

Changes the horizontal contour compensation frequency for the contours (details). Set this as appropriate for the
subject.
LOW : Enhances low frequency bands.

MIDDLE :Enhances middle frequency bands.
HIGH : Enhances high frequency bands.

*1

Use this when shooting subjects with finely detailed patterns.
Changes the vertical contour compensation frequency for the contours (details). Compensates for dis tortion when
outputting progressive video to an interlaced monitor.
HIGH :Enhances high frequency bands.
LOW : Enhances low frequency bands.

*2

Sets ON/OFF for the skin detail function.
OFF :Turns off the skin detail function.
ON : Turns on the skin detail fu nction. (Softens detected skin color area details.)
X See“Using the Skin Detail Function” on page 100.

This can only be selected when the SKIN DETECT item is set to ON.
–1 : Low contour compensat ion level (amount of softening)
–2 :Medium contour compensation level (amount of softening)
–3 : High contour compensation level (amount of softening)

Use this when shooting subjects with large patterns.

Use this when shooting subjects with small patterns.

CAMERA PROCESS[2/2]
Menu Screen

Item Function/Setting (bold characters indicate initial settings)

*1

BLACK

STRETCH LEVEL The amount of stretching increases from LEVEL1oLEVEL2o LEVEL3oLEVEL4oLEVEL5.

COMPRESS LEVEL The amount of compression increases from LEVEL1oLEVEL2oLE VEL3oLEVEL4oLEVEL5.

WHITE CLIP Sets the white clipping point on input video signals with a high luminance level.

*1

KNEE

*1

LEVEL

REVERSE PICTURE When the lens image is inverted and flipped, set “ROTATE” t o record properly.

DNR Selects whether or not to set the noise reduction.

ADVANCED PROCESS.. Calls up the ADVANCED PROCESS menu screen.

PAGE BACK When the cursor is in this position, press the SHUTTER dial to return to the CAMERA PROC ESS[1/2] menu screen.

*1

REMOTE appears as the setting value of this item when the remote control unit is connected.

Changes the gain in dark areas. Change this depending on the video signal being s hot.
NORMAL :Normal status
STRETCH : Enhances the dark area s of the video so the contrast between light and dark is more visible by

COMPRESS : If t he video that was shot is bright overall and lacking in contrast, the gain in the dark areas is com-

[Settings: LEVEL1, LEVEL2, LEVEL3, LEVEL4, LEVEL5]

[Settings: LEVEL1, LEVEL2, LEVEL3, LEVEL4, LEVEL5]

108% :The white clipping point is set at a luminance level of 108%.
100% : The white clipping point is set at a luminance level of 100%. If the screen is too white at

Sets whether to run the “knee” function, which compresses video signals over a certain level to render the tonality
in the highlight areas, automatically or manually. Set “MANUAL” when you want to check the bright areas, and adjust
the knee point manually.
AUTO :Adjusts the knee point automatically, according to the luminance level.
MANUAL : You can change the luminance level in the “LEVEL” item.

Sets the start point for knee compression (knee point).
Increase the number : Raises the knee point level.
Decrease the number : Lowers the knee point level.
[Settings: 80%, 85%, 90%, 95%, 100%]

MEMO

When the “KNEE” item is set to “AUTO”, “-----” is displayed and this cannot be selected.

OFF :No inversion.
ROTATE : Invert lens image.

The DNR (Digital Noise Reduction) function is applied to the tape recording signal, HD component output signal, and
the IEEE1394 output signal in CAMERA mode.
When camcorder’s picture is noisy, because of low light conditions, you can improve picture’s S/N by turning DNR
on.
OFF :Noise reduction is not performed.
ON : Sets noise reduction.

MEMO

•DNR is not applied in VTR mode or during playback.

•DNR is not applied to compos ite output signals in CAMERA mode.

•When t he DNR is set to ON, the camcorder’s S/N ratio becomes better but the “blurring of moving objects” will

X See “ADVANCED PROCESS Menu Screen” on page 80.

stretching the signal only in the dark areas.
Set elongation level with STRETCH LEVEL below.

pressed, which adds contrast.
Set compression level with COMPRESS LEVEL below.

108%, set it to 100%.

increase.

78

79

MENU SCREENS

ADVANCED PROCESS
Menu Screen

Item Function/Setting (bold characters indicate initial settings)

CINEMA OFF :Turns the function OFF.

COLOR MATRIX Sets the color matrix.

ADJUST.. When “STANDARD” or “CINEMA” is set for the COLOR MATRIX item, a color matrix can be set individually.

GAMMAAdjusts the gamma curve to determine how black is rendered.

LEVEL When “STANDARD”, “CINEMA”, or “FILM OUT” is set for the G AMMA item, a gamma curve can be set individually.

COLOR GAIN Adjusts the video signal color level.

WHITE BALANCE.. When the cursor is in this position and you press the SHUTTER dial once, the screen switches to the WHITE BAL-

SKIN COLOR ADJUST.. W hen the cursor is in this position and you press the SHUTTER dial once, the screen switches to the SKIN COLOR

PAGE BACK When the cursor is in this position, press the SHUTTER dial to return to the CAMERA PROC ESS[2/2] menu screen.

ON :Sets the gamma characteristics and color ma trix close to the characteristics of a movie

MEMO

When this item is set to “ON”, “[CINE]” is displayed for COLOR M ATRIX and GAMMA items and cannot be
selected.

OFF : Turns the function OFF.
STANDARD :Sets a normal color matrix.
CINEMA : Sets a color matrix close to the characteristics of a movie screen.

Press the SHUTTER dial to call up the COLOR MATR IX ADJUST menu screen.
X See“COLOR MATRIX ADJUST Menu Screen ” on page 81.

OFF : No gamma curve correction.
STANDARD :Sets a normal gamma curve.
CINEMA : Sets to appear movie-like when viewing on a TV screen.
FILM OUT : Sets to a setting for recording onto film.

MEMO

When this item is set to “OFF”, “-----” is displayed for the LEVEL item and it cannot be selected.

Increase the number : Enhances the tonality of the black. However, the tonality in the bright areas deteriorates.
Decrease the number : Enhances the tonality in the bright areas. However, the tonality in the black areas deterio-

[Settings: MIN (–5), –4 - NORMAL (0) - 4, MAX (5)]

OFF:Sets the video to black and white.
Increase the number : Makes the colors more dense.
Decrease the number : Makes the colors less dense.
[Settings: OFF, MIN (–10), –9 - NORMAL (0) - 9, MAX (10)]

ANCE menu screen.

ADJUST screen.

screen. (The monitor image is movie-quality. This setting is not intended f or film output.)

rates.

COLOR MATRIX ADJUST
Menu Screen

Item Function/Setting (bold characters indicate initial settings)

R GAIN For manually adjusting the shading of the R axis of the color matrix (red and cyan).

R ROTATION For manually adjusting the color phase of the R axis of the color matrix (red and cyan).

G GAIN For manually adjusting the shading of the G axis of the color matrix (green and magenta).

G ROTATION For manually adjusting the color phase of the G axis of the color matrix (green and magenta).

B GAIN For manually adjusting the shading of the B axis of the color matrix (blue and yellow).

B ROTATION For manually adjusting the color phase of the B axis of the color matrix (blue and yellow).

PAGE BACK Press the SHUTTER dial to return to the ADVANCED PROCESS screen when cursor is at this position.

Increase the numbe r : Enhances red and cyan.
Decrease the number : Reduces red and cyan.
[Settings: MIN (–5), –4 - NORMAL (0) - 4, MAX (5)]

Increase the number : Increases yellowishness of red color and bluishness of cyan color.
Decrease the number : Increases bluishness of red color and greenishness of cyan color.
[Settings: MIN (–5), –4 - NORMAL (0) - 4, MAX (5)]

Increase the number : Enhances green and magenta.
Decrease the number : Reduces green and magenta.
[Settings: MIN (–5), –4 - NORMAL (0) - 4, MAX (5)]

Increase the number : Increases bluishness of green color and reddishness of magenta color.
Decrease the number : Increases yellowishness of green color and bluishness of m agenta color.
[Settings: MIN (–5), –4 - NORMAL (0) - 4, MAX (5)]

Increase the number : Enhances blue and yellow.
Decrease the number : Reduces blue and yellow.
[Settings: MIN (–5), –4 - NORMAL (0) - 4, MAX (5)]

Increase the number : Increases reddishness of blue color and greenishness of yellow color.
Decrease the number : Increases greenishness of blue color and reddishness of yellow color.
[Settings: MIN (–5), –4 - NORMAL (0) - 4, MAX (5)]

SKIN COLOR ADJUST
Menu Screen

When you enter the SKIN COLOR ADJUST screen, the areas where the skin detail function is applied are displayed in color, and
other areas are displayed in black and white.

Item Function/Setting (bold characters indicate initial settings)

SKIN COLOR DET. Sets the color used by the skin detail function.

SKIN COLOR RANGE Adjusts the range of skin colors to which the skin detail function is applied.

PAGE BACK When the cursor is in this position, press the SHUTTER dial to return to the ADVANCED PROCESS menu screen.

STOP :Stops loading the color used by the skin detail function.
EXECUTE : Loads the color used by the skin detail function.
X See“How to Use Skin Detail” on page 99.

Adjust as you check the color range.
Increase the number : Widens the range.
Decrease the number : Narrows the range.
[Settings: NARROW (–10), –9 - NORMAL (0) - 9, WIDE (10)]

MEMO

When the COLOR GAIN item is “OFF” on the ADVANCED PROCESS menu screen, only the areas where the
skin detail function is running are displayed using skin colors.

80

81

MENU SCREENS

WHITE BALANCE Menu
Screen

Item Function/Setting (bold characters indicate initial settings)

*1

WHITE PAINT<R>

WHITE PAINT<B>*1Adjusts the B (blue) component when in AWB (Auto White Balance) mode.

SHADING Adjusts white shading.

LEVEL R When the SHADING item is set to MANUAL, adjusts the reds of white shading.

LEVEL G When the SHADING item is set to MANUAL, adjusts the greens of white shading.

LEVEL B When the SHADING item is set to MANUAL, adjusts the blues of white shading.

PAGE BACK When the cursor is in this position, press the SHUTTER dial to return to ADVANCED PROCESS menu screen.

*1

REMOTE appears as the setting value of this item when the remote control unit is connected.

Adjusts the R (red) component when in AWB (Auto White B alance) mode.
Increase the number : Strengthens the red.
Decrease the number : Weakens the red.
[Settings: MIN (–32), –31 - NORMAL (0) - 30, MAX (31)]

MEMO

•You can select this when A or B is set for the [WHT.BAL] switch c on the right panel of this device.

X See page15.

Settings can be made for A and B individually. (When “PRESET” is set, “-----” is displayed and this cannot be
selected.)

•When you press the AWB (Auto White Balance) button and readjust the white balance, WHITE PAINT R
becomes “NORMAL”.

Increase the number : Strengthens the blue.
Decrease the number : Weakens the blue.
[Settings: MIN (–32), –31 - NORMAL (0) - 30, MAX (31)]

MEMO

•You can select this when A or B is set for the [WHT.BAL] switch c on the right panel of this device.
X See page15.

Settings can be made for A and B individually. (When “PRESET” is set, “-----” is displayed and this cannot be
selected.)

•When you press the AWB (Auto White Balance) button and readjust the white balance, WHITE PAINT <B>
becomes “NORMAL”.

PRESET :No white s hading adjustment.
MANUAL : Enables white shading adjustment.
X See“White Shading Adjustment” on page 52.

MEMO

When the SHADING item is set to PRESET, the LEVEL R, LEVEL G, and LEVEL B items cannot be selected.

Increase the number : Red at the bottom of the screen is suppressed and the top is enhanced.
Decrease the number : Red at the top of the screen is suppressed and the bottom is enhanced.
[Settings: MIN, –127 to –1, NORMAL, 1 t o 126, MAX]

Increase the number : Green at the bottom of the screen is suppressed and the top is enhanced.
Decrease the number : Green at the top of the screen is suppressed and the bottom is enhanced.
[Settings: MIN, –127 to –1, NORMAL, 1 t o 126, MAX]

Increase the number : Blue at the bottom of the screen is suppressed and the top is enhanced.
Decrease the number : Blue at the top of the screen is suppressed and the bottom is enhanced.
[Settings: MIN, –127 to –1, NORMAL, 1 t o 126, MAX]

SWITCH MODE Menu
Screen

The SWITCH MODE menu screen is only displayed in camera mode.

Item Function/Setting (bold characters indicate initial settings)

SHUTTER Sets the fixed value (STEP) for values that can change using the SHUTTER dial on the right panel or the VARIABLE

FAW Sets the positions to assign the FAW (Full Auto White Balance) function to the [WHT.BAL] white balance selector

GAIN L
GAIN M
GAIN H
USER1
USER2
USER3

LENS RET Sets the lens RET button functions. (This does not function if there is not RET button on the lens you are using.)

PAGE BACK When the cursor is in this position, press the SHUTTER dial to return to the TOP M ENU screen.

used when shooting computer monitors.
STEP :Switches the shutter speed using fixed values.
VARIABLE : Set when shoot ing a computer monitor, etc.
You can set the following using the REC item on the VIDEO FORMAT menu screen. (This is fixed at EEI when in
FULL AUTO mode.)

REC Item Setting for STEP Setting for VARIABLE

DV-60I

HDV-HD60P

HDV-HD30P

DV-50I

HDV-HD50P

HDV-HD25P
DV-25P

DV-24P
DV-24PA

HDV-HD24P

switch c on page 15. (Fixed at FAW when in FULL AUTO mode)
NONE :The FAW function is not assigned.
A:Assigns FAW to the A position.
B:Assigns FAW to the B position.
PRESET : Assigns FAW to the PRESET position.
Sets the gain value for each position on the [GAIN] sensitivity selector switch b on page 15.
[Setting: 0dB, 3dB, 6dB, 9dB, 12dB, 15dB, 18dB, ALC] (Fixed at ALC in FULL AUTO mode)

Initial values: L: 0dB, M: 9dB, H: 18dB

You can assign one of the following menu functions to the [USER1/2/3] buttons 8 on page 14 to each button.
Set according to the shooting conditions. This is only valid in CAMERA mode.This does not function in VTR mode.

NONE Does not function.

BARS
PRESET TEMP.

B.STRETCH1
B.STRETCH2
B.STRETCH3
B.STRETCH4
B.STRETCH5
B.COMPRESS1
B.COMPRESS2
B.COMPRESS3
B.COMPRESS4
B.COMPRESS5

AE LEVEL+
AE LEVEL–

RET Assigns the normal RET button function.

LOAD FILE Assigns the function to jump to in the LOAD FILE menu.

RET :Functions as a normal RET button.
FOCUS ASSIST : Functions as the FOCUS ASSIST button.

1/7.5, 1/15, 1/30, 1/60, 1/100, 1/250, 1/500, 1/1000, 1/2000, 1/4000,
1/10000

1/6.25, 1/12.5, 1/25, 1/50, 1/120, 1/250, 1/500, 1/1000, 1/2000,
1/4000, 1/10000

1/6, 1/12, 1/24, 1/48, 1/60, 1/100, 1/250, 1/500, 1/1000, 1/2000,
1/4000, 1/10000

Setting Description

Assigns “BARS” item functions in the CAMERA OPERATION menu screen.
Assigns “PRESET TEMP.” item functions in the CAMERA OPERATION menu screen.
X See“CAMERA OPERATION Menu Screen” on page 77.

Assigns “BLACK” item functions in the CAMERA PROCESS[1/2] menu screen.
X See “CAMERA PROCESS[1/2] Menu Screen” on page 78.

Assigns “AE LEVEL” item functions in the CAMERA OPERATION menu screen.

MEMO

Cannot assign to the USER3 button. If you assign these menu functions, assign AE
LEVEL+ to the USER1 button, AE LEVEL– to the USER2 button.

X See“FILE MANAGE Menu Screen ” on page 96.

1/30.03 - 1/10489.5

1/25.04 - 1/10489.5

1/24.01 - 1/10489.5

82

83

MENU SCREENS

AUDIO/MIC[1/2] Menu
Screen

The AUDIO/MIC menu screen consists of two screens (1/2 screen, 2/2 screen).
In VTR mode, the screen changes to the AUDIO menu screen.

*This is not displayed in VTR mode.

Item Function/Setting (bold characters indicate initial settings)

TEST TONE Sets whether to output a test audio signal (1 k Hz, –20dBFS or –12dBFS) during color bar output.

MIC WIND CUT* Selects whether to cut the lows (low frequency bands) from the audio input signal.

AUDIO REF.LEVEL Sets the reference audio level on the tape. (Both CH-1 and CH-2)

INPUT1 MIC REF.* Sets the reference audio input level for the INPUT1 connector. (When the [AUDIO INPUT] switch 3 on page 16 is

INPUT2 MIC REF.* Sets the reference audio input level for the INPUT2 connector. (When the [AUDIO INPUT] switch 3 on page 16 is

AUDIO MODE* Selects the audio sampling frequency for recording. (Both CH-1 and CH-2)

AUDIO LIMITER* Sets whether or not AUDIO LIMITER functions when the [CH-1/CH-2 AUDIO SELECT] switch 2 on page 13 is set

NEXT PAGE To display the AUDIO/MIC[2/2] menu screen, move the cursor to this position and press the SHUTTER dial.

PAGE BACK When the cursor is in this position, press the SHUTTER dial to return to the TOP M ENU screen.

OFF :A test audio signal is not output.
ON : A test audio signal is output.

Use this when you want to reduce wind sounds from the microphone.
OFF : Low frequencies are not cut.
INPUT1 : Only cuts the low frequencies in the audio from the INPUT1 connector.
INPUT2 : Only cuts the low frequencies in the audio from the INPUT2 connector.
BOTH : Cu ts the low frequencies in the audio from both the INPUT1 and INPUT2 terminals.

–20dB :Records with –20 dB as the reference audio level.
–12dB : Records with –12 dB as the reference audio level.

*Set this for both playback and recording.
*This is unrelated to the audio level via the IEEE1394 signal.

set to MIC or MIC+48)
–50dB :Sets the reference audio input level at –50 dB.
–60dB : Sets the reference audio input level at –60 dB.

set to MIC or MIC+48)
–50dB :Sets the reference audio input level at –50 dB.
–60dB : Sets the reference audio input level at –60 dB.

(When HDV format is set, this is fixed at 48K and “[48K]” is displayed.)
32K : Digitally records with a 12-bit, 32 kHz sampling frequency.
48K : Digitally records with a 16-bit, 48 kHz sampling frequency.
*If the D V format is 12-bit, 32 kHz, up to 4 recording track channels are available.
Of those, this device records on the CH-1 and CH-2 channels. This device is not capable of dubbing.

to MANU.
OFF:AUDIO LIMITER is turned off.
ON :AUDIO LIMITER is turned on. Recording level is suppressed when excessive audio is input.

Set this if you are playing back the recorded tape on an ordinary DV device.

AUDIO/MIC[2/2] Menu
Screen

In VTR mode, the screen changes to the AUDIO menu screen.

*This is not displayed in VTR mode.

Item Function/Setting (bold characters indicate initial settings)

AUDIO MONITOR Selects whether stereo or mixed audio is output from the PHONES jack when the MONITOR SELECT switch is set

FAS AUDIO* Selects the recording level adjusting method for FAS (Full Auto Shooting). (CH-1, CH-2)

SEARCH AUDIO [DV] Selects whether to output audio when searching a tape recorded in DV format. (This also includes slow playback.)

PB AUDIO CH [DV] Selects which channel audio t o output when playing back a DV tape with the audio signal recorded in 4 channels.

PAGE BACK When the cursor is in this position, press the SHUTTER dial to the AUDIO/MIC[1/2] menu screen.

to BOTH.
STEREO : Stereo audio (CH-1 audio is output to L and CH-2 audio is output to R)
*Outputs only the CH-1 audio from the monitor speaker.

MIX :Mixed audio (CH -1 and CH-2 mixed audio is output to L and R)

AUTO :Sets to AUTO.

SW SET : Follows settings for the AUDIO SELECT switch.

X See “2 [CH-1/CH-2 AUDIO SELECT] switch” on page 13.
X See “g [FULL AUTO] switch” on page 19.

ON :Audio is output.
OFF : Audio is not output.

(Can only be set in VTR mode)
CH1/2 :Outputs the CH-1 and CH-2 channel audio.

MIX : Outputs all 4 channels of audio at the same time.
CH3/4 : Outputs the CH-3 and CH-4 channel audio.

MEMO

This device does not have a function for dubbing to the CH-3 and CH-4 channels.

This device records the audio in CH-1 and CH-2 while shooting.

84

85

MENU SCREENS

LCD/VF[1/4] Menu Screen

The LCD/VF menu screen consists of four screens. (1/4 screen, 2/4 screen, 3/4 screen, 4/4 screen)
The LCD/VF[1/4] menu screen can only be set in camera mode.
In VTR mode, this screen consists of two screens. (1/2 screen, 2/2 screen)

Item Function/Setting (bold characters indicate initial settings)

ZEBRASwitches the luminance level of the subject sections where the zebra pattern is displayed.

F. NO/IRIS IND. Selects whether or not the F-number of the lens iris/iris level mark is displayed in the status display on the LCD mon-

FILTER Selects whether or not the FILTER position of this device is displayed in the status display on the LCD monitor or in

SAFETY ZONE

CENTER MARK

FOCUS ASSIST Sets the FOCUS ASSIST function. Press the [FOCUS ASSIST] button on page 14 (6) or page 18 (7) to operate

COLOR Sets the display color for focusing when running the FOCUS ASSIST function.

LEVEL Sets the display range of the focal area when the FOCUS ASSIST function is in use.

NEXT PAGE When you display the LCD/VF[2/4] menu screen, mov e the cursor to this position and press the SHUTTER dial.

PAGE BACK When the cursor is in this position, press the SHUTTER dial to return to the TOP M ENU screen.

*1

SAFETY ZONE and CENTER MARK will not be displayed when this device is in VTR mode (PLAY, STL, FWD, REV).

60-70% : Zebra pattern is displayed in sections with luminance levels between 60% and 70%.
70-80% :Zebra pattern is displayed in sections with luminance levels between 70% and 80%.
85-95% : Zebra pattern is displayed in sections with luminance levels between 85% and 95%.
OVER95% : Zebra pattern is displayed in sections with luminance levels over 95%.
OVER100% : Zebra pattern is displayed in sections with luminance levels over 100%.

itor or in the viewfinder. (STATUS 1 screen)
OFF :F-number and iris level mark is not displayed.
F.NO : F-number is displayed.
F.NO+IND. : F-number and iris level mark is displayed.

the viewfinder. (STATUS 1 screen)
OFF :FILTER position is not displayed.
ON :FILTER position is displayed.

*1

Selects whether or not the safety zone is shown on the LCD monitor or in the viewfinder together with the form of
the safety zone indication.
OFF :Not displayed.
4:3 : 4:3 zone is displayed.
14:9 : 14:9 zone is displayed.
16:9 : 16:9 zone is displayed.
16:9+4:3 : 16:9 zone and 4:3 zone are display mixed. (This cannot be selected when DV format is set.)

2.35:1 CE : Displays 2.35:1 zone in the middle of the screen.

2.35:1 CH : Displays 2.35:1 zone at the top of the screen.

*1

Sets whether or not a center mark is displayed when the safety zone is displayed.
ON :Center mark is displayed.
OFF : Center mark is not displayed.

MEMO

When the SAFETY ZONE item is set to OFF, “- - -” is indicated and this item cannot be selected.

the FOCUS ASSIST function.
NORMAL :Only the [FOCUS ASSIST] f unction operates.

ACCU-FOCUS : The FOCUS ASSIST function and ACCU-FOCUS (forced focus) function operates.

BLUE :Displays the area of focus in blue.
RED : Displays the area of focus in red.
GREEN : Displays the area of focus in green.

LOW : Displays the focal area narrower than MIDDLE.
MIDDLE :Displays the focal area in normal setting.
HIGH : Displays the focal area wider than MIDDLE.

(Only in HDV format or 24P or 25P mode)

(Only in HDV format or 24P or 25P mode)

(The focus area becomes blue, red or green, making it easier to focus.)

This makes the depth of field shallower, making it easier to focus. ACCU FOCUS automatically
turns OFF after approximately 10 seconds.

LCD/VF[2/4] Menu Screen

The LCD/VF[2/4] menu screen can only be set in camera mode.

Item Function/Setting (bold characters indicate initial settings)

LCD MIRROR MODE Sets the image display method when the LCD monitor is in counterview position.

NEXT PAGE When you display the LCD/VF[3/4] menu screen, mov e the cursor to this position and press the SHUTTER dial.

PAGE BACK When the cursor is in this position, press the SHUTTER dial to return to the LCD/VF[1/4] m enu screen.

NORMAL :Image is displayed without inverting.
MIRROR : Inverted image is displayed.

•NORMAL/MIRROR is set when the SHUTTER dial is pressed.

MEMO

MIRROR setting is disabled when color bar is displayed or status is in magnified size.

X See “Outputting Color Bars” on page 101.
X See “Magnified Status Indications on the LCD Monitor” on page 29.

86

87

MENU SCREENS

LCD/VF[3/4] Menu Screen

[1/2] screen is displayed in the VTR mode.

Item Function/Setting (bold characters indicate initial settings)

VIDEO FORMAT Selects whether to display the video format in the status display on the LCD monitor or the viewfinder.

TAPE REMAIN Selects whether or not the remaining tape time (minutes) is shown in the status display on the LCD monitor or in the

TC/UBSelects whether or not the time code or user’s bits data should be shown in the status display on the LCD monitor

AUDIO Selects whether the audio level meters should be shown in the status display on the LCD monitor and the viewfinder

BATTERY INFO. For setting the status display method when loading the Anton-Bauer Battery.

SHUTTER DISP. Sets the shutter display method to seconds or angle.

NEXT PAGE Camera mode:

PAGE BACK Camera mode:

(Camera mode: STATUS 1 screen, VTR mode: STATUS screen)
ON :Displays the video format.
OFF : Does not display the video format.
In camera mode : Displays the video format set in the REC item on the VIDEO FORMAT menu screen.
In VTR mode : Displays the video format recorded on the playback tape or the video format input from the

viewfinder.
(Camera mode: STATUS 1 screen, VTR mode: STATUS screen)
ON :Displayed.
OFF:Not displayed.

or in the viewfinder.
(Camera mode: STATUS 1 screen, VTR mode: STATUS screen)
ON :Displayed.
OFF:Not displayed.
*Whether the time code or user’s bits data is shown is selected with the TC DISPLAY switch.

screen.
(Camera mode: STATUS 1 screen, VTR mode: STATUS screen)
ON :Displayed.
OFF:Not displayed.

The status will be displayed on the LCD screen and the viewfinder screen.
(In camera mode, only displayed when in STATUS 1 screen.)
VOLTAGE :Indicates battery voltage in 0.1 V steps [V]
CAPA% : Remaining ba ttery is shown in percentage [%]
TIME :Remaining battery is shown in minutes [min]

•VOLTAGE and CAPA% can be selected when using an IDX Endura battery. When TIME is set, VOLTAGE is dis­played.

MEMO

•When TIME or CAPA% is selected, the battery indicator displayed before the value changes depending on the

remaining battery level.

}: 12% or less |: 12% to less than 50% {: 50% or more

•When rem aining battery level becomes less than 12%, the display changes to “} RES”.

•When C ALIBRATION is required from the battery, the display switches between TIME (CAPA%) display (30 sec-

onds) and “} CAL” display (2 seconds) repeatedly.

•For CALIBRATION, refer to the instruction manual of A nton-Bauer Battery.

•Please use the remaining battery level and remaining time as a reference for shooting duration.

SEC :Seconds
DEG : Degrees

MEMO

This item is available when REC on the VIDEO FORMAT[1/2] menu screen is set to HDV-HD24P, DV-24P, DV­24PA, HDV-HD25P, or DV-25P.
Shutter display method is fixed to SEC for other s ettings. (“[SEC]” is displayed)

To display the LCD/VF[4/4] menu screen, move the cursor to this position and press the SHUTTER dial.
VTR mode:
To display the LCD/VF[2/2] menu screen, move the cursor to this position and press the SHUTTER dial.

When the cursor is in this position, press the SHUTTER dial to return to the LCD/VF[2/4] menu screen.
VTR mode:
When the cursor is in this position, press the SHUTTER dial to return to the TOP MENU screen.

IEEE1394 connector.

LCD/VF[4/4] Menu Screen

[2/2] screen is displayed in the VTR mode.

*This is not displayed in VTR mode.

Item Function/Setting (bold characters indicate initial settings)

LCD+VF Selects the LCD monitor and viewfinder display switching method.

LCD CONTRAST Adjusts the contrast of the LCD.

VF CONTRAST Adjusts the contrast of the viewfinder.

BLACK & WHITE* Selects the LCD monitor and viewfinder display style.

PAGE BACK Camera mode:

ON :Viewfinder always displayed the image.
OFF : Turns off the vie wfinder display when the LCD monitor is opened.

MEMO

When this item is set to ON, the contents displayed on the LCD monitor can be changed with the DISPLAY button.
X See page 29.

[Settings: MIN (–5), –4 - NORMAL (0) - 4, MAX (5)]

[Settings: MIN (–5), –4 - NORMAL (0) - 4, MAX (5)]

COLOR :Displays the image in color.
B&W : Displays the image in black and white.

MEMO

Characters are always displayed in color.

When the cursor is in this position, press the SHUTTER dial to return to the LCD/VF[3/4] menu screen.
VTR mode:
When the cursor is in this position, press the SHUTTER dial to return to the LCD/VF[1/2] menu screen.

88

89

MENU SCREENS

TC/UB/CLOCK Menu
Screen

Time c odes (TC) and user ’s bits (UB) can be set on this screen. Date and time is set on the TIME/DATE screen that can be
reached from this screen.

Item Function/Setting (bold characters indicate initial settings)

TC PRESET To preset the time code, align the cursor with this position and then press the SHUTTER dial.

UB PRESET To preset the user’s bit dat a, align the cursor with this position and then press the SHUTTER dial.

DROP FRAME

*2

UB REC

TC DUPLI. Sets how to record the time code (TC) and user’s bits (UB) during IEEE1394 input of HDV/DV format.

HEADER REC.. To make settings related to the HEADER REC function, align the cursor with this position, and then press the SHUT-

TIME/DATE.. To make settings related to the date and time, align the cursor with this position and t hen press the SHUTTER dial.

PAGE BACK When the cursor is in this position, press the SHUTTER dial to return to the TOP M ENU screen.

*1

This can be displayed and selected when 60/30 is set for the FRAME RATE item on the VIDEO FORMAT menu screen.
(When 24 is set, this is fixed at “NON DROP” and “[NON DROP]” is displayed.)

*2

This can be displayed and selected when 50/25 is set for the FRAME RATE item on the VIDEO FORMAT menu screen.

EXECUTE :The set time code is confirmed.
CANCEL : The set time code is cancelled.
ZERO PRESET : Resets all time codes to “0”.

EXECUTE :The set user’s bit data are confirmed.
CANCEL : The set us er’s bit data are cancelled.
ZERO PRESET : Resets all user’s bits data to “0”.

MEMO

When the “UB REC” item is set to “OFF”, “--------” is displayed and this cannot be selected.

*1

Selects whether the time code generator framing mode is drop-frame or non-drop-frame.
DROP :Internal time code generator works in drop-frame mode. Set this when the recorded time is im-

NON DROP : Internal time code generator wor ks in non-drop-frame mode. Set this when the number of frames

To select whether or not user’s bit data should be recorded.
To select whether the user’s bits should be displayed during playback of a tape with recorded user’s bits data.
ON :User’s bits are recorded during recording.

OFF : User’s bits are not recorded during recording.

OFF :Records the TC/UB set in this device.
ON :Records the TC/UB of the IEEE1394 input.

MEMO

In HDV format, the UB set in this device is recorded regardless of the s etting.

TER dial.

X See“HEADER REC Menu Screen” on page 91.

X See “TIME/DATE Menu Screen” on page 92.

portant.

is important.

User’s bits are displayed during playback.

User’s bits are not displayed during playback.

HEADER REC Menu
Screen

The HEADER REC menu screen is used for settings related to the HEADER REC function. X See page59.

Item Function/Setting (bold characters indicate initial settings)

START KEY Sets whet her the HEADER REC operation should be executed when the REC/VTR trigger button is pressed while

TC DATA Sets the time code value for the point when the Record-Standby mode is engaged following completion of HEADER

UB DATA Sets the user’s bits of the HEADER REC section.

BARS TIME Sets the duration (seconds) in which the color bar signal and test tone (1 kHz) is recorded during HEADER REC. (1-

BLACK TIME Sets the duration (seconds) in which the black signal is recorded during HEADER REC. (1-sec steps)

PAGE BACK The TC/UB/CLOCK menu screen returns when the SHUTTER dial is pressed.

the STOP button is pressed.
DISABLE :HEADER REC operation is not executed.
STOP+REC : HEADER REC operation is executed.

REC.
EXECUTE :Confirms the set time code.
ZERO PRESET : Resets all time codes to “0”.
CANCEL : Clears the set time code.
The frame mode is set depending on the setting in the DROP FRAME item on the TC/UB/CLOCK menu screen.
*The time code value at the point when the Record-Standby mode is engaged may differ some frames from the val-

ue set for this item.

EXECUTE :Confirms the set user’s bits.
ZERO PRESET : Resets all user’s bits data to “0”.
CANCEL : Clears the set user’s bits.

MEMO

•The user ’s bits for the normal recording section are set on the TC/UB/CLOCK menu screen.

•When the “UB REC” item is set to “OFF”, “--------” is displayed and this cannot be selected.

sec steps)
[Settings: 0SEC - 30SEC - 99SEC]

[Settings: 0SEC - 30SEC - 99SEC]

90

91

MENU SCREENS

TIME/DATE Menu Screen

Item Function/Setting (bold characters indicate initial settings)

DISPLAY Sets whether the date and time are shown in the status display on the LCD monitor or in the viewfinder.

DISPLAY MODE In the Camera mode, the date and time are displayed in accordance with the following settings.

DISPLAY STYLE Selects the style for the date and time display.

DATE STYLE Selec ts the style for the date display.

TIME STYLE Selects the style for the time display.

SEC DISPLAY Selects whether to display the seconds in the time display.

TIME SHIFT Sets the clock OFFSET time. (1H steps)

CLOCK ADJUST To adjust the date and time, align the curs or with this position and then press the SHUTTER dial.

PAGE BACK The TC/UB/CLOCK menu returns when the SHUTTER dial is pressed while the cursor is at this position.

OFF :Not displayed.
ON : Displayed.
When a tape with time and date not recorded is played back, there will be no display of time and date even when
this item is set to ON.

The date and time recorded on a tape are displayed in accordance w ith the following settings.
BARS+CAM :Date and time are always displayed.
BARS : Date and time are displayed when the color bars are output.
CAM : Date and time are displayed when the camera images a re output.
When the DISPLAY item is set to OFF, “- - -” is indicated and this item cannot be selected.

DATE+TIME :Date and time are displayed.
DATE : Date only is displayed.
TIME : Time only is displayed.
When the DISPLAY item is set to OFF, “- - -” is indicated and this item cannot be selected.

YY/MM/DD : Displayed in the format of year/month/date.
MM/DD/YY : Displayed in the format of month/date/year.
DD/MM/YY : Displayed in the format of date/month/year.

Variation Range: U model: MM/DD/YY E model: DD/MM/YY

When the DISPLAY item is set to OFF, “- - -” is indicated and this item cannot be selected.

24 HOUR :Displays the time using the 24-hour s ystem.
12 HOUR : Displays the time using the 12-hour system.
When the DISPLAY item is set to OFF, “- - -” is indicated and this item cannot be selected.

ON :Seconds are displayed.
OFF:Seconds are not displayed.
When the DISPLAY item is set to OFF, “- - -” is indicated and this item cannot be selected.

Adds time to the built-in clock (time compensation) and displays it. The adjusted time is also recorded on the tape.
[Settings: –23H - –1H, OFF, +1H - +23H]

The date and time are set on the CLOCK ADJUST screen.
X See“Setting the Date and Time” on page 42.

OTHERS[1/2] Menu Screen

The OTHERS menu screen consists of two screens (1/2 screen, 2/2 screen)

Item Function/Setting (bold characters indicate initial settings)

ANALOG OUT CHAR. Sets whether or not to display characters such as status and m enus on the screen for the [Y/PB/PR] and [VIDEO

LONG PAUSE TIME Selects the time (minutes) before the tape protect mode (drum head rotation stopped) is engaged w hen the record-

ALARM VR LEVEL Selects whether or not alarm sound is emitted and the volume of the alarm sound.

FRONT TALLY Selects the lighting method of the FRONT TALLY lamp during recording.

BACK TALLY Selects the lighting method of the BACK TALLY lamp during recording.

FORMAT LED Sets whether or not the [HDV/DV LED] g on page 15 lights for HDV format or DV format.

NEXT PAGE To display the OTHERS[2/2] menu screen, move the cursor to this position and press the SHUTTER dial.

PAGE BACK The TOP MENU screen returns when the SHUTTER dial is pressed while the cursor is at this position.

OUT] terminals.
ON :On-screen display.
OFF:No on-screen display.

MEMO

When ANALOG OUT CHAR. item is set to ON, the content displayed on the viewfinder is also displayed in the
video from the video output terminal. During VTR recording, the mode is displayed in red on the viewfinder. How­ever, color is not applied for the following video outputs.

•Component output of recording or playback in DV format

•Composite output

standby condition continues.
3MIN :3 minut es
5MIN : 5 minut es
*When used in a cold environment or when the stopped or STILL status continues, the setting will be 3 minutes or

less regardless of the setting on the menu.

*Normally, set “3MIN” and use this to prevent head clogging and tape damage.

The alarm sound is output through the monitoring loudspeaker and the PHONES jack .
OFF:Sound is not output.
LOW : Alarm sound is soft.
MIDDLE : Ala rm sound is normal.

HIGH :Alarm sound is loud.

BLINK :The lamp blinks from when the REC/VTR trigger is pressed and until recording starts. The lamp lights

steadily during recording.
ON :The lamp lights only during recording.
OFF:The lamp is always off.

BLINK :The lamp blinks from when the REC/VTR trigger is pressed and until recording starts. The lamp lights

steadily during recording.
ON :The lamp lights only during recording.
OFF:The lamp is always off.

ON :Lights.
OFF:Does not light.

92

93

MENU SCREENS

OTHERS[2/2] Menu Screen

*This is not displayed in VTR mode.

Item Function/Setting (bold characters indicate initial settings)

1394 REC TRIGGER* Set s how to control the REC trigger command output from the IEEE1394 connector. (Can be displayed and set in

BACK SPACE [HDV]* This function controls the camera tape transport, back spac e and pre-roll time when the camera is connected to an

camera mode)
Set this when recording a backup of the HDV/DV signal from this device onto another device.
OFF :Does not contr ol the backup device.
SYNCRO : Controls the backup device in conjunction with the recording start/stop mode status on this device, and

if there is no videocassette or if no tape remains for recording, controls the backup device in c onjunction
with the REC trigger button and the lens VTR button on this device.

SPLIT : The REC trigger bu tton on the right panel of this device controls the backup device recording start/stop.

Set this when you want to control the timing of the recording on this device and the backup device sep­arately.

SERIES : Automatically starts recording on a backup device that is on Pause when the tape on this device has less

than 3 minutes remaining during shooting.

MEMO

•If you use the backup recording function on t he BR-HD50, set this item to OFF.

•The curs or (K) does not move to this item when this device is recording.

external HDD or external back up Recorder via IEEE1394 in HDV mode.
P-1394 :Priority for IEEE1394 recording (Auto setting)
P-TAPE : Priority for camera VCR recording

BACK SPACE [HDV]

IEEE1394
connection

Connected and

Power ON

P-1394

No connection or

Power OFF

Connected and

Power ON

P-TAPE

No connection or

Power OFF

Note 1:

REC start signal will be sent 3 seconds after pressing REC trigger button.
*Actual recording start time is depending on recorder performance.

Note 2:

REC start signal will be sent just after pressing REC trigger button.
*Actual recording start time is depending on recorder performance.

Note 3:

In this mode, the IEEE1394 stream is discontinuous during internal VCR back space editing (when the REC trigger
is operated). This may result in breaks in the recording on tape on an external recorder. In the case of HDD recording
this may result in this device staying in REC PAUSE or divided files.

MEMO

The cursor (K) does not move to this item when this device is recording.

1394 REC
TRIGGER

(X See page 94)

OFF

SYNCRO See Note 1

SPLIT See Note 2

SERIES N/A

OFF

SYNCRO

SPLIT

SERIES

OFF

SPLIT

SERIES N/A

OFF

SYNCRO

SPLIT

SERIES

Internal

start delay

approx. 3 seconds

approx. 1 second N/A

approx. 1 second

approx. 1 second N/A

VCR

External Recorder or HDD

vie IEEE1394 terminal

See Note 3SYNCRO

N/A

*This is not displayed in VTR mode.

Item Function/Setting (bold characters indicate initial settings)

DR-HD100 A.OFF* Selects whether or not to turn OFF the DR-HD100 (HDD unit by FOCUS enhancements) when this device is turned

MENU ALL RESET Selects whether to reset the menu screen settings to initial settings.

PAGE BACK When the cursor is in this position, press the SHUTTER dial once to return to the OTHERS[1/2] menu screen.

DRUM HOUR Displays the drum usage time.

FAN HOUR Displays the fan motor usage time.

OFF.
OFF :Power does not turn OFF.
ON :Power turns OFF with this device.

MEMO

•The [ mark is displayed at the upper r ight of the LCD monitor and viewfinder when the DR-HD100 is con-

nected. If this device is turned OFF before the mark is displayed, power does not turn OFF even if this setting is
ON.

•This set ting is canceled and the DR-HD100 does not turn OFF in the following instances.

- 1394 REC TRIGGER item is set to OFF

-VTR mode is set

•When the DR-HD100 power turns off and this device is turned ON again, after 12 seconds, “DR-HD100 power?”
appears on the LCD monitor for 7 seconds.

The camera mode and VTR mode menu settings are reset . (The TC PRESET, UB PRESET, and CLOCK ADJUST
settings are not reset.)
CANCEL :The settings are not reset.
EXECUTE : The settings are reset.

MEMO

•The curs or (K) does not move to this item when the VTR is activated.

•If the current menu settings and the factory settings have different FRAME R ATE settings, “REBOOT!” is dis­played for 3 seconds, this device automatically turns off and then turns on.

Use as an estimate for regular maintenance.
The cursor (K) does not move to this item.

Use as an estimate for regular maintenance.
The cursor (K) does not move to this item.

94

95

MENU SCREENS

FILE MANAGE Menu
Screen

You c an perform t he following operations in the FILE MAN­AGE menu screen.

•Settings corresponding to shooting conditions can be read
immediately with th e following read-onl y files.
LIVE HD60P : Ideal setting for HD60P format
LIVE HD50P : Ideal setting for HD50P format
CINEMA HD24P : Ideal setting for movie-quality shoot-

*The read-only files listed above cannot be saved or

reset.

•Save menu settings (C amcorder: CAM1, 2, 3, 4; SD mem­ory card: EXT1, 2, 3, 4) to files.

•Load saved files.

•You can set a SUB NAME for the file to be saved.

•Reset the menu settings to the factory settings.

•Initialize (format) an SD memory card.

•When you set CANCEL for the LOAD, STORE, RESET
and FORMAT SD CARD items, these operations are not
executed.

•A message is displayed in the LCD monitor or the view­finder.
EXECUTE : Displayed for 3 seconds
COMPLETE : Displayed for 3 seconds
ERROR : Flashes (Error displays X See page 97. )

If there is an error:

•Press the STATUS button o Return to the normal

screen.

•Press the SHUTTER dial o Return to the FILE MAN-

AGE menu screen.

•To exit the FILE MANAGE screen:
Move the cursor (K) to PAGE BACK and press the SHUT­TER dial or press the STATU S button.

ing

Execute Complete

Flashing

Error display

Error

Displaying the FILE MANAGE menu
screen

Select the FILE MANAGE.. item on the TOP MENU screen.

Loading a menu settings file

Select the LOAD FILE.. item on the FILE MANAGE menu
screen.

FILE MANAGE menu screen

1. Tu rn t he SHUTTER dial, bring the cursor (K) to SELECT

and press the SHUTTER dial.

•The file name setting area flashes.

2. Tu rn t he SHUTTER dial, select the file to load and press

the SHUTTER dial.

3. Tu rn t he SHUTT ER dial, bring the cursor (K) to the

LOAD item and press the SHUTTER dial.

• EXECUTE flashes.

4. With EXECUTE selected, press the SHUTTER dial to

read the menu settings in the selected file.
If the current menu settings and the menu settings to be
loaded have different video format settings, “REBOOT!”
is displayed for 3 seconds, this device turns off automati­cally and then turns on.

Reboot display

CAUTION

This device cannot load scene files from GY-HD100/GY­HD110-series devices.

Saving settings

Select the STORE FILE.. item on the FILE MANAGE menu
screen.

1. Tu rn t he SHUTTER dial, bring the c ursor (K) to SELECT

and press the SHUTTER dial.

•The file name setting area flashes.

2. Tu rn t he SHUTTER dial, select the file to save to, and

press the SHUTTER dial.

 Setting a SUB NAME

If you do not want to set a SUB NAME, go to Step 5..

3. Tu rn the SHUTTER dial, bring the cursor (K) to SUB

NAME and press the SHUTTER dial.

•The first character in the file name flashes.

Settable Characters

Space

4. Tu rn t he SHUTTER dial, select the character, and press

the SHUTTER dial.

•The second character in the file name flashes.
Repeat Step 4. up through the eighth character.

5. Tu rn t he SHUTT ER dial, bring the cursor (K) to the

STORE item and press the SHUTTER dial.

• EXECUTE (if the file already exists, “OVERWRITE”)
flashes.

6. With EXECUTE selected, turn the SHUTTER dial to save

the menu settings to the selected file.

Execute Complete

Error displays

•NO CARD:

No SD memory card is inserted.
Insert an SD memory card.

•NO FORMAT:

The SD memory card is not initialized (formatted).
Initialize (format) the SD memory card.

•NO ACCESS:

There is a problem with the SD memory card.
Replace the SD memory card.

•WRITE PROTECT:

The SD memory card may be write-protected.
Check that write-protection is disabled.

•DISK FULL:

The SD memory card does not have enough free space.
Delete unwanted data or initialize (format) the card.

•INVALID VIDEO FORMAT:

A settings file for a video format that is not supported was
called up.
Settings files for video formats that are not supported can­not be called up.

•READ ONLY FILE:

Indicates a read-only file.
Read-only files cannot be saved.

Flashing

Error display

Error

96

97

MENU SCREENS

FILE MANAGE Menu Screen
(Cont’d)

Resetting the menu settings to the
factory settings

Select the RESET FILE.. item on the FILE MANAGE menu
screen.

1. Tu rn t he SHUTTER dial, bring the c ursor (K) to SELECT

and press the SHUTTER dial.

•The file name setting area for the file to be reset
flashes.

2. Tu rn th e SHUTTER dial, select the name of the file to

reset, and press the SHUTTER dial.
CAM1, CAM2, CAM3, CAM4, CURRENT (current set­tings)

3. Tu rn t he SHUTTER dial, bring the cursor (K) to the

RESET item and press the SHUTTER dial.

• EXECUTE flashes.

4. With EXECUTE selected, press the SHUTTER dial to

reset the settings.

Execute Complete

If the current menu settings and the factory settings have
different video format settings, “REBOOT!” is displayed
for 3 seconds, this device turns off automatically and then
turns on.

Reboot display

When this happens, the SUB NAME initial value,
“[SCENE]” is displayed.

MEMO

Even if CAM1, CAM2, CAM3, or CAM4 are reset, the cur­rent settings are not reset.
To reset the currently set values, select “CURRENT”.

Initializing (formatting) an SD mem­ory card

Before initializing (formatting) a card:

1Insert and remove the SD memory card with the power

to this device OFF.

2Disable write-protection on the SD memory card.
3Check that an SD memory card has been inserted into

this device.

1. Tu rn the SHUTTER dial, bring the cursor (K) to the FOR -

MAT SD CARD item and press the SHUTTER dial.

•CANCEL flashes.

2. Tu rn t he SHUTTER dial, and when EXECUTE flashes,

press the SHUTTER dial to initialize (format) the card.

Execute Complete

Flashing

Error display

Error

If there is an error:
Check items 2 and 3 in “Before initializing (formatting) a

card”.

FEATURES OF THE CAMERA SECTION

How to Use Skin Detail

This function suppresses edge sharpening in the skin color
areas of the video signal, enabling velvety, smooth skin tones.

Setting the skin detail function color and range

SHUTTER dial

USER 3USER 2USER 1

SHUTTER

ND FILTER

2

1

MENU

STATUS

STATUS button

1. Display the ADVANCED PROCESS menu screen.

In menu setting procedure
TOP MENU screen o CAMERA PROCESS[1/2] o
CAMERA PROCESS[2/2] o Select ADVANCED PRO-
CESS item.

Cursor

CAMERA PROCESS[2/2] menu screen

2. Tu rn the SHUTTER dial, bring the cursor (K) to the SKIN

COLOR ADJUST item and press the SHUTTER dial.

•The SKIN COLOR ADJUST screen is displayed.

•The entire screen becomes black and white, and only
the areas recognized by the skin detail function are
displayed in color.

ADVANCED PROCESS menu screen

3. Move the cursor (K) to the SKIN COLOR DET. item,

press the SHUTTER dial and select EXECUTE to switch
to skin color detection mode.

4. Shoot so that the color area you want to detect within the

detection area frame is input.
To c o n fi r m the detection area, press the SHUTTER dial
and set SKIN COLOR DET. to STOP.

•The frame on the scre en is the detectio n area for the
skin detail function.

•The color within the detection area is recognized as
the color that the skin detail function will use.

• If the color within the detection area is not recognized
as the color that the skin detail function will use,
“ERROR” is displayed on the screen.

Detection

area

SKIN COLOR ADJUST me nu screen

Black and

white

presenta-

tion

Color

presenta-

tion

SKIN COLOR ADJUST screen

5. If you want to change the range of colors recognized with

the skin color detection function, follow the steps below.
1Turn t he SHUTTER dial, bring the cursor (K) to the

SKIN COLOR RANGE item and press the SHUTTER
dial.
o The setting area flashes and can be changed.

2Turn t he SHUTTER dial up or down to widen or narrow

the color range.

•Set the range as you check the color displa y.

3To c on fi rm t he color range, press t he SHUTTER dial.

•The setting returns to its lit state.

6. To s t op t h e SKIN COLOR ADJUST function, turn the

SHUTTER dial, bring the cursor (K) to the PAGE BACK
item and press the SHUTTER dial.

MEMO

In the SKIN COLOR ADJUST menu screen, the lens image
is not inverted and flipped even if the REVERSE PICTURE
item in the CAMERA PROCESS[2/2] menu screen is set to
ROTATE.

98

99

FEATURES OF THE CAMERA SECTION

How to Use Skin Detail
(Cont’d)

Using the Skin Detail Function

To u s e the skin detail function set on the SKIN COLOR
ADJUST screen, select “ON” for the SKIN DETECT item on
the CAMERA PROCESS[1/2] menu screen.
In addition, you can use the LEVEL item to set three levels of
suppression of skin color area detail enhancement in the
video signal. X See page 78.
While the skin detail function operates, the “SD” indicator is
displayed on the STATUS 0 and STATUS 1 screen in the
viewfinder or LCD monitor.

“SD” display

STATUS 0

Confirming the color tone area adjusted
with the Skin Detail function

When you push the ZEBRA switch on the front panel to
“SKIN AREA”, the skin detail function turns ON, and the color
area adjusted with the skin detail function is displayed in
color in the LCD monitor or viewfinder.

ZEBRA switch

MEMO

•When the REVERSE PICTURE item in the CAMERA
PROCESS[2/2] menu screen is set to ROTATE, skin
detail function is available but the detection area is not
displayed in the viewfinder or LCD screen.

•When COLOR GAIN item on the ADVANCED PRO­CESS menu screen is set to “OFF”, only the portion the
skin detail function is working is displayed in skin color.
X See page 80.

Outputting Color Bars

This device can output three types of color bars, depending
on the camera settings.

NTSC standard : Outputs color bars compliant with the

PAL s tandard : Outputs color bars compliant with the

16:9 screen : Outputs multi-format color bars.

To o utp ut co lo r bars, make the following settings.

1. Tu rn the FULL AUTO switch to “OFF”.

2. Set the BARS item on the CAMERA OPERATION menu

screen to “ON”. X See page 77.

•Color bars are output.

 Outputting color bars using the USER buttons

1. Tu rn the FULL AUTO switch to “OFF”.

2. Assign “BARS” to one of the USER1, 2 or 3 buttons.

X See “SWITCH MODE Menu Screen” on page 83.

3. Press the USER button to which “BARS” was assigned.

•Color bars are output.

MEMO

•You can select whether to output an audio test signal
during color bar output using the TEST TONE item on
the AUDIO/MIC[1/2] menu screen. X See page 84.

•Color bars are not output when FULL AUTO mode is ON
or in VTR mode.

SMPTE standard.

EBU standard.

FULL AUTO switch

USER button

100

101

OTHERS

Warnings and Responses

Warni ngs are displa yed on the LCD monitor or the viewfinder if there was a mistaken operation, if the battery or tape is low, or if
there is a problem on the VTR.
In addition, if the tape or battery is low or the VTR has a problem, the tally lamp flashes (or lights) and an alarm is output from the
monitor speaker or PHON ES jack.

MEMO

This device uses microcomputers. It may not operate properly if there is external static or interference. If this happens, turn the
power off and then on again.

Display Status Action

60/30 INHIBIT

CHANGE FRAME

RATE MENU

50/25 INHIBIT

CHANGE FRAME

RATE MENU

24 INHIBIT CHANGE

FRAME RATE MENU

DV-60I INVALID!
DV-24P INVALID!
DV-24PA INVALID!

DV-50I INVALID!
DV-25P INVALID!

HDV-SD60P
INVALID!

HDV-SD50P
INVALID!

INVALID TAPE! A computer data tape or a DVC PRO cassette was used. Use a MiniDV videocassette.

LP TAPE INVALID!* Tried to play back a tape recorded in LP mode. This device cannot record or play back in LP mode.

NO DV SIGNAL* DV signal was not input. Set the IEEE1394 switch to DV and input a DV signal.

NO HDV SIGNAL* HDV signal was not input. Set the IEEE1394 switch to HDV and input an HDV signal.

COPY INHIBIT* Tried to record a copyguarded signal. Cannot record a copyguarded signal.

REC INHIBIT* A tape that cannot be recorded (back switch is set to SAVE)

NO TAPE* No videocassette tape is inserted. Insert a cassette tape.

The FRAME RATE item is set to 50/25 or 24, and a tape re­corded in 60/30 frame is played back or it is input into the
IEEE1394 port in VTR mode.

The FRAME RATE item is set to 60/30 or 24, and a tape re­corded in 50/25 frame or it is input into the IEEE1394 port
in VTR mode.

The FRAME RATE item is set to 50/25 or 60/ 30, and a tape
recorded in 24 frame is played back or it is input into the
IEEE1394 port in VTR mode.

A tape recorded in DV-60I, DV-24P, or DV-24PA format
was played back or input into the IEEE1394 connector in
VTR mode on the E model.

A tape recorded in DV-50I or DV-25P format was played
back or input into the IEEE1394 connector in VTR mode on
the U model.

A tape recorded in HDV-SD60P format was played back or
input into IEEE1394 connector in VTR mode.

A tape recorded in HDV-SD50P format was played back or
input into IEEE1394 connector in VTR mode.

was inserted.

Sets the FRAME RATE item on the VIDEO FORMAT menu
screen to match the frames.
X See page 74.

The E model cannot play back tapes recorded in DV-60I,
DV-24P or DV-24PA format or input into the IEEE1394 con­nector in VTR mode.

The U model cannot play back tapes recorded in DV-50I or
DV-25P format or input into the IEEE1394 connector in
VTR mode.

This device cannot play back or input an HDV-SD60P/
HDV-SD50P signal.

Set the switch on the back of the cassette tape to REC.

Display Status Action

CHANGE PB TAPE
FORMAT*

LOW VOLTAGE* Battery is low. Charge the battery pack or replace it.

TAPE NEAR END* There are less than 3 minutes remaining on the tape (flash-

TAPE END* Displayed when the tape ends. Replace the tape.

CHANGE 1394
SWITCH*

SWITCH TO VTR
MODE*

HEAD CLEANING
REQUIRED

CLEANING TAPE! Displayed when a head cleaning tape is inserted. The display disappears when the head cleaning tape is re-

COPY GUARD!* Tried to play back a copyguarded tape. Cannot play back a copyguarded tape.

FAN MOTOR HOUR Over the prescribed fan motor usage time. Please contact your local dealer or JVC.

PUSH CASSETTE
COVER*

CHANGE THE SYS­TEM*

*When status indications are magnified, warnings are not displayed on the LCD monitor.

X See “Magnified Status Indications on the LCD Monitor” on page 29.

Image format which is different from the one set in the PB
TAPE item on the VIDEO FORMAT[2/2] menu screen is be­ing played back.

es only when recording).

Recording or playback video format and the IEEE1394 set­ting is different when connected to the IEEE1394 port.

Tried to use the FF or REW but ton in camera mode. Press the CAM/VTR button to set VTR mode.

Displayed when the video head is dirty. (Head clogging was
detected during an edit search in shooting mode as well as
during playback and displayed.)

The videocassette cover is not firmly shut. Lightly push the top center of the videocassette cover.

Displayed when you attempt to change FRAME RATE item
in the VIDEO FORMAT menu screen.

Check the setting for the PB TAPE item.
X See page 76.

To continue shooting, find a new tape or replace the tape.

Set the IEEE1394 switch correctly, turn the power off and
then on again.

Clean with a special head cleaning tape.
X See page 7.

moved.

When the FRAME RATE item setting is changed, the frame
rate system for this device is changed. Check the frame
rate to use before changing the setting.
X See pages 53 and 74.

102

103

OTHERS

Warnings and Responses (Cont’d)

Error code

Warning

•Warning Indications for VTR Abnormalities

Should malfunctions occur during VTR operation, this
device self-diagnoses the cause and shows the diagnose
together with an error code on the LCD monitor or in the
viewfinder.

Error Code Error Details This device Operation Remedy

0201

CONDENSATION ON DRUM

3200

LOADING FAILURE

3300

UNLOADING FAILURE

4100

CASSETTE EJECT FAILURE

5605 - 5609

DEFECTIVE TAPE

5702

TAPE END DET. ERROR

5802

TAPE BEGIN DET. ERROR

7001

DRUM MOTOR FAILURE

7101

CAP MOTOR FAILURE

7202 - 7203

SUPPLY REEL FAILURE

7302 - 7303

TAKE UP REEL FAILUR E

7305

TAKE UP REEL FAILUR E

8000

EMERGENCY TAPE!

TURN POWER OFF.

TURN BACK ON LATER.

Indicates dew formation (condensa­tion).

Tape cannot be loaded. Switch the power OFF and then switch

Tape cannot be unloaded.

Irregularity with eject operation.

Tape is cut. Operation stops. Press the EJECT button to take out the

Tape end sensor error. Operation s tops. All opera-

Tape beginning sensor error.

Drum rotation error.

Capstan rotation error.

Supply reel rotation error.

Take up reel rotation error.

Take up reel rotation error when un­loading.

Tape problem detected.

System error when power is turned on. HDV /DV LED, VTR indicat or

Operation stops. All opera­tions are rejected.

tions are rejected.

and TALLY lamp flash. Only
POWER switch operation is
accepted.

Leave this device with the power ON,
until the indication disappears.
X See page 9.

it back ON. However, the tape may be
damaged depending on the circum­stances. Please consult the person in
charge of professional video equip­ment at your nearest JVC-authorized
service agent.

cassette.
If the tape runs out during reco rding,
switch the power OFF and then switch
it back ON, press the EJECT button,
and then take out the cassette.

Switch the power OFF and then switch
it back ON. However, the tape may be
damaged depending on the circum­stances. Please consult the person in
charge of professional video equip­ment at your nearest JVC-authorized
service agent.

Turn off the power and let this device
sit for sometime before turning it back
on.

 TA LLY la mp

Blinks when remaining battery power or tape is low. (Only
in Camera mode)

Blinking Pattern Remaining Battery/Tape

Slow blinking
(once per sec.)

Fast blinking
(four times per sec.)

 Alarm Sound

When remaining battery power becomes low, a warning
sound is output from the monitoring loudspeaker and the
PHONES jack.
(In Camera mode only)
When an irregularity occurs in the VTR, a warning sound
is also output.

Whether or not alarm sound should be output and the vol­ume level are selected with the ALARM VR LEVEL item
on the OTHERS[1/2] menu screen.

 Depending on the alarm conditions, the warning indicators

on the LCD monitor/ viewfinder screen, the TALLY lamp,
and alarm sounds app ear as shown in the fo llowing table.

Alarm Indications on LCD Monitor/

VTR alarm indication
(Example)

Display symbols J :Blinking once per second. I :Blinking four times per second.

•Remaining battery power is low.

•Remaining tape time is equivalent to less
than 3 minutes.

•Tape has run out.

•Irr egularity has occurred in the VTR.

Viewfinder Screen

:Sound interrupted once per second. : Continuous sound.

TALLY lamp Alarm Sound Condition

Dew formation (condensation) or error has oc-

I

J
I
J

curred in the VTR.

About 3 min. before tape end
(displayed during recording).

Tape end
(displayed during recording).

Remaining battery power is low.

104

105

OTHERS

Troubleshooting

Power cannot be switched ON. • Is power supply connected correctly?

Recording is not possible. • Is the REC LOCK switch on the handle set to ON?

Camera image does not appear on LCD monitor or in viewfind­er.

Image shown on LCD monitor or in viewfinder is dark or blurred. • Adjust the brightness of the LCD monitor or viewfinder screen.

Playback does not start when the play button is pressed. • In the Camera mode, is “STOP” indicated as the VTR operation mode indica-

Cannot play bac k. • I s the PB TAPE item on the VIDEO FORMAT menu screen set to a setting oth-

Cannot input an HDV/DV signal. • Is this device in VTR mode? (Is the VTR indicator lit?)

Noise interferes with playback video. • Video head may be clogged with dirt. C lean head with the special head clean-

Sound is not output during playback. • Is the AUDIO SELECT item on the AUDIO menu screen set to CH3/4?

Noise appears when playing back a tape recorded on another
unit.

The transient section between scenes recorded on other units
and those recorded on this device may appear disturbed.

The front section’s audio level control doesn’t work. • Is the CH-1/CH-2 AUDIO SELECT switch set to “AUTO”?

Cannot initialize (format) the SD memory card. • Is the SD memory card write-protected? X See page 34.

Battery alarm is displayed even if a fully charged battery pack
is put in.

Cassette cannot be ejected after the power is turned ON. • The capacity of the power supply may be insufficient. Check the power volt-

Time code or user’s bits data not displayed. • Is the TC/UB item on the LCD/VF[3/4] menu screen set to OFF?

The date and time are not displayed or recorded. • Is the DISPLA Y item on the TIME/DATE menu screen set to OFF?

Symptoms Remedy

•Is battery pack rec harged?

•Was th e power turned ON immediately after being turned OFF?
Wait at least 5 seconds before turning the power ON again once it has been
turned OFF.

•Is the switch on cassette set to “REC”? If it is set to “SAVE”, set it to “REC”.

•The C amera mode has not been selected. (The VTR indicator does not light.)
While the VTR indicator lights, press the MODE switch upward to turn on the
CAM indicator.

•The C amera mode has not been selected. (The VTR indicator does not light.)
While the VTR indicator lights, camera image will not be output.
Press the CAM/VTR switch upward to turn on the VTR indicator.

•Is the ND filter knob set to 2?

•Is the iris closed?

•Is the shutter speed to o fast?

•Is the viewfinder cable correct ly connected?

tor?
When “STBY” is indicated, press the STOP button to dis play “STOP”.

er than AUTO?
If this menu item and the tape format do not match, the tape cannot be played
back.

•Is the IEEE1394 sw itch set correctly?

ing tape. X See “Precautions for Use of Head Cleaning Tape” on page 7.

To output the sound of the recording, set to CH1/2.

•When a t ape recorded on another unit is played back or used for recording,
this phenomenon may occur due to tracking errors.

•Is the FULL AUTO switch set to “ON”?

•Is the battery pack old?

age.

If so, set to ON.

Set to ON when the data should be displayed and recorded.

•Is the date and time setting made? X See“Setting and Displaying the Date
and Time” on pages 41, 42.

How to Display the Hour
Meter

The drum and fan motor usage times are displayed in the
DRUM HOUR item and the FAN HOUR items on the OTH­ERS[2/2] menu screen as the hour meters on this device.
Use as an estimate for regular maintenance. X See page 7.

1. Tu rn the POWER switch ON.

2. Press the STATUS button for at least 1 second to display

the TOP MENU screen.

3. Tu rn t he SHUTTER dial, select the OTHERS.. item, and

press the SHUTTER dial.
The OTHERS[1/2] menu screen is displayed.

4. Select the NEXT PAGE item on the OTHERS[1/2] menu

screen and press the SHUTTER dial.
The OTHERS[2/2] menu screen is displayed.

OTHERS[2/2] menu screen

Drum usage
hours (h)

Fan motor usage hours (h)

 OTHERS[2/2] Menu Screen

DRUM HOUR item : Displays the drum usage hours.
FAN HOUR item : Displays the fan motor usage

5. To ret u rn to the normal screen display, do one of the fol-

lowing:

•Press the STATUS button.
or

•Return to the TOP MENU screen, select the EXIT item
on the TOP MENU screen and press the SHUTTER
dial.

hours.

106

107

OTHERS

Specifications

[General]

Power requirements : DC 12 V, W 1.9 A
Power consumption : Approx. 23 W (in the Record mode)
Dimensions : 224(W) × 242.3(H) × 401(D) mm

Mass : 3. 6 d(8.0 lbs.) (U model)

Tem pe r ature
Operating : 0°C to 40°C (32°F to 104°F)
Stor age : –20°C to 60°C (–4F° to 140°F)
Humidity
Operating : 30% to 80% RH
Stor age : 85% RH or less

[Camera section]

Image pickup device : 1/3" interline-transfer CCDs
Color separation
optical system
Number of total pixels : Approx. 1,110,000 pixels
Color bars : SMPTE/EBU type Sync system:

Lens mount : 1/3" bayonet system
ND filter : 1/4ND, 1/16ND
Gain : 0, 3, 6, 9, 12, 15, 18 dB, ALC
Electronic shutter
Stan dard value : 59.94 Hz (U model)/50 Hz (E model)
Fixed values : 7.5 - 10,000 Hz, 11 steps (HDV

Var iabl e scan : 30.03 - 10,489.5 Hz (HDV HD60p/

Dynamic range : 300% or more

[VTR section]

Video

Recording format : 720/24p, 720/25p, 720/30p, 720/

Video Format:
[HDV]

Video signal record­ing format
Compression : MPEG-2 video (profile & level:

(U model)
224(W) × 242.3(H) × 414(D) mm
(E model)

3.8 d(8.4 lbs.) (E model)
(including lens (Th16 × 5.5BRMU),
viewfinder, microphone and tape)

: F1.4, 3-color separation prism

Internal sync (built-in SSG)

HD30p/HDV HD60p/DV 60i), 6.25 ­10,000 Hz, 11 steps (HDV HD25p/
HDV HD50p/DV 50i), 6 - 10,000 Hz,
12 steps (HDV HD24p/DV 24p) ,

6.25 - 10,000 Hz, 11 steps (DV 25p)

HDV HD30p/DV 60i)

25.04 - 10,489.5 Hz (HDV HD50p/
HDV HD25p/DV 50i/DV 25p)

24.01 - 10,489.5 Hz (HDV HD24p/
DV 24p)

50p, 720/60p (U/E model), 480/24p,
480/60i (U model), 576/25p, 576/50i
(E model)

: HDV720p format, 8-bit, 19.7 Mbps

MP@H-14)

[DV]

Video signal record ­ing format
Compression : DV compr ession, 4:1:1 (NTSC)/

Audio:
[HDV]

Audio signal record­ing format

[DV]

Audio signal record­ing format

Usable tape : M iniDV tape
Tap e s pee d:18.8 mm/ sec.
Record/play time : 63 minutes (with an M-

:DV format, 8-bit, 25 Mbps

4:2:0 (PAL)

:MPEG1 Audio Layer II

: 16-bit (locked audio), 48 kHz PCM

for 2 channels or 12-bit, 32 kHz
PCM for 4 channels

DV63PROHD tape)

[Time Code]

Time c ode si gnal : Compliance with SMPTE/EBU stan-

dard

[Connectors]

Analog composite output

Analog component output

Y:1.0 V (p-p), 75 :, unbalanced (BNC)

B/PR :0.7 V (p-p), 75 :, unbalanced (BNC)

P

Audio inputs

Mic : –60 dBs, 3 k:, balanced (XLR), +48

Line : +4 dBs, 10 k:, balanced (XLR)
Audio outputs : –8 dBs, low impedance, unbalanced

Earphone jack : –17 dBs to –60 dBs, 8-: impedance

IEEE1394 connector : 6-pin

:1.0 V (p-p), 75 :, unbalanced (RCA)

V output for phantom power supply

(RCA ×2)

(stereo mini-jack ×2)

[ACCESSORIES]

Lens : 1 (Excluding the CHU/CHE model)
Microphone : 1
Core Filter : 1
Clamp Filter : 4
SD memory card : 1
Instruction Manual : 1
Warranty Card : 1
(USA and Canada only)

For details, consult your JVC dealer.

EXTERNAL DIMENSIONS

*Design and specifications are subject to change without notice.

(unit: mm)

108

109

GY-HD250/GY-HD251

E

INTRODUCTION

CONTROLS,
INDICATORS AND
CONNECTORS

HD CAMERA RECORDER

HD CAMERA RECORDER

INSTRUCTIONS

GY-HD250
GY-HD251

PREPARATIONS

PREPARATIONS
FOR OPERATION

SETTING AND
ADJUSTMENTS
BEFORE SHOOTING

SHOOTING
OPERATION

PLAYBACK MODE

USING EXTERNAL
COMPONENTS

MENU SCREENS

FEATURES OF THE
CAMERA SECTION

OTHERS

© 2006 Victor Company of Japan, Limited

LST0440-001A

Thank you for purchasing this JVC product. Before operating this
device, please read the instructions carefully to ensure the best
possible performance.

For Cu stomer Use:

Enter below the Serial No. which is located on the body.
Retain this information for future reference.
Model No.
Serial No.

*The illustration shows the GY-HD250/GY-

HD251 HD CAMERA RECORDER with the
provided lens, viewfinder and microphone
attached.

LST0440-001A

Important Safeguards

1. Read all of these instructions.

2. Keep these instructions.

3. Heed all warnings.

4. Follow all instructions.

5. Do not use this apparatus near water.

6. Clean only with dry cloth.

7. Do not block any ventilation openings. Install in accor­dance with the manufacturer’s instructions.

8. Do not install near any heat sources such as radia­tors, heat resisters, stoves, or other apparatus
(including amplifiers) that produce heat.

9. Do not defeat the safety purpose of the polarized or
grounding-type plug. A polarized plug has two blades
with one wider than the other. A grounding type plug
has two blades and a third grounding prong.
The wide blade or the third prong are provided for
your safety.
If the provided plug does not fit into your outlet, con­sult an electrician for replacement of the obsolete out­let.

10. Protect the power cord from being walked on or
pinched particularly at plug, convenience receptacles,
and the point where they exit from the apparatus.

11. Only use attachments/accessories specified by the
manufacturer.

12. Use only with the cart, stand, tripod,
bracket, or table specified by the
manufacturer, or sold with the appa­ratus.
When a cart is used, use caution
when moving the cart/apparatus
combination to avoid injury tip-over.

13. Unplug this apparatus during light­ning storms or when unused for long periods of time.

14. Refer all servicing to qualified service personnel. Ser­vicing is required when the apparatus has been dam­aged in any way, such as power-supply cord or plug
id damaged, liquid has been spilled objects have
fallen into the apparatus, the apparatus has been
exposed to rain or moisture, does not operate nor­mally, or has been dropped.

Safety Precautions

FOR USA AND CANADA

CAUTION

RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK

DO NOT OPEN

CAUTION: TO REDUCE THE RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK,

DO NOT REMOVE COVER (OR BACK).
NO USER SERVICEABLE PARTS INSIDE.

REFER SERVICING TO QUALIFIED SERVICE PERSONNEL.

The lightning flash with arrowhead symbol, within
an equilateral triangle is intended to alert the user
to the presence of uninsulated “dangerous voltage”
within the product’s enclosure that may be of suffi­cient magnitude to constitute a risk of electric shock
to persons.

The exclamation point within an equilateral triangle
is intended to alert the user to the presence of
important operating and maintenance (servicing)
instructions in the literature accompanying the
appliance.

INFORMATION FOR USA

INFORMATION:

This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the
limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the
FCC Rules.
These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection
against harmful interference in a residential installation. This
equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency
energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the
instructions, may cause harmful interference to radio communi­cations. However, there is no guarantee that interference will
not occur in a particular installation.
If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or
television reception, which can be determined by turning the
equipment off and on, the user is encouraged to try to correct
the interference by one or more of the following measures:

z Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna.
z Increase the separation between the equipment and

receiver.

z Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different

from that to which the receiver is connected.

z Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/TV technician for

help.

CAUTION:

CHANGES OR MODIFICATIONS NOT APPROVED BY JVC
COULD VOID USER’S AUTHORITY TO OPERATE THE
EQUIPMENT.

THIS DEVICE COMPLIES WITH PART 15 OF THE FCC
RULES.
OPERATION IS SUBJECT TO THE FOLLOWING TWO CON­DITIONS: (1) THIS DEVICE MAY NOT CAUSE HARMFUL
INTERFERENCE, AND (2) THIS DEVICE MUST ACCEPT
ANY INTERFERENCE RECEIVED, INCLUDING INTERFER­ENCE THAT MAY CAUSE UNDESIRED OPERATION.

INFORMATION (FOR CANADA)
RENSEIGNEMENT (POUR CANADA)

This Class B digital apparatus complies with Canadian ICES-

003.

Cet appareil numerique de la Class B est conforme a la norme
NMB-003 du Canada.

WARNING:
TO REDUCE THE RISK OF FIRE OR ELEC­TRIC SHOCK, DO NOT EXPOSE THIS
APPLIANCE TO RAIN OR MOISTURE.

This unit should be used with 12V DC only.
CAUTION:
To prevent electric shocks and fire hazards, do NOT
use any other power source.

NOTE:

The rating plate (serial number plate) is on the bottom of the unit.

CAUTION:

To prevent electric shock, do not open the cabinet. No user ser­viceable parts inside. Refer servicing to qualified service person­nel.

AVERTISSEMENT :
POUR EVITER LES RISQUES D’INCENDIE
OU D’ELECTROCUTION, NE PAS EXPOSER
L’APPAREIL A L’HUMIDITE OU A LA PLUIE.

Ce magnétoscope ne doit être utilisé que sur du cou­rant direct en 12V.
ATTENTION :
Afin d’eviter tout resque d’incendie ou d’électrocu­tion, ne pas utillser d’autres sources d’alimentation
électrique.

REMARQUE:

La plaque signalétique (plaque du numéro desérie) est située sur
le cadre inférieur de l’unité.

Due to design modifications, data given in this instruction book are
subject to possible change without prior notice.

The apparatus shall not be exposed to dripping or splashing and
that no objects filled with liquids, such as vases, shall be placed
close to the apparatus.

Worded - “CAUTION - Danger of explosion if battery is incorrectly
replaced. Replace only with the same or equivalent type.”

I

II

Safety Precautions (Cont’d)

FOR EUROPE

This equipment is in conformity with the provisions and protection
requirements of the corresponding European Directives.
This equipment is designed for professional video appliances and
can be used in the following environments:

z residential area (in houses)
z commercial and light industry; e.g. offices or theatres
z urban outdoors

In order to keep the best performance and furthermore for electro­magnetic compatibility we recommend to use cables not exceeding
the following length:

Camera

Port Cable Length

DC IN Exclusive Cable 2 m

VIDEO Coaxial Cable 3 m

Y, P

B, PR Coaxial Cable 3 m

AUDIO INPUT1,
INPUT2

AUDIO OUT CH1,
CH2

Phones1, 2 Exclu sive Cable 2 m

IEEE1394 (HDV/DV)

GENLOCK/AUX IN Coaxial Cab le 3 m

HD/SD-SDI Coaxial Cable 3 m

REMOTE Exclusive Cable 5 m

STUDIO Exclusive Cable 1 m

Caution: Where there are strong electromagnetic waves or mag­netism, for example near a radio or TV transmitter, transformer,
motor, etc., the picture and the sound may be disturbed. In such
case, please keep the apparatus away from the sources of the dis­turbance.

Dear Customer,

This apparatus is in conformance with the valid European direc­tives and standards regarding electromagnetic compatibility and
electrical safety.

European representative of Victor Company of Japan Limited is:
JVC Technology Centre Europe GmbH
P.O. Box 10 05 52
61145 Friedberg
Germany

Shielded Cable 3 m

Shielded Cable 3 m

Exclusive Cable 4.5 m

WARNING:
TO REDUCE THE RISK OF FIRE OR
ELECTRIC SHOCK, DO NOT EXPOSE THIS
APPLIANCE TO RAIN OR MOISTURE.

This unit should be used with 12V DC only.
CAUTION:
To prevent electric shocks and fire hazards, do NOT
use any other power source.

NOTE:

The rating plate (serial number plate) is on the bottom of the unit.

CAUTION:

To prevent electric shock, do not open the cabinet. No user ser­viceable parts inside. Refer servicing to qualified service person­nel.

Due to design modifications, data given in this instruction book are
subject to possible change without prior notice.

The apparatus shall not be exposed to dripping or splashing and
that no objects filled with liquids, such as vases, shall be placed
close to the apparatus.

Worded - “CAUTION - Danger of explosion if battery is incorrectly
replaced. Replace only with the same or equivalent type.”

Information for Users on Disposal of
Old Equipment

Attention:

This symbol is only valid in the European
Union.

[European Union]

This symbol indicates that the electrical and electronic equip­ment should not be disposed as general household waste at
its end-of-life. Instead, the product should be handed over to
the applicable collection point for the recycling of electrical
and electronic equipment for proper treatment, recovery and
recycling in accordance with your national legislation.

By disposing of this product correctly, you will help to con­serve natural resources and will help prevent potential nega­tive effects on the environment and human health which
could otherwise be caused by inappropriate waste handling
of this product. For more information about collection point
and recycling of this product, please contact your local
municipal office, your household waste disposal service or
the shop where you purchased the product.
Penalties may be applicable for incorrect disposal of this
waste, in accordance with national legislation.

(Business users)

If you wish to dispose of this product, please visit our web
page www.jvc-europe.com
take-back of the product.

[Other Countries outside the European Union]

If you wish to dispose of this product, please do so in accor­dance with applicable national legislation or other rules in
your country for the treatment of old electrical and electronic
equipment.

to obtain information about the

III

IV

Thank you for purchasing the JVC GY-HD250U/CHU and
GY-HD251E/CHE HD CAMERA RECORDER.
These instructions are for the GY-HD250U/CHU and GY­HD251E/CHE.

• A lens is included with the GY-HD250U and GY-HD251E.

• A lens is not included with the GY-HD250CHU and GY­HD251CHE.

Information applicable only to the GY-HD250U/CHU is
marked by “(U model only)”.
Information applicable only to the GY-HD251E/CHE is
marked by “(E model only)”.

This device is a HDV/DV video system format camera
recorder.
Videocassettes marked with the A symbol can be used.

The following phenomena may occur when tapes recorded
on other units (including another GY-HD250/GY-HD251)
are recorded or played back on GY-HD250/GY-HD251.

• The transient section between scenes recorded on other
units and those recorded on this device may appear dis­turbed.

• Digital noise may appear during playback due to track­ing errors.

• This device records and plays back in the SP mode.
Recording or playback in the LP mode is not possible.
(In DV format)

• Due to manufacturing dispersion of tapes, we recom­mend not to record pictures within the first 2 to 3 min­utes from the beginning of the tape.

• Before recording important scenes, be sure to perform a
test recording and confirm that both video and audio are
recorded correctly.

• Recorded video and audio contents are for private use.
Other use may infringe on the rights of copyright hold­ers.

• JVC cannot assume liabilities that may derive from the
impossibility of normal recording or playback of video or
audio due to malfunction of this device or the videocas­sette.

* All product names in this manual are trademarks or regis-

tered trademarks of their respective companies.
Marks such as ™, ® and © are not used in this manual.

/

ACCESSORIES

(Excluding the CHU/CHE

model)

Lens

X See pages 10 and 33

Core Filter

For Viewfinder Cable

X Seepage33

SD memory card

X Seepage34

X See pages 36, 64 and 67

Microphone

X See page 33

Clamp Filters ×4

For DC (×2)/Audio/

IEEE1394 Cable

Tripod base

(Provided only for U model)

X See page 35

MAIN FEATURES

• GY-HD250/GY-HD251 records in HDV format or DV format.
DV format can record and play back SD (Standard Defini­tion) video on Mini DV videocassettes.
HDV format can record and play back HD (High Definition)
video on Mini DV videocassettes.
There are two types of recording formats within HDV format.
HDV 720p (720 effective scan lines, progressive scan)
HDV 1080i (1080 effective scan lines, interlaced scan)

GY-HD250/GY-HD251 supports HDV 720p format. (HDV
720p)
HDV and are trademarks of Sony Corpo ration
and Victor Company of Japan, Limited.

• 24p mode shooting function
In HDV format, it records in 24p mode.
It uses a 2:3:2:3 pulldown when recording to tape and con­verts the images to 60 frames. Component output is con­verted to 60 frames during playback as well.
24p DV format video uses a 2:3:2:3 pulldown (24p Mode).
A 2:3:3:2 pulldown (24p Advanced Mode) is also supported.
It can shoot with the same number of frames as movie
film.

• Tapes recorded in the DVCAM format can only be played
back (simple playback).
Recording in the DVCAM format is not possible.
DVCAM is a registered trademark of Sony Corporation.

• 60 Hz/50 Hz HD or HDTV signals
Supports both 60 Hz/50 Hz HD or HDTV signals.
You can select this in a menu screen.

• Cross-convert video output
You can output converted video from the video output con­nectors. You can select this in a menu screen.

• Outputs composite, component, Y/C separate and RGB
signals as analog video in DV format. Outputs composite
and component signals in HDV format.

• Features HD/SD SDI output terminals
Outputs serial digital HD and SD signals.

• Focus assist function
Enables easy and accurate focusing during shooting.

• User buttons added
Enables you to switch camera settings instantly to suit the
shooting conditions.

• External video signal input enabled
Records composite video signals from an external source.

• GENLOCK input terminal
Input BB (Black Burst) or HD Tri-sync signals. SC phase
and HD/SD H phase adjustments can be performed.

• Time code reader/generator
The built-in time code reader/generator can be used to
record the time code and user’s bits.

• Time code input/output terminal and slave lock function
Slave lock to an external time code generator connected
to the time code input terminal.
The time code output terminal outputs built-in time code
generator data.

• Built-in large 3.5" color LCD display
In addition to displaying the camera image and the play­back image, the LCD monitor shows the status screens,
menu screens for settings, and alarm indications.

• Built-in monitor speaker for audio checking
The input audio can be monitored in recording or EE mode.
The playback sound can be monitored in the pl ayback
mode. The speaker also outputs an alarm tone in case an
abnormal condition occurs in this device.

• Recording check function for convenient recording review
function

• Camera section designed with 3-CCD system for high­quality picture
1/3" 3-CCD with 1,110,000 effective pixels employed. Dig­ital signal processing for reproduction of HDV/DV high­quality picture.

• Multi-Zone Auto Iris Detection Circuit
Multi-zone auto iris detection circuit ensures optimum iris
position even in back light conditions or when a bright sub­ject moves in a frame.

• Safety Zone indication in viewfinder

• Zebra pattern video level indication in viewfinder

• Full Auto Shooting (FAS) function
Eliminates the need for troublesome switch or filter opera­tions by automatically providing a wide range of compati­bility with shooting conditions that change as you move
between indoors and outdoors or between bright and dark
locations.

• ND filters for 1/4ND, 1/16ND provided

• IEEE1394 connector
IEEE1394 connector (6-pin) provided. Enables transfer of
digital data to other equipment provided with IEEE1394
connector, such as a non-linear editing system. (Power
cannot be supplied.)

• 1/3" bayonet type lens

• Built-in color bars (ARIB (multi-format color bars), SMPTE/
EBU type)

• Shutter speeds and menus can be selected using a dial,
making it very easy to use.

• Variable scan shutter
There is no flicker when shooting computer screens and
other non-NTSC/PAL format screens.

• Slow shutter
Makes it possible to brightly shoot video of dark subjects
with little motion by accumulating the images.

• Backup recording function
Continuous extended recording is possible by connecting
to HDV/DV devices.

• Connect to KA-HD250 Studio Kit and use as a studio cam­era.

2

3

CONTENTS

ACCESSORIES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2

MAIN FEATURES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3

INTRODUCTION

Precautions for Proper Use . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6

Routine and Periodical Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7

Precautions for Use of Head Cleaning Tape . . . . . . . . . . . . 7

Battery Pack to be Used . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8

Videocassette to be Used . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8

For recording and storing videotapes in the best condition

Condensation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9

Characteristic CCD Phenomena . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9

CONTROLS, INDICATORS AND
CONNECTORS

ZOOM Lens . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10

Front Section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11

Rear Section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12

LCD Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13

Right Side Section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14

Left Side Section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .16

Top Section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .18

Recording and Image Output Formats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20

Indications on the LCD Monitor and in the Viewfinder . . . . 22

Status Screens . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22

Status Screens in the Camera Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23

Status Screen in VTR MODE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28

Magnified Status Indications on the LCD Monitor. . . . . 29

Auto White Balance Indication (Camera mode only)

Menu Setting Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .30

Alarm Message Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .30

Safety Zone Indication (Camera mode only) . . . . . . . .30

Switching between the LCD Screen and

Viewfinder Display. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .31

PREPARATIONS

Basic System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .32

Attaching the Zoom Lens . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33

Attaching the Microphone (Provided) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33

How to Attach the Viewfinder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33

Inserting an SD Memory Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .34

Inserting an SD Memory Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34

Taking out the SD memory card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .34

About SD Memory Cards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34

Attaching the Tripod Base (Provided only for U model)

AC Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .36

. . . 8

. . . .30

. . . . . 35

Charging the Built-in Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .36

Battery Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .37

Attaching the Battery. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .37

Removing the Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .37

Precautions for the Battery Operation. . . . . . . . . . . . . .38

Remaining Battery Power Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .38

Operating Time with Battery Pack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .38

Precautions for the Battery Pack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .38

Recharging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .38

PREPARATIONS FOR OPERATION

Turning the Power ON . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .39

Turning the Power ON . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .39

Turning the Power OFF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .39

Loading/Unloading the Cassette . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .40

Cassette Loading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .40

Unloading the Cassette. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .40

Setting and Displaying the Date and Time . . . . . . . . . . . .41

Setting the Date and Time Style . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .41

Setting the Date and Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .42

Displaying the Time and Date on the Screen . . . . . . . .42

Displaying Time Code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .43

Displayed Time Code/User’s Bit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .43

Time code input entered the IEEE1394 connector . . . .43

Presetting and Recording of Time Code . . . . . . . . . . . . . .44

Setting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .44

Presetting time code data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .45

Presetting user’s bit data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .45

Zero-resetting the Time Code or User’s Bit Data . . . . . 45

Presetting the Time Code from the LCD Screen . . . . . . . .46

Recording Time Codes in Continuation of

Time Codes Recorded on Tape . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .47

Playing Back Time Code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47

Synchronizing with the Time Code of

the IEEE1394 (DV)-Connected Master Unit . . . . . .48

Synchronizing with an External Time Code Generator . . .49

Screen Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .50

Viewfinder Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .50

Back Focus Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .51

White Balance Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .52

White Balance Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .52

Full Auto White Balance (FAW) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .52

White Shading Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .53

SETTING AND ADJUSTMENTS BEFORE
SHOOTING

Setting the Video Format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .54

Setting the FRAME RATE Item. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .54

Camera Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .55

Screen Size (4:3/16:9) Mode Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .55

Audio Input Signal Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .56

Selecting the CH-2 channel input connector. . . . . . . . .56

Selecting the audio signal input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56

Adjusting Audio during Recording . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .56

Monitoring Audio during Recording . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .57

SHOOTING OPERATION

Basic Recording Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .58

If the Record-Standby Mode Continues . . . . . . . . . . . . 59

Checking Recorded Contents in Record-Standby Mode

(Recording Check Function) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .59

HEADER REC Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .60

PLAYBACK MODE

Playback Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62

Fast-Forward, Rewind . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .62

Search . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62

Outputting Audio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .63

USING EXTERNAL COMPONENTS

Connecting the Video Signal Cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .64

Connecting the IEEE1394 Cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .64

Recording Composite Video Signals from

an External Device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65

Using GENLOCK Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .66

Dubbing with AV Devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .67

HDV/DV Dubbing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68

Backup Recording . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .70

Connect a Remote Control Unit (RM-LP55/RM-LP57) . . . 71

MENU SCREENS

Menu Screen Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73

Setting Menu Screens . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .75

TOP MENU Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .76

VIDEO FORMAT[1/2] Menu Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77

VIDEO FORMAT[2/2] Menu Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79

CAMERA OPERATION Menu Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .80

CAMERA PROCESS[1/2] Menu Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81

CAMERA PROCESS[2/2] Menu Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82

ADVANCED PROCESS Menu Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .83

COLOR MATRIX ADJUST Menu Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84

SKIN COLOR ADJUST Menu Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84

WHITE BALANCE Menu Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85

SWITCH MODE Menu Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .86

AUDIO/MIC[1/2] Menu Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .87

AUDIO/MIC[2/2] Menu Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .88

LCD/VF[1/4] Menu Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89

LCD/VF[2/4] Menu Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90

LCD/VF[3/4] Menu Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91

LCD/VF[4/4] Menu Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92

TC/UB/CLOCK Menu Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93

HEADER REC Menu Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94

TIME/DATE Menu Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .95

OTHERS[1/2] Menu Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .96

OTHERS[2/2] Menu Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .97

GENLOCK Menu Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .99

FILE MANAGE Menu Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .100

Displaying the FILE MANAGE menu screen . . . . . . .100

Loading a menu settings file . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100

Saving settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .101

Resetting the menu settings to the factory settings

Initializing (formatting) an SD memory card . . . . . . . . 102

. . . .102

FEATURES OF THE CAMERA SECTION

How to Use Skin Detail . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .103

Outputting Color Bars . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .105

OTHERS

Warnings and Responses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .106

Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .110

How to Display the Hour Meter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .111

Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .112

EXTERNAL DIMENSIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .113

4

5

INTRODUCTION

Precautions for Proper
Use

• Supply voltage
Make sure that the power is between 11 V and 15 V DC. If
the power voltage is too low, abnormal color and
increased noise may occur.

• Allowable ambient temperature and humidity
Be sure to use this device within the allowable tempera­ture range of 0°C to 40°C and a relative humidity of 30% to
80%. Using this device at a temperature or humidity out­side the allowable ranges could result not only in malfunc­tion but the impact on the CCD elements could be serious
as small white spots may be generated.

• Strong electromagnetic waves or magnetism
Noise may appear in the picture or audio and/or the colors
may be incorrect if the camera is used near a radio or tele­vision transmitting antenna, in places where strong mag­netic fields are generated by transformers, motors, etc., or
near devices emitting radio waves, such as transceivers or
cellular phones.

• Use of wireless microphone near the camera
When a wireless microphone or wireless microphone
tuner is used near the camera during recording, the tuner
could pick up noise.

• Avoid using or placing this device in places;

• subject to extreme heat or cold;

• with excessive dirt or dust;

• with high humidity or moisture;

• subject to smoke or vapour such as near a cooking

stove;

• subject to strong vibrations or on an unstable surface;

• also do not leave this device for long hours in a parked

car under direct sunlight or near room heating equip­ment.

• Do not leave this device where it is subject to radiation or
X-rays or where corrosive gasses occur.

• Protect this device from being splashed with water (espe­cially when shooting in the rain).

• Protect this device from being wet when shooting on a
beach.
In addition, salt and sand may adhere to the camera body.
Be sure to clean the camera after use.

• Protect this device against penetration of dust when using
it in a place subject to sandy dust.

• Optical performance of lens
Due to the optical performance of the lens, color diver­gence phenomena (magnification chromatic aberration)
may occur at the periphery of the image.
This is not a camera malfunction.

• Noise may appear in the viewfinder when switching
between the playback picture and the EE picture.

• Use this device in an upright position.
If placed on its side, heat release efficiency will deterio­rate, adversely affecting the tape transport. Depending on
circumstances the tape may also be damaged.

• Vibrations
Colors may fail to appear and/or the image and sound
may be disturbed during VTR playback in locations sub­jected to strong vibrations.

• Precautions for transportation
Do not drop or hit this device against a hard object.

• Remove the videocassette before transporting this device.

• Do not insert an object other than a videocassette in the
cassette insertion slot. Be sure to close the cassette cover
when this device is not to be used for a long period.

• Do not set the POWER switch to OFF or remove the
power cable during recording or playback. Otherwise the
tape may be damaged.

• The sensitivity level of the provided microphone is set
lower than the reference input (–60 dBs) setting.

• When this device is not in use, be sure to set the POWER
switch to OFF in order to reduce power consumption.

• Cleaning the body: Wipe body with a dry, soft cloth. To
prevent deformation of the body, etc. and to avoid opera­tion hazards, do not allow volatile liquids such as benzine
and thinner to touch the body, and do not wipe it with a
cloth soaked in such a liquid. When it is extremely dirty,
soak the cloth in a solution of neutral detergent, wipe the
body with it, and then use a clean cloth to remove the
detergent.

• The camera may not show stable pictures in the period
immediately after the power is turned on, but this is not a
malfunction.

• A sound occurs when the built-in head cleaner that runs
when you load or eject a videocassette operates, but this
is not a malfunction.

• The LCD monitor and the viewfinder screen
The LCD monitor and the viewfinder screen are manufac­tured using high-precision technology. Black spots may
appear on the LCD monitor and the viewfinder screen, or
red, blue, green and/or white spots may not turn off. How­ever, this is not a malfunction and these spots are not
recorded on the tape.

• If you use this device continuously for a long period of
time, the characters displayed in the viewfinder may tem­porarily remain on the screen. This is not recorded on the
tape. In addition, they are no longer displayed if you turn
the power off and then on again.

• If you use this device in a cold location, the images may
appear to lag on the screen, but this is not a malfunction.
This is not recorded on the tape.

• Do not insert fingers or foreign objects into the cassette
insertion slot as this may result in personal injury or dam­age to the mechanism.

• To prevent damage to the connectors, use this device with
the connector covers on when you are not using the video/
audio signal output connectors.

CAUTION

• Do not point the lens or viewfinder directly at the sun or
other strong light source.

• Eye damage could result.

• If the lens or viewfinder is left pointed at the sun, rays

may collect inside this device and cause damage or a
fire.

• When carrying the camera, be sure to hold the carrying
handle. Holding the lens or viewfinder may result in
damage.

Routine and Periodical
Maintenance

The GY-HD250/GY-HD251 incorporates precision mechani­cal parts, which will collect dirt, wear out and deteriorate as
this device is used. After this device has been used for a long
period even in a normal environment, the heads, drums and
tape transport mechanisms also collect dirt. Especially, dust
which penetrates the inside of the VTR section during out­door use will promote the wear and deterioration of mechani­cal parts by causing poor contact between tape and heads or
failing to maintain the video and audio quality at high levels.
To prevent wear and deterioration, clean the mechanical
parts using a head cleaning tape as routine maintenance.
However, cleaning with a head cleaning tape alone is not
enough for cleaning the entire tape transport mechanism, so
it is also recommended to apply periodical maintenance
(inspection) to prevent the sudden occurrence of failure. As
the replacement, adjustment and servicing of parts require
advanced skill and equipment, please consult the person in
charge of professional video equipment at your nearest JVC­authorized service agent.

Head Cleaning

• To maintain beautiful pictures and sound, be sure to use a
head cleaning tape to clean the head periodically.
X See “Precautions for Use of Head Cleaning Tape”. If
head cleaning is not performed periodically, a type of
mosaic noise called block noise may appear in the picture
or sound may be interrupted.

• Please use cleaning tape produced by JVC. Do not use
head cleaning tapes other than specified.
X See “Precautions for Use of Head Cleaning Tape”
about how to use the head cleaning tape and precautions
for use of the head cleaning tape.

• When dust adheres to the heads, the warning message
“HEAD CLEANING REQUIRED!” is displayed on the LCD
monitor, and in the viewfinder during playback and record­ing check using the RET button on the lens section.

Periodical Maintenance

Contents : Check or re place the following mechanical parts

according to the running time.

Usage Time 500H 1000H 1500H 2000H

Drum assembly (includ­ing heads)

Tape guides, rollers GEEF
Belt gears HE E F
Drive parts HHE F

G: Clean, check and adjust.
E: Clean and check. Replace as required.
F: Replace.

Block Noise

GEEF

• The maintenance contents vary depending on the operat­ing environment and method. Therefore, the data in the
chart should be considered as a reference.

Time management
The accumulated running time of this device can be con­firmed with the hour meter display (which shows the accu­mulated drum and fan motor running time). X See “How to
Display the Hour Meter” on page 111.

For consultations related to the maintenance planning or
cost, please contact the person in charge of professional
video equipment at your nearest JVC-authorized service
agent.

Precautions for Use of
Head Cleaning Tape

Please use cleaning tape produced by JVC.
Adhere to the following precautions when using the head
cleaning tape.

1. Insert the cleaning tape.

Press the PLAY/STILL button after the cleaning tape is
fully loaded.
The tape runs for 10 seconds at a time in the PLAY
mode. (The tape stops automatically and then this device
enters the STOP mode.)

2. Do no t use the tape more than four times at the most for

each cleaning.

 Use the following chart as a guide for periodical head

cleaning.

Running

Operating envi­ronment

Yardstick for
use of cleaning
tape

Note 1) When used in a low humidity environment, head

Note 2) If an M-DV80 tape is used immediately after head

Note 3) Use the cleaning tape in the room temperature

Note 4) The cleaning tape case contains instructions for

Note 5) If the “HEAD CLEANING REQUIRED!” does not

Low
temperature

0°C to 10°C 10°C to 35°C 35°C to 40°C

1 to 2 times ev­ery 5 hours

cleaning should be conducted at intervals half of
those given in the chart above.

cleaning, the “HEAD CLEANING REQUIRED!”
indicator may remain on. In this case, let the tape
run as the indicator will turn off after the tape has
run for a while.

(10°C to 35°C).

use of the cleaning tape. However, some of these
instructions differ from the contents of this sheet.
When using the cleaning tape, please follow the
instructions of this sheet.

disappear after repeated head cleanings, the
recording tape may be abnormal. Avoid excessive
repeated use of the head cleaning tape.

Room
temperature

1 to 2 times ev­ery 20 to 30
hours

High
temperature

1 to 2 times ev­ery 5 hours

6

7

INTRODUCTION

Battery Pack to be Used

The GY-HD250/GY-HD251 can use any of the following bat­teries. (Factory setting)

U model: Anton Bauer battery
E model: IDX battery

Recommended batteries

U model: Dionic 90 (Anton Bauer)
E model: Endura-7 (IDX)

CAUTION

Use only the recommended batteries.
If a heavy battery is used, the battery may fall out depend­ing on the way the HD camera recorder is used.

Videocassette to be Used

• Use JVC’s videocassette tapes marked with the A

symbol.

• Mini DV videocassette : M-DV63HD

* Do not use M-DV80.

• Videocassettes cannot be used upside down.

• Avoid storing a videocassette with its tape not being com­pletely wound, as this may damage the tape. Rewind it to
the beginning before placing a cassette into storage.

• Store videocassettes in a place with little humidity and
good ventilation where mould does not form.

• After a videocassette tape has been used repeatedly, it
becomes unable to maintain full performance due to an
increase in noise caused by dropouts, etc. Do not continue
to use a dirty or damaged tape, as this will reduce the
rotary head life.

• Videocassette tapes with the A symbol are provided
with a switch on the back to prevent accidental erasure.

• Slide the switch to SAVE to protect the required recording
in the tape from being overwritten.

• To record on the tape, slide the switch to REC.

M-DV63PROHD

Switch

For recording and storing
videotapes in the best con­dition

Observe the following instructions for the best recording and
storage of videotapes.

• Take care of the conditions of handling videotapes. It is
recommended that you record and store videotapes in the
environment below.

Recording

Temperature 17°C to 2 5°C 15°C to 23°C 15°C to 19°C

Humidity 30% to 70% 40% to 55% 25% to 35%

Hourly tempera-

ture change

Hourly humidity

change

• Do not leave the videotapes neglected for a long period. If
videotapes are left wound for a long period of time, it may
result in distortion of the tape. Also it may cause tape-to­tape adhesion (known as blocking). It is recommended
that videotapes be unspooled and rewound once a year
for refreshing.

• When tapes are not in use, store them in cases and on
end. Storage cases protect videotapes from humidity, dust
and ultraviolet light. Keep tapes in cases and do not store
them lying flat. When housed in a horizontal position, pres­sure from other tapes can cause distortions and deforma­tions of the tape edges.

Less than

10°C

Less than

10%

Storage

Short period

(Up to 10

Long period

years)

(Over 10

years)

HH

HH

Condensation

• If this device has been cooled down in a cold place and is
then carried to a warm place, the moisture contained in
the warm air may adhere to the head drum or tape guides
and be cooled into water droplets. This phenomenon is
referred to as condensation (dew). When this occurs, the
head drum and tape guides are covered with droplets
allowing the tape to be stuck to them, leading to tape dam­age.

• Condensation occurs in the following cases:

• When this device is suddenly

moved from a cold place to a
warm place.

• When a room heater has just

started or when this device is
exposed directly to cold air from
an air conditioner.

• When this device is placed in a

very humid place.

Do not leave the videocassette inserted when moving the
camera under conditions where the temperature environ­ment changes.
After moving this device, do not use until the internal parts
have stabilized.

• “CONDENSATION ON DRUM” is displayed on the LCD
monitor and in the viewfinder when condensation occurs
in this device.

Keep the power on until the warning message disappears.

• Pay attention to condensation even before the condensa­tion indication appears.
As condensation forms gradually, the condensation indica­tion may not appear for the first 10-15 minutes after con­densation has formed inside.
In an extremely cold place, the condensation could freeze
and turn into frost. In such a case, it takes an additional 2­3 hours for the frost to first melt into condensation and
then to be dissolved.

• To prevent condensation
When moving this device from one place to another where
the temperatures are greatly deferent, first remove the vid­eocassette, place this device in a tightly sealed vinyl bag,
and then move it to a new environment.
To ensure no condensation occurs, allow the temperature
of this device in the bag to reach that of the new environ­ment before using it.

Head drum

Video tape

Characteristic CCD Phe­nomena

Smear and Blooming
Due to the physical structure of a CCD it is possible to induce
vertical streaking (called “smear”) when shooting an
extremely bright light source. Another effect is the expansion
of light around a bright light or object (called “blooming”).
The CCD employed in this device is characterized by induc­ing very little smear or blooming. Nevertheless, please take
note that smear or blooming may be induced when shooting
a bright light source.

Monitor screen

Moire or Aliasing
Shooting stripes or fine patterns may cause a jagged effect
or a banding in fine mesh patterns.

White dots
High temperatures can cause CCD sensor pixels to produce
the effect of white dots in the image. This condition is con­spicuous especially when gain is applied.
This is a characteristic of the charged-coupled device (CCD).
As far as possible, use this device under conditions where
the temperature of this device does not increase.

Smear
Vertical pale streaking appearing at high
luminous object

High luminous object
(Electric light, sunlight, etc.)

Blooming
Blurring in highlight

8

9

CONTROLS, INDICATORS AND CONNECTORS

ZOOM Lens

The zoom lens is not provided with the GY-HD250CHU or
the GY-HD251CHE.

Th16 × 5.5BRMU

3

4

0

1FOCUS ring

Manual focus ring.

2ZOOM lever/ring

This is the manual zoom ring equipped with a zoom lever.
To adjust the zoom manually, turn the zoom mode knob b
to position “M”.

3IRIS ring

Manual iris ring. To activate the auto iris feature, set the
Iris Mode switch 7 to “A”.

4[VTR] VTR trigger button

To start/stop shooting.

5[RET] Return video button

You can only monitor the return video signal from the VTR
from the viewfinder, LCD monitor and video signal connec­tor while this button is pressed.
When the camera control unit is connected, you can moni­tor the return video signal on the viewfinder while this but­ton is pressed. You cannot monitor from the LCD monitor
or video output terminal.
When you set the LENS RET item to “FOCUS ASSIST” in
the SWITCH MODE menu screen, you can use this button
as the FOCUS ASSIST button.
X Seepage86.

RET

5

2

WT

a

1

M
A

789

6

d

MACRO

c

b

6ZOOM servo control lever

To operate the servo zoom feature with this lever, set the
ZOOM knob b to “S”.

• Pressing the “W” section of this lever increases the
angle of the lens for a wider shooting angle.

• Pressing the “T” section of this lever narrows the lens
angle perspective for telephoto shots.

• Pushing harder changes the speed of the zoom.

7IRIS mode switch

A : Activates the auto iris feature.
M : Allows manual iris control.

8Momentary auto iris button

When the IRIS mode switch 7 is at “M”, pushing this but­ton activates the Auto Iris Function while it is held down
only.

9[S] IRIS speed adjusting control

For adjusting the iris operation speed.

MEMO

If the speed becomes too fast, hunting may occur. To avoid
the phenomena described above, perform adjustment
again.

0FILTER thread

Protect the lens with a clear filter or UV filter by screwing
the filter onto the thread inside the lens hood from the
front.
Other filters can be used for various effects.

aZOOM servo connector

Connect an optional zoom servo unit here.

b[ZOOM] ZOOM mode knob

S : Servo zoom mode. Allows o peration by the zoom

servo control lever 6.

M : Manual zoom mode. Allows zoom control b y the

zoom lever/ring 2.

cBACK FOCUS ring/fixing screw

For back focus adjustment only. Secure with the screw
knob after adjustment. X See “Back Focus Adjustment”
on page 51.

dMacro focusing ring (for close-up shooting)

By rotating this ring in the direction of the arrow, close-up
shooting of very small objects becomes possible.
Normal focus adjustment and zooming are not available in
the macro mode.
To shoot images in the macro mode, set the focus ring 1
to the infinite position (f) and the zoom ring 2 to the max­imum wide-angle position. To adjust the focus of the
macro image, rotate this ring in the direction of the arrow
until the object is focused.

CAUTION

• The back-focus knob is located close to the macro ring,
be careful not to mistake the back-focus knob for the
macro ring.

• After the required operation, be sure to return the macro
focusing ring to the normal position.

X See “Attaching the Zoom Lens” on page 33.
X See “Back Focus Adjustment” on page 51.

Front Section

1

32

4

8

5

1Shoe

Makes it possible to mount separately sold lights and
accessories.

2Knob

This is the mounting knob for the microphone holder 3.

3Microphone holder

Makes it possible to attach the provided microphone or a
separately sold microphone.
X See “Attaching the Microphone (Provided)”
on page 33.

4Front tally lamp

This lamp lights up when the GY-HD250/GY-HD251 enters
the record mode. It blinks during the transition to the
record mode.
When the tape has run out, or the VTR enters the warning
mode, it blinks quickly.

• Use the FRONT TALLY item on the OTHERS[1/2] menu
screen to select whether or not the lamp should light
and the lighting pattern.
X Seepage96.

5[LENS] Lens control connector

Connect 12-pin lens control cable from lens here.

Pin

Function

No.

1 Return switch 7 Iris position

2 VTR trigger 8 IRIS A/R INPUT

3 GND 9 EXTENDER position

4

Lens AUTO/MANU con­trol

5 IRIS control 11 –

6 +12V DC 12 –

7

6

Pin

Function

No.

10 ZOOM position

6[ZEBRA] Zebra switch

When this switch is ON, a zebra pattern is imposed on the
viewfinder or LCD areas having luminance levels in accor­dance with the menu settings made for the video signal.
This pattern can be used as a reference for manual adjust­ment of the lens iris. Zebra patterns are also displayed
during color bar display when this switch is set to ON.

• The default value is 70% - 80%. The luminance level
can be changed with the ZEBRA setting in the LCD/
VF[1/4] menu screen.
X See page 89.

While this switch is pressed to the SKIN AREA side, the
color tone areas specified with the SKIN COLOR ADJUST
item on the ADVANCED PROCESS menu are indicated in
the viewfinder. The switch returns to the OFF position
when released.
X See “How to Use Skin Detail” on page 103.
* The Skin Detail color tone areas are not indicated while

the color bar or VTR playback picture is shown in the
viewfinder or on the LCD monitor.

7[AWB] Auto white balance button

When the WHT.BAL switch c on page 15 is set to A or B
and you press this button, the white balance is automati­cally adjusted.
* It is not acti vated in preset, full auto shooting, full auto

white balance and color bar modes.
X See “White Balance Adjustment” on page 52.

8Lens mounting ring/Lens lock lever

Hold the lens and use the lever to turn the ring anticlock­wise to release lens.
To mount lens make sure the lens guide pin fits well, and
then turn the ring clockwise until firm.
X See “Attaching the Zoom Lens” on page 33.

10

11

CONTROLS, INDICATORS AND CONNECTORS

Rear Section

1

3

4

1Back tally lamp

This lamp lights up when the GY-HD250/GY-HD251 enters
the record mode. It blinks during the transition to the
record mode.
When the tape has run out, or the VTR enters the warning
mode, it blinks quickly.

• Use the BACK TALLY item on the OTHERS[1/2] menu
screen to select whether or not the lamp should light
and the lighting pattern.
X See page 96.

2[PHONES] Earphone jack

This is a stereo mini-jack for connecting an earphone for
audio monitoring. Plug in an earphone or headphone with
a 3.5 mm diameter plug. The earphone can also be used
to monitor alarm tones in accordance with the circum­stances.
The audio channel to be output is selected with the AUDIO
MONITOR item on the AUDIO/MIC[2/2] menu screen and
MONITOR SELECT switch d on page 19.
The audio output level is adjusted with the Audio monitor
volume control 3 on page 14.

MEMO

• The volume of the alarm sound is set with the ALARM
VR LEVEL item on the OTHERS[1/2] menu screen.

• When using a stereotype jack and stereo sound should
be output, the following setting should be performed.
Set the MONITOR SELECT switch d on page 19 to
BOTH.
Set the AUDIO MONITOR item on the AUDIO/MIC[2/2]
menu screen to STEREO.

2

3Shoulder belt hooks

Allows you to attach a separately sold shoulder belt.

4LCD monitor

Shows a color camera image or the VTR playback picture.
It is also used for displaying the following:

• Menu Setting screens

• Characters showing the whether the GY-HD250/GY­HD251 is set to shooting mode or VTR playback mode

• Date and time and time code

• Audio level meter

• Warning indications, etc.

X Seepage22.

LCD Door

LCD BRIGHT

1

2

1[LCD BRIGHT +/–] LCD brightness +/– button

This button is for adjusting the brightness of the LCD mon­itor display.

• Pushing the button in the + direction makes the monitor
brighter.

• Pushing the button in the – direction makes the monitor
darker.

• Pushing the +/– buttons simultaneously returns the set­ting to the standard setting.

2[CH-1/CH-2 AUDIO SELECT] CH-1/CH-2 audio selector

switch

Selects the method of adjusting the CH-1 and CH-2 audio
channel audio levels.

AUTO : The audio level is automatically adjusted

MANU : Allows you to adjust the audio levels using

3[TC DISPLAY] TC/UB display switch

Selects the contents displayed on the TC counter of the
LCD monitor or in the viewfinder. (This switch works when
the TC/UB item on the LCD/VF[3/4] menu screen is set to
ON.)

TC : Set to this position to display time code values.
UB : Set to this position to display the user ’s bits values.

-

AUDIO SELECT

CH-1

according to the input level. When excessive
audio is input, the limiter works to suppress
the audio level.
The “AUTO” LED in the CH-1/CH-2 AUDIO
LEVEL area f on page 15 lights.

the CH-1/CH-2 AUDIO LEVEL volume con­trols f on page 15.
Set AUDIO LIMITER on the AUDIO/MIC[1/2]
menu screen to use limiter functions when
excessive audio is input.
X See “AUDIO LIMITER” on page 87.

CAM/VTR

+

TC

GENE.

CH-2

DISPLAY

FREE

TC

AUTO
MANU

REC

UB

REGEN

4

3

5

4[TC GENE.] Time code generator setting switch

Switch for setting the time code generator to preset mode
or regeneration mode. It is also used to select the time
code run mode when the preset mode is selected.

FREE : The preset mode is selected, and the time

REC : The preset mode is selected, and the time

REGEN : Regeneration mode, in which this device

code run mode becomes the FREE run
mode.
Set to this position to record with the time
code or user’s bits set anew (preset). In this
setting, the time code always operates in the
run mode.
* If this setting is used when recording

scenes one after another, the time codes
become discontinuous at the transition
points between scenes.

code run mode becomes the REC run mode.
Set to this position to record with the time
code or user’s bits set anew (preset). The
time code operates in the run mode during
recording only. If this setting is used when
recording scenes one after another, the time
codes are recorded as continuous time
codes.

reads existing time codes on the tape and
records time codes in continuation of the
existing ones. Set to this position when you
want to add additional time codes to time
codes already recorded on the tape.

MEMO

• This switch is enabled when TCG SOURCE on the TC/
UB/CLOCK menu screen is set to INTERNAL.

• Preset of time code and user’s bits is performed on the
TC/UB/CLOCK menu.

X See page 44.
X See “TC/UB/CLOCK Menu Screen” on page 93.

5[CAM/VTR] Camera/VTR mode switch button

Each time you press this button, the mode switches
between camera mode and VTR mode.
When you do this, the VTR indicator f on page 19 dis­plays the following statuses.
While the mode is being switched : Flashing
In VTR mode : Lit
In camera mode : Off

• Select the Camera mode to record the camera image.

• Select the VTR mode to playback VTR or to input the

HDV/DV signal from the IEEE1394 connector 0 on
page 16.

• When the power is turned on, the mode becomes the
Camera mode.

12

13

CONTROLS, INDICATORS AND CONNECTORS

Right Side Section

1

2

4

5

MENU

STATUS

WHT.BAL

AUTO

CH-1 CH-2

ON

OFF

POWER

d

3

VF BRIGHT

USER 3USER 2USER 1

AUTO
AUDIO
LEVEL

REC

efg

h

i

7

1Monitoring speaker (Cheek pad)

• In the Camera mode, the input sound can be EE moni­tored.
In the VTR mode, the speaker outputs the VTR play­back sound. In the VTR mode, the HDV/DV input sound
can be EE monitored.
The sound to be output is selected with the MONITOR
SELECT switch d on page 19.

• The sound level is adjusted with the MONITOR sound
level volume 3. This speaker also outputs various
warning sounds superimposed on other sound.

X See “Alarm Sound” on page 109.

2Cheek pad set screw

Screw for adjusting the height of the cheek pad.

3[MONITOR] Audio monitor volume control

Adjusts the volume of the monitoring loudspeaker and ear­phone.

4[VF BRIGHT] Viewfinder brightness adjustment

To adjust the brightness of the viewfinder.
X See page 50.

5[PEAKING] Contour adjustment

To adjust the contours of the LCD monitor and viewfinder
image.
* W hen the Focus Assist function is running, this control

does not operate.

X See page 50.

6[FOCUS ASSIST] Focus assist button

When you press this button during shooting, the area of
focus is displayed in blue, red or green, making it easy to
focus accurately.

6

8

9

ND FILTER

2

1

0

a

b

c

MEMO

• When FOCUS ASSIST on the LCD/VF[1/4] me nu screen is
set to ACCU-FOCUS and this button is pressed, ACCU
FOCUS functions with FOCUS ASSIST. This makes depth of
field shallower, making it easier to focus.

• This button has the same function a s the FOCUS
ASSIST button 7 in the Top Section.

X See “LCD/VF[1/4] Menu Screen” on page 89.

7Clamp

Attach the cable from the viewfinder here.

8[USER1/2/3] User buttons

You can assign camera functions to the USER1 - 3 but­tons.
Use them to switch shooting conditions depending upon
the subject.
Set them using the USER1 - 3 items in the SWITCH
MODE menu screen.
X Seepage86.
Use this button to preset the time code.
X Seepage46.

MEMO

• The USER buttons work together with the menu settings.

• When a menu screen is being displayed, they also func-

tion as menu operation buttons. X See “Setting Menu
Screens” on page 75.

9[SHUTTER] Shutter/Menu dial

• Every time this dial is pressed while in the normal
screen mode (when the menu screen is not displayed),
the shutter speed switches between on/off.

• When this dial is turned 1 click up or down in the normal
screen mode, the shutter speed indicator is shown for
about 3 seconds on the LCD monitor or in the view­finder. The shutter speed is changed when this dial is
turned while the shutter speed indicator is shown.
X See page 86.

• When this dial turned upward or downward while the
menu screen is displayed, the cursor (K) also moves
upward or downward to allow selection of items in the
menu. To change the setting value of the item, press
this dial. When the setting value starts blinking, turn this
dial upward or downward to change the setting.
X See “Setting Menu Screens” on page 75.

0[ND FILTER] ND filter switch

Switches the built-in ND filter.
OFF : Turns the filter OFF (FILTER OFF)

1:

Cuts the light intensity to approximately 1/4. (1/4ND)

2:

Cuts the light intensity to approximately 1/16. (1/16ND)
When you change this switch, the type of the new ND filter
is displayed in the LCD monitor or viewfinder.

CAUTION

If you switch the ND filter while shooting is in progress, the
picture may be disturbed or noise may occur in the audio.
X See “Camera Settings” on page 55.

a[STATUS] Status/Menu button

• Pressing this button in the normal screen mode (condi­tion in which the menu screen is not shown) displays a
status screen in the viewfinder or on the LCD monitor.
The displayed status screen changes each time the but­ton is pressed.
X See “Status Screens” on page 22.

• Pressing this button for more than 1 second in the nor­mal screen mode displays the menu screen in the view­finder or on the LCD monitor. Pressing this button while
the menu screen is displayed in the viewfinder or on the
LCD monitor makes the menu screen disappear.
X See “Setting Menu Screens” on page 75.

b[GAIN] Sensitivity selector switch

Electronically boosts the light sensitivity when there is
insufficient illumination on the subject.
The boosting level differs depending on the switch position
as follows:
(Factory presets)
L : 0 dB (no boosting is applied)
M : 9 dB (boosted to approximately 3 times the original)
H : 18 dB (boosted to approximately 8 times the original)

• The boosting level for each switch position can be
changed with the SWITCH MODE menu screen.
X See page 86.
The more the boosting level is increased, the more the
resulting image will be noisy.

• When the FULL AUTO switch g on page 19 is “ON”,
this is fixed at “ALC”.

c[WHT.BAL] White balance switch

Three white balance modes are selectable with this
switch.

B : Switch into white balance mode memorized

A : Switch into white balance mode memorized

PRST
(PRESET)

FAW (Full Auto White Balance) mode can be set to A, B or
PRESET with the SWITCH MODE menu screen.
X See page 86.
In the FAW mode, video color temperatures are constantly
sampled for automatic adjustment to a proper white bal­ance.

• When the FULL AUTO switch g on page 19 is “ON”,

in B. If white balance is performed with the
switch in this position, it will be memorized
into B.

in A. If white balance is performed with the
switch in this position, it will be memorized
into A.

: Switch into white balance mode (3200K or

5600K) set in PRESET TEMP. item on the
CAMERA OPERATION menu screen.
X Seepage80.

this is fixed at “FAW”.

MEMO

Fine-tune red and blue to match the white adjusted in auto
white balance in WHITE PAINT<R>/<B> on the WHITE
BALANCE menu screen. (Available only when this switch is
set to A or B.)
X See “WHITE BALANCE Menu Screen” on page 85.

d[POWER] Power ON/OFF switch

Switch that turns the power ON/OFF.
When the power is OFF, “POFF” is displayed in the LCD
monitor or viewfinder.
* Wait at least 5 seconds if you need to turn the power on

again.

e[REC] REC trigger button (start/stop recording)

Start and stop recording using this button.
(This works together with the REC trigger button on the
top and the lens VTR trigger button.)
When “SPLIT” is set for the 1394 REC TRIGGER item on
the OTHERS[2/2] menu screen, this button becomes the
start/stop recording button for an external device.

X See page 97.
X See “Backup Recording” on page 70.

f[CH-1/CH-2 AUDIO LEVEL] CH-1/CH-2 Audio level con-

trols and AUTO LED

Allow you to adjust the audio level for the CH-1 and CH-2
audio channels.

• To use these controls, set the CH-1/CH-2 AUDIO

SELECT switch 2 on page 13 to “MANU”.

• When the FULL AUTO switch g on page 19 or the CH­1/CH-2 AUDIO SELECT switch 2 on page 13 is set to
“AUTO”, “AUTO” LED lights. (The audio level controls
do not work.)

g[HDV/DV LED]

• In camera mode, this lights according to the setting for
the video format being shot.

• In VTR mode, it lights according to the video format
being recorded on tape or the IEEE1394 input video for­mat.

HDV : Lights when the format is HDV.
DV : Lights when the format is DV.
HDV/DV : Turns off when the format is 1080i.

MEMO

• During a system error, HDV/DV flash alternately.

X See page 108.

• Select whether or not to have this light in the FORMAT
LED item on the OTHERS[1/2] menu screen.
X See page 96.

hLCD door lock and release knob

To open the LCD door, move this knob on the direction
toward the rear section.

iLCD door

LCD monitor door.
The LCD monitor is located on the inner side of the door.
The LCD monitor can be viewed when this door is opened.
The door can be turned to change the orientation of the
LCD monitor, and it can be rotated so that it can be
accommodated in the main body of the camera.
X See page 50.

14

15

CONTROLS, INDICATORS AND CONNECTORS

Left Side Section

98 7

1

CH2-AUDIO OUT-CH1 VIDEO

IEEE 1394

0

1Viewfinder connector (6-pin)

Connect the cable from the viewfinder here.

• Set the image format for this terminal in VF SIGNAL on

the LCD/VF[4/4] menu screen. X Seepage92.

2[CH-2 INPUT] CH-2 audio input connector selector

switch

Selects the CH-2 audio input connector.
INPUT1 : Inputs the audio from the INPUT1 connector

INPUT2 : Inputs the audio from the INPUT2 connector

4 into CH-2.

4 into CH-2.

MEMO

The audio from the INPUT1 connector is also input into
CH-1 regardless of the setting.

3[AUDIO INPUT] Audio input signal selector switch

This switch is used to select the input sound signal from
INPUT1 or INPUT2 connector.

LINE : Set to this position when connected to audio

MIC : Set to this position when the dynamic micro-

MIC+48V : Set to this position when a microphone

equipment, etc. The reference input level is
+4 dBs.

phone is connected.

requiring +48 V power supply (phantom
microphone, etc.) is connected.

CAUTION

When connecting a component that does not require +48 V
power supply, make sure that the switch is not set to
MIC+48V before the component is connected.

MEMO

You can select the normal input level for MIC and MIC+48V
in the INPUT1, 2 MIC REF. item on the AUDIO/MIC[1/2]
menu screen.
X See page 87.

2

3

456

4[INPUT1/INPUT2] INPUT1/INPUT2 audio input connec-

tors

These are audio input connectors for connecting to an
external audio device or microphone.

• Set the [AUDIO INPUT] switch 3 according to the

device to be connected.

• Set the CH-2 audio input connector using the [CH-2

INPUT] switch 2.
The CH-2 audio from the set connector is recorded.

5Shoulder pad slide button

Button to adjust the position of the shoulder pad.
When you press this button, you can move the position of
the shoulder pad 6 forward or backward.

6Shoulder pad
7Cassette cover

Sliding the EJECT switch a on page 18 located on the
top section opens this cover to allow insertion or removal
of the videocassette.

CAUTION

To prevent foreign objects from entering the internal parts of
the VTR unit, do not leave this device with the cover open
for extended periods of time.

8[VIDEO OUT] Video output terminal (RCA)

This is a terminal for composite video signal output.

• Select whether or not to output a signal with setup in
SET UP on the VIDEO FORMAT[2/2] menu screen.
(Only for U model)

9[AUDIO OUTPUT CH-1/CH-2] Audio output connector

(RCA)

Output connector for audio signals.

• Outputs the input audio signal in the Camera mode.

• Outputs the playback audio signal in the VTR mode.

• When a HDV/DV signal (IEEE1394) is input, the EE
sound of the input audio signal is output in the VTR
mode.

MEMO

Alarm sound is not output.

0[IEEE1394] IEEE1394 connector (6-pin)

Using an IEEE1394 cable (optional), a digital video com­ponent with IEEE1394 connector can be connected here.

X See “Connecting the IEEE1394 Cable” on page 64.
X See “HDV/DV Dubbing” on page 68.

CAUTION

When connecting the IEEE1394 cable, confirm that the
connector is facing the right direction before inserting.
X See page 64.

MEMO

Put the covers on the connectors when you are not using
them.

cde

g

h

f

a[STUDIO] Studio terminal (Round 10-pin)

Connect the studio cable from the KA-HD250 Studio Kit
(sold separately). Connect the KA-HD250 to use this
device as a studio camera.
For details, refer to the KA-HD250 INSTRUCTION MAN­UAL.

b[DC INPUT] DC input terminal (XLR 4-pin)

This is the 12V DC power input terminal. Connect to the
AC adapter.
When a battery is installed and a cable is connected to this
terminal, power supply from the battery stops and power is
supplied by this terminal.

c[GENLOCK/AUX IN] GENLOCK/AUX IN switch

Set according to the signal input in the [GENLOCK/AUX
IN] terminal.
GENLOCK : Set to this when inputting external synchroni-

AUX IN : Set to this when inputting composite video

b

zation signals.

signals from an external device.

CH2-AUDIO OUT-CH1 VIDEO

IEEE 1394

i

j

k

a

MEMO

If no signals are input to the [AUX IN] terminal and this
switch is set to AUX IN, the monitor turns black and video is
not output from any terminal.

d[PBPR/TC] PBPR/Time code switch

Set according to the [P
signals.

BPR : Set to this when outputting component PB signals

P

from the [P
ponent P

TC : Set to this when inputting LTC time code from the

[P

B/TC IN] terminal and outputting the built-in time

code generator from the [P

B/TC IN] and [PR/TC OUT] terminal

B/TC IN] terminal and outputting com-

R signals from the [PR/TC OUT] terminal.

R/TC OUT] terminal.

MEMO

When this switch is set to TC, video is not output from the
Y/P

B/PR terminal (ijk).

e[IEEE1394] IEEE1394 switch

Set according to the image format of the input/output sig­nal and playback signal of the IEEE1394 terminal.
HDV : Set to this for HDV format.
DV : Set to this for DV format.

f[REMOTE] REMOTE terminal (Round 6-pin)

Some functions of this camera can be controlled exter­nally.
Connect to a remote control unit (RM-LP55/RM-LP57).
X See “Connect a Remote Control Unit (RM-LP55/RM­LP57)” on page 71.

g[GENLOCK/AUX IN] GENLOCK/AUX IN terminal (BNC)

• Input synchronization signals in this terminal when
externally synchronizing camera images or playback
images.
Synchronization signal: BB (Black Burst) signal of SD

• Input composite video signals to record images from an
external device with this device.

• Select the signal to input with the [GENLOCK/AUX IN]
switch c.

X See “Using GENLOCK Functions” on page 66.
X See “Recording Composite Video Signals from an

External Device” on page 65.

h[HD/SD-SDI] HD/SD-SDI output terminal (BNC)

Outputs HD/SD-SDI (Serial Digital Interface) signals. Out­puts embedded audio signals as digital audio.
The sampling frequency for embedded audio is 48 kHz.
In addition, the time code for the built-in time code genera­tor and playback time code are output.
X See pages 20 and 21 for the signals that are enabled.

or Tri sync signal of HD

MEMO

Set whether or not to output SDI signals from this terminal
in HD/SD-SDI OUT of the VIDEO FORMAT[2/2] menu
screen.

i[Y] Component Y signal output terminal (BNC)

Outputs Y signal of component when the [P
d is set to P

j[P

input terminal (BNC)

• Outputs P

• Inputs time code when the [P

BPR.

B/TC IN] Component PB signal output/time code

B signal of component when the [PBPR/TC]

switch d is set to P

TC. Enter the LTC time code to slave lock this device’s
time code generator with an external time code genera­tor.

BPR.

BPR/TC] switch

BPR/TC] switch d is set to

MEMO

Set TCG SOURCE on the TC/UB/CLOCK Menu screen to
EXTERNAL to input external time codes.
X See “Synchronizing with an External Time Code Gener­ator” on page 49.

k[PB/TC OUT] Component PB signal output/time code

output terminal (BNC)

• Outputs P

• Outputs the LTC time code of the built-in time code gen-

R signal of component when the [PBPR/TC]

switch d is set to P

erator when the [P

BPR.

BPR/TC] switch d is set to TC.

MEMO

Set the [Y/P

B/PR] terminal (ijk) output image signal to

RGB or Y/C video signals in OUTPUT TERM. [DV] on the
VIDEO FORMAT[2/2] menu screen. (Only for DV format)
X See “OUTPUT TERM. [DV]” on page 79.

16

17

CONTROLS, INDICATORS AND CONNECTORS

Top Section

5

4
3

2

1

d
e

f
g

h

i

j

k

1Viewfinder

Displays the camera image and the playback picture.

MEMO

Set the image format for the viewfinder to RGB, compo­nent, composite, or Y signal in VF SIGNAL on the LCD/
VF[4/4] menu screen. X See page 92.

2Eyepiece

Ensures that ambient light does not reach the viewfinder
screen or falls into the eye of the cameraman.

3Eyepiece focus ring

You can adjust the focus by turning this ring.

4Eyepiece mounting ring

You can adjust the position of the eyepiece forward or
backward by loosening this ring.

5Slide mounting ring

You can adjust the position of the viewfinder left or right by
loosening this ring.

6Clamp

Attach the microphone cable here.

7[FOCUS ASSIST] Focus assist button

When you press this button during shooting, the area of
focus is displayed in blue, red or green, making it easy to
focus accurately.

6

7

8

9

0

l

a

b

c

MEMO

• When FOCUS ASSIST on the LCD/VF[1/4] menu screen
is set to ACCU-FOCUS and this button is pressed,
ACCU FOCUS functions with FOCUS ASSIST. This
makes depth of field shallower, making it easier to focus.

• This button has the same function as the FOCUS
ASSIST button 6 in the Right Side Section.

X See “LCD/VF[1/4] Menu Screen” on page 89.

8[REC] REC trigger button (start/stop recording)

Start and stop recording using this button.
(This works together with the REC trigger button on the
right panel and the lens VTR trigger button.)

9[REC LOCK] REC LOCK switch

Slide this switch in the direction of the arrow to lock the
[REC] trigger button 8. Use this to prevent unwanted
recording.
(The REC trigger button on the right panel and the lens
VTR trigger button are not locked.)

0SD memory card cover

When you open this cover, you can insert and remove the
SD memory card.
X See “Inserting an SD Memory Card” on page 34.
When an SD memory card is loaded

• You can save, call up and reset the menu settings on
GY-HD250/GY-HD251.

• You can initialize (format) an SD memory card.

X See “FILE MANAGE Menu Screen” on page 100.

a[EJECT] Eject switch and LED

Slide this switch to the side to insert or eject a videocas­sette tape.
The LED lights while ejecting is in progress.

MEMO

• It takes a few seconds before the vi deocassette is
ejected. Do not close the cassette cover during the eject
operation.

• Do not touch the cassette insertion slot or cassette dur­ing the eject operation. This could result in damage.

bOperation cover

Open this cover when operating in the playback mode.
Otherwise, keep this cover closed.
This cover can be opened by sliding it to the side.

MEMO

When the STOP button h is pressed in the Camera mode
to set the VTR operation mode indicator to indicate STOP,
playback operations become possible.

cBattery adapter

Attach the battery.
U model: Anton Bauer battery
E model: IDX battery
X See “Battery Operation” on page 37.

d[MONITOR SELECT] Audio monitor selector switch

This switch is used to select the monitor sound output and
playback sound output from the monitoring speaker 1 on
page 14 or the PHONES jack 2 on page 12.

CH-1 : The CH-1 channel audio is output.
BOTH : CH-1 and CH-2 channel audio are output mixed.

When this setting is selected, the menu screen
can be used to select whether the mixed sound
or stereo sound should be output via the
PHONES jack. (AUDIO MONITOR item on the
AUDIO/MIC[2/2] menu screen)
When AUDIO MONITOR item on the AUDIO/
MIC[2/2] menu screen is set to “STEREO”, only
the audio of CH-1 is output from the monitoring
speaker.

CH-2 : The CH-2 channel audio is output.

X See “Outputting Audio” on page 63.
X See “AUDIO/MIC[2/2] Menu Screen” on page 88.

CAUTION

Make sure to move switches all the way. Do not leave a
switch stopped in a midway position. Noise will be gener­ated and operation irregularities will occur.

e[DISPLAY] Display button

• When LCD+VF in the LCD/VF[4/4] menu display is set
to OFF, press the DISPLAY button for 2 seconds to
switch between the LCD screen and the viewfinder
screen.

• When LCD+VF in the LCD/VF[4/4] menu display is set
to ON, press the DISPLAY button for 2 seconds to
switch the LCD screen ON and OFF. Press the DIS­PLAY button briefly to change the display mode for the
LCD screen as follows.

Only image displayed

Characters shown enlarged

Image and characters displayed

X See “Magnified Status Indications on the LCD Monitor”
on page 29.

f[VTR] VTR indicator

This indicator lights when the camera is in the VTR mode.
To perform VTR playback or to input the HDV/DV signal
from the IEEE1394 connector 0 on page 16, press the
CAM/VTR button 5 on page 13 to turn on this indicator.
It flashes when the mode is being changed.

g[FULL AUTO] Full auto shooting (FAS) switch

This is the ON/OFF switch for FAS mode.

• During FAS mode, “FAS” is displayed on the LCD moni­tor or the viewfinder.

• FAS mode works together with the auto iris and auto
level control (ALC) modes and automatically adjusts to
the optimal video signal level and white balance.

• You can select automatic adjustment mode or manual
adjustment mode for audio recording level.
X See “AUDIO/MIC[2/2] Menu Screen” on page 88.

• Even if there are color bars, this automatically sets to
camera video.

• Auto iris mode operates even if the lens iris mode
switch is set to the manual position.

• The gain changes continuously until it reaches the max­imum ALC MAX setting, and the shutter speed also
changes continuously.

• When you release FAS mode, all of the settings return
to their previous modes.

CAUTION

When the power is turned on while the camera is in the
FAS mode, it takes about 10 seconds before the automatic
adjustment of FAS is completed.
All of the previous setting contents are recalled when the
FAS mode is cancelled.

h[STOP] Stop button

Press to enter the stop mode.

i[REW] Rewind button

Press this button to rewind the tape.

• Pressing this button in the stop or fast forward mode ini­tiates the rewind mode. (Only for VTR mode)

• Pressing this button during playback, still picture play­back or forward search initiates reverse search.

j[PLAY/STILL] Play/still button

Press to start playback. Press to enter the still picture
mode during playback, in the stop mode or in the search
mode.
Depending on the ambient temperature, if still image play­back mode continues for between 30 seconds and 3 min­utes, it stops automatically. (Tape protect mode)
During still picture playback and search mode, press this
button to return to the normal playback mode.
* If the a uto tracking is active at the moment the play

mode is entered, the playback video will be interfered
with digital noise.

k[FF] Fast forward button

Press this button to fast forward the tape.

• Pressing this button in the stop or rewind mode initiates
the fast forward mode. (Only for VTR mode)

• Pressing this button during playback, still picture play­back or reverse search initiates forward search.

lScrew holes for mounting accessories

You can mount lights and other accessories.

18

19

CONTROLS, INDICATORS AND CONNECTORS

Recording and Image Out­put Formats

This device supports HDV and DV image formats, as well as images input from external devices. This device also has various
output terminals. (Composite, analog component, HD/SD-SDI, IEEE1394)
Select analog component, RGB or Y/C signals for images from the Y/P
(Select in OUTPUT TERM. [DV] on the VIDEO FORMAT[2/2] menu screen)
During recording and playback, image formats from each of the output terminals are as shown in the table below.

Notes about the table

(Shaded): Indicates the setting item in the VIDEO FORMAT menu screen.

N/A: Terminal is not available.
q : Same format as the left.

 When recording camera images

Recording (Shooting)

[REC] menu item Format

HDV-HD60P

HD

(HDV)

HDV-HD30P

HDV-HD50P

HDV-HD25P

HDV-HD24P

U model only

DV

E model only

[1080I CAMERA]

HD

menu item

ON

DV-60I

DV-24P

DV-24PA

DV-50I

DV-25P

720/60p qq q N/A N/A 480/60i

720/30p qq 720/60p N/A N/A 480/60i

720/50p qq q N/A N/A 576/50i

720/25p qq 720/50p N/A N/A 576/50i

720/24p qq 720/60p N/A N/A 480/60i

480/60i qq q qq q

480/60i(24p) qq q qq q

480/60i(24p) qq q qq q

576/50i qq q qq q

576/50i(25p) qq q qq q

Frame rate

Rec on

Tape

Rec on

60/30 N/A N/A 1080/60i N/A N/A 480/60i

50/25 N/A N/A 1080/50i N/A N/A 576/50i

Tape

 In PLAY mode

IEEE

Playback

720/60p qq q1080/60i 480/60i N/A 480/60i
720/30p q 720/60p q 1080/60i 480/60i N/A 480/60i
720/50p qq q1080/50i N/A 576/50i 576/50i
720/25p q 720/50p q 1080/50i N/A 576/50i 576/50i

HDV

720/24p q 720/60p q 1080/60i 480/60i N/A 480/60i

480/60p N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A

576/50p N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A

U model

DV

E model

*1

When HDV PB OUTPUT is set to NTSC, 480/60i format video signal is output.

*2

When HDV PB OUTPUT is set to PAL, 576/50i format video signal is output.

1394

Out

NATIVE 720P 1080I NTSC PAL

480/60i qq qqq

480/

qq qqq

60i(24p)

576/50i qq qqq

576/

qq qqq

50i(25p)

Component / SDI Out

[HDV PB OUTPUT] menu item

MEMO

Synchronize the setting for FRAME RATE in the VIDEO FORMAT menu screen with the frame rate of the playback signal.

B/PR terminal in DV format.

IEEE

Component / SDI Out

1394 Out

IEEE

1394 Out

(EE Out)

Component / SDI Out RGB Out Y/C Out

RGB Out Y/C Out

RGB Out Y/C Out

*1

480/60i*1480/60i

*1

480/60i*1480/60i

*2

576/50i*2576/50i

*2

576/50i*2576/50i

*1

480/60i*1480/60i

Composite

Out

Composite

Out

Composite

Out

 When Recording HDV or DV Images from the IEEE1394 Terminal

Recording

(IEEE1394 In)

720/60p qq q1080/60i 480/60i N/A 480/60i
720/30p q 720/60p q 1080/60i 48 0/60i N/A 480/60i
720/50p qq q1080/50i N/A 576/50i 576/50i
720/25p q 720/50p q 1080/50i N/A 576/50i 576/50i

HDV

720/24p q 720/60p q 1080/60i 48 0/60i N/A 480/60i

480/60p N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A

576/50p N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A

U model

DV

E model

*1

When HDV PB OUTPUT is set to NTSC, 480/60i format video signal is output.

*2

When HDV PB OUTPUT is set to PAL, 576/50i format video signal is output.

Rec on

Tape

NATIVE 720P 1080I NTSC PAL

480/60i qq qqq

480/

qq qqq

60i(24p)
576/50i qq qqq

576/

qq qqq

50i(25p)

Component / SDI Out

[HDV PB OUTPUT] menu item

RGB Out Y/C Out

*1

480/60i*1480/60i

*1

480/60i*1480/60i

*2

576/50i*2576/50i

*2

576/50i*2576/50i

*1

480/60i*1480/60i

Composite

Out

MEMO

Synchronize the setting for FRAME RATE on the VIDEO FORMAT menu screen with the frame rate of the IEEE1394 input signal.

 When Recording Composite Images from the AUX IN Terminal

Rec on

IEEE

Recording (Composite In)

HD

U model 480/60i qqqqqq

SD

E model 576/50i qqqqqq

Tape

1394 Out

Component/SDI Out (EE Out) RGB Out Y/C Out

Compos-

ite Out

MEMO

• For the U model, set REC on the VIDEO FORMAT[1/2] menu screen to DV-60I.

• For the E model, set REC on the VIDEO FORMAT[1/2] menu screen to DV-50I.

20

21

CONTROLS, INDICATORS AND CONNECTORS

Indications on the LCD
Monitor and in the View­finder

In addition to showing the EE image and the playback pic­ture, the LCD monitor and viewfinder are also used for the
following character displays.
To show characters on the LCD monitor, press the DISPLAY
button briefly.

DISPLAY button

 Status screens (screens for checking the current cam-

era settings)

 Auto white display (only displayed in the Camera

mode)

 Menu setting screens
 Alarm message display
 Safety zone display (only displayed in the Camera

mode)

MEMO

When ANALOG OUT CHAR. on the OTHERS[1/2] menu
screen is ON, characters are also shown on images from
the Y/P

B/PR OUT and VIDEO OUT terminals.

Characters are also shown on images from the HD/SD-SDI
OUT terminal when the SDI OUT CHAR. is ON.

Status Screens

Press the STATUS button while normal screen is displayed
to show one of the status screens.

USER 3USER 2USER 1

SHUTTER

ND FILTER

2

1

MENU

STATUS

The contents of the status display are divided into those for
the Camera mode and those for the VTR mode.

• Each time the STATUS button is pressed in the Camera
mode, one of 5 status screens is displayed. (STATUS 0, 1,
2, 3, 4)

• One type of screen is displayed in the VTR mode.

• CAMERA MODE (display example)

STATUS 1STATUS 0

STATUS 4

STATUS 2

•VTR MODE
(display example)

STATUSSTATUS 3

MEMO

• When the STATUS button is pressed for 1 second or
longer, the menu setting screen is displayed.
To display the Status screen while the menu setting
screen is displayed, press the STATUS button to return
to the normal screen.

• You can switch between the LCD monitor and the view­finder by holding down the DISPLAY button for about 2
seconds. (When the LCD+VF item on the LCD/VF[4/4]
menu screen is set to OFF.)

Status Screens in the Camera Mode

External Image Input Mode (AUX IN)

1

23

STATUS 0 Screen

0

DD

266S

9

8
7
6
5
4

a

DV-60I AUX

1

23

STATUS 0 Screen

STATUS 0

1 Event Indication

When the Gain or Shutter Speed is changed manually, the setting condition is displayed for about 3 seconds at the time the
change is made.

• Set the shutter display method to seconds or angle in SHUTTER DISP. on the LCD/VF[3/4] menu screen. (Only when
frame rate is 24p or 25p mode)

Gain value was changed GAIN 0 dB, 3 dB, 6 dB, 9 dB, 12 dB, 15 dB, 18 dB

Gain value reached the ALC GAIN ALC

FULL AUTO was turned ON/OFF FULL AUTO ON, FULL AUTO OFF

ZEBRA was turned ON/OFF ZEBRA ON, ZEBRA OFF

Shutter speed value was changed
(When SHUTTER DISP. is set to SEC)

Variable shutter speed value was changed
(When SHUTTER DISP. is set to SEC)

Shutter was turned OFF SHUTTER OFF [1/**]

Shutter speed value was changed
(When SHUTTER DISP. is set to DEG)

Variable shutter speed value was changed
(When SHUTTER DISP. is set to DEG)

White balance value was changed ( Example)

FILTER value was changed FILTER OFF, FILTER ND 1 [1/4ND], FILTER ND 2 [1/16ND]

AE LEVEL value was changed

BLACK gain value was changed

PRESET TEMP. value was changed

HEADER REC is running HEADER REC

FOCUS ASSIST was turned ON/OFF FOCUS ASSIST ON, FOCUS ASSIST OFF
Time code was set to zero reset TC ZERO PRESET X See page 45.
REC LOCK switch was turned ON/OFF REC SWITCH LOCKED, REC SWITCH UNLOCKED X See page 18, 9 REC LOCK switch.

A REC command was sent from the IEEE1394
connector

Setting Status Contents of Indications

*1

*2

*2

SHUTTER 1/6, 1/6.25, 1/7.5, 1/12, 1/12.5, 1/15, 1/24, 1/25, 1/30, 1/48, 1/50, 1/60, 1/100, 1/120,
1/250, 1/500, 1/1000, 1/2000, 1/4000, 1/10000

*1

V. SHUTTER 1/24.01 to 1/10489.5

SHUTTER 360.0°, 180.0°, 172.8°, 150.0°, 144.0°, 135.0°, 120.0°, 105.0°, 90.0°, 75.0°, 60.0°,

45.0°, 30.0°, 22.5°, 11.2°

0° to 360°

WHITE BAL A [3200K]
Numeric value: Any of 2300, 2500, 2800, 3000, 3200, 3400, 3700, 4300, 5200, 5600, 6500,

AE LEVEL –3, –2, –1, NORMAL, +1, +2, +3

BLACK NORMAL
BLACK STRETCH 1, 2, 3, 4, 5
BLACK COMPRESS 1, 2, 3, 4, 5

*2 *3

WHITE BAL PRST [3200K], WHITE BAL PRST [5600K]

TRIGGER TO HDV, TRIGGER TO DV

*4

8000

0

266S

DD

22

STATUS button

23

CONTROLS, INDICATORS AND CONNECTORS

Indications on the LCD Monitor
and in the Viewfinder (Cont’d)

FF/REW button was pressed in CAMERA
mode

REC/VTR trigger button was pressed when
1080I CAMERA in the VIDEO FORMAT[1/2]
menu screen was set to ON

Other Displays X See “FILE MANAGE Menu Screen” on pages 100-102.

*1

*2

*3

*4

No. Item Contents

Setting Status Contents of Indications

The range for the shutter speed differs depending on the video format setting. X Seepage86.
Displayed if functions were assigned to the USER1 - 3 buttons. X See page 86.
Displayed when the [WHT.BAL] white balance selector switch c on page 15 is set to PRST (PRESET).
“ ** ” depends on the video format.

2 VTR mode indication STBY : In record standby mode (record-pause mode)

3 Indication of date and time Indicates the date and time.

LCD BRIGHT indication When the brightness of the monitor screen is adjusted with the LCD BRIGHT button, the date and time

4 Indication of Black operation B : Displayed when the black stretch or black compress settings are other than NORMAL.
5 Indication of skin tone detail

color operation

6 Indication of Iris level opera-

tion

7 Indication of FAW operation FAW : Indicated when Full Auto White Balance is ON.
8 Gain operation indication * dB : Indicates gain value when gain is other modes than 0 dB and ALC.
9 Indication of various function

operations

0 Indication of DR-HD100 Oper-

ation

a AUX display Displays when in external image input mode. (AUX IN mode)

SWITCH TO VTR MODE

1080I REC INVALID

X See “Warnings and Responses” on page 106.

REC : During recording
PLAY : During playback
FF : Du ring fast forward
REW : During rewind
STL : During still picture playback mode
FWD : During playback in forward direction (FWD1: About ×2 speed, F WD2: About ×5 speed, FWD3:

About ×10 speed)

REV : During playback in reverse direction (REV1: About ×2 speed, REV2: About ×5 speed, REV3:

About ×10 speed)
STOP : Stop mode (Tape protect mode)
EJECT : Cassette being ejected

- - - : No tape loaded

Whether or not the date and time should be displayed as well as the display style are set on the TIME/
DATE menu.

indications and the VTR mode indication 2 are turned off and the LCD BRIGHT indicator is displayed.
(Example)
BRIGHT +5 •••••+•••••O
Numeric value: Any of –5, –4, –3, –2, –1, 0, +1, +2, +3, +4, +5.

SD : Indicated when skin tone detail is ON.

I : Displayed when the AE LEVEL setting is other than NORMAL

FOCUS : Displayed when the Focus Assist function is ON.
SKIN AREA : Blinks while the skin detail color area is displayed.
ALC : Displayed when ALC function alone is ON.
FAS : Displayed when the Full Auto Shooting function is ON.
S : Displayed when the shutter speed is a setting other than the default setting.

When a DR-HD100 (HDD unit by FOCUS enhancements) is connected, its operation status is displayed.

[: DR-HD100 is connected (displays white)
[: Recording with DR-HD100 (displays red)

(For details, refer to the DR-HD100 INSTRUCTION MANUAL.)

X Seepage86.

3

12

8

a

0

9

76b

STATUS 1 Screen

4

5

c

DV-60I AUX

STATUS 1 Screen

STATUS 1

In addition to the information on the STATUS 0 screen, this screen displays the following items.

No. Item Contents

External Image Input Mode (AUX IN)

1 VIDEO FORMAT display Displays the currently selected video format.

2 Time Code (TC)/User’s Bits

(UB) indication

3 Synchronized display with an

external time code generator

4 Remaining tape indication Remaining tape indication (displayed in 1-minute steps)

5 Voltage indication (Example) 12.2V: Indicates remaining battery level in 0 .1V steps.

Allows you to select the REC item on the VIDEO FORMAT[1/2] menu screen. X See page 77.
You can switch this display ON/OFF using the VIDEO FORMAT item on the LCD/VF[3/4] menu screen.
X See page 91.

Indicates the time code (h:m:s:frame) or user’s bits data.

(Example) Time code TC 00 : 00 : 00 : 00

User’s bits UB FF EE DD 20

Whether or not to display this item is set with the TC/UB item on the LCD/VF[3/4] menu screen.
X See page 91.
Whether the time code or user’s bits should be shown is selected with the TC DISPLAY switch inside the
LCD door.

Lights up when the time code generator of this device synchronizes with the time code input from the TC
IN terminal. Blinks when synchronization is unsuccessful. Turns off If there is no input signal.

This indicator blinks when remaining tape time is equivalent to less than 3 minutes.
Whether or not to display this item is set with the TAPE REMAIN item on the LCD/VF[3/4] menu scree n.
X See page 91.
* When inserting a brand-new tape, the remaining tape time is not indicated.

When the tape has been run, the indication will appear.
* The remaining tape indication is to be regarded only as a guide.
* When this device is used at low temperatures, it may take a while before the indication of the remaining

tape time appears.

Battery voltage and remaining battery are displayed. Select the display method in BATTERY INFO. on the
LCD/VF[3/4] menu screen. X See page 91.
Anton Bauer battery: Voltage/remaining capacity (%)/remaining time
IDX Endura battery : Voltage/remaining capacity (%)

Colon (:) when non-drop frame mode
Dot (.) when drop frame mode

2

4

5

67

b

24

25

CONTROLS, INDICATORS AND CONNECTORS

Indications on the LCD Monitor
and in the Viewfinder (Cont’d)

No. Item Contents

6 Audio sampling frequency in-

dication

7 Audio level meter indication Displays the CH-1, CH-2 audio level meters.

8 Standard audio level indication The level at which audio is recorded on the tape is indicated by “O”.

9 Iris indicator display M : Iris set higher th an normal

0 Iris F-value indication Indicates the F-number of the connected lens.

a Filter position indication Indicates the current filter position.

b Audio Lock Indication Displayed when the audio signal is locked to the vid eo signal.
c AUX display Displays when in external image input mode (AUX IN mode)

32 K : Indicated when the AUDIO MODE item on the AUDIO/MIC[1/2] menu screen is set to 32 K. (Audio

is recorded with 12-bit, 32 kHz sampling.)

48 K : Indicated when the AUDIO MODE item on the AUDIO/MIC[1/2] menu screen is set to 48 K. (Audio

is recorded with 16-bit, 48 kHz sampling.) When HDV format is set, 48K is displayed.

X See page 87.
Whether or not to display this item is set with the AUDIO item on the LCD/VF[3/4] menu.

Whether or not to display this item is set with the AUDIO item on the LCD/VF[3/4] menu.
X See page 91.

–20 dB, –12 dB
X See “AUDIO REF.LEVEL” on page 87.

–20 dB –12 dB

CH-1 OOOOOOOOO\\\]
CH-2 OOOOOOOOO\\\]

b: Iris set to normal
N: Iris set lower than normal

The indication can be switched ON/OFF with the F.NO/IRIS IND. item on the LCD/VF[1/4] menu screen.
X See page 89.

OPEN, F2, F2.8, F4, F5.6, F8, F11, F16, CLOSE
It is not displayed when the lens is removed. For some lenses, no display appears.
The indication can be switched ON/OFF with the F.NO/IRIS IND. item on the LCD/VF[1/4] menu screen.
X See page 89.

No display : FILTER OFF
ND1 : FILTER ND1 (1/4ND)
ND2 : FILTER ND2 (1/16ND)
The indication can be switched ON/OFF with the FILTER item on the LCD/VF[1/4] menu screen.

X See page 89.

OO

STATUS 2

This screen displays the camera setup statuses.
Event display is not available while this screen is displayed.

Indication Indication Contents

FILE FILE F CAM1 [********], CAM2-4 [********], and EXT1 - 4 [********] * indicates SUB NAME X See pages 100-102.

FULL AUTO ON, OFF

GAIN 0dB, 3dB, 6dB, 9dB, 12dB, 15dB, 18dB, ALC

*

SHUTTER

WHT. BAL A[##00K], B[##00K], PRESET[##00K], FAW

AE LEVEL –3, –2, –1, NORMAL, +1, +2, +3

FILTER OFF, ND1 [1/4ND], ND2 [1/16ND]

ZEBRA 60-70%, 70-80%, 85-95%, OVER 95%, OVER 100%

REMAIN Displays the remaining tape (minutes)
AUDIO Displays the audio sampling frequency and the audio level adjustment mode (Ex: 32K (CH1 Z CH2 a) Z (for AUTO

* When SHUTTER DISP. on the LCD/VF[3/4] menu screen is set to DEG, the shutter display for the frame rate in 24p or 25p mode is degrees.

Indication Indication Contents

SHUTTER (When STEP is selected)

STATUS 3

Displays a list of setting statuses for USER1, 2, and 3 as well as LENS RET item on the SWITCH MODE menu screen.
X Seepage86.
Events are not displayed while these statuses are being displayed.

Indication Indication Contents

USER1
USER2

USER3 NONE, BARS, PRESET TEMP., B.STRETCH1 to 5, B.COMPRESS1 to 5, RET, LOAD FILE

LENS RET RET, FOCUS ASSIST

STATUS 4

This screen only displays VTR mode indication, date and time, event display and alarm indications.
* Whether or not date and time should be displayed and the display style are set o n the TIME/DATE menu screen.
X See “Displaying the Time and Date on the Screen” on page 42.

STATUS 2 Screen STATUS 3 Screen

A F symbol is displayed when a menu setting read from LOAD FILE was changed.
The display disappears when the setting is saved using STORE FILE.

(When STEP is selected)
OFF, 1/6, 1/6.25, 1/7.5, 1/12, 1/12.5, 1/15, 1/24, 1/25, 1/30, 1/48, 1/50, 1/60, 1/100, 1/120, 1/250, 1/500, 1/1000, 1/2000,
1/4000, 1/10000
(When VARIABLE is selected)
1/24.01 - 1/10489.5
(Displayed when FAS or ALC mode is selected)
EEI
* The range for the shutter speed differs depending on the video format. X See page 86.

For A and B, ## represents 23, 25, 28, 30, 32, 34, 37, 43, 52, 65, or 80. For PRESET, 32 or 56.

mode) a (for MANUAL mode)

360.0°, 180.0°, 172.8°, 150.0°, 144.0°, 135.0°, 120.0°, 105.0°, 90.0°, 75.0°, 60.0°, 45.0°, 30.0°, 22.5°, 11.2°
(When VARIABLE is selected)
0° to 360°

NONE, BARS, PRESET TEMP., B.STRETCH1 to 5, B.COMPRESS1 to 5, AE LEVEL+, AE LEVEL–, RET, LOAD FILE

26

27

CONTROLS, INDICATORS AND CONNECTORS

Indications on the LCD Monitor
and in the Viewfinder (Cont’d)

Status Screen in VTR MODE

1

4

5

6

7

No. Item Contents

1 VIDEO FORMAT display Displays the video format recorded on the tape when in VTR mode. Also displays the video format of the

2 Time code (TC) and user’s bits

(UB) display

3 Remaining tape time Remaining tape indication (displayed in 1-minute steps)

4 Event display Displays messages related to VTR op erations. X See pages 106-108.
5 Audio sampling frequency in-

dication

6 Audio level meter indication Displays the audio level meters during playback.

7 VTR mode indication Indicates the VTR operation status

2

3

0

9

8

HDV/DV input signal.
You can switch this display ON/OFF using the VIDEO FORMAT item on the LCD/VF[1/2] menu screen.
X See page 91.

Displays the time code data being recorded (hour, minute, second, frame) when in VTR mode.
You can switch this display ON/OFF using the TC/UB item on the LCD/VF[1/2] menu screen.
X See page 91.
You can select to display either the time code or the user’s bits using the TC DISPLAY switch in the LCD
door.

This indicator blinks when remaining tape time is equivalent to less than 3 minutes.
Whether or not to display this item is set with the TAPE REMAIN item on the LCD/VF[1/2] menu scree n.
X See page 91.
* When inserting a brand-new tape, the remaining tape time is not indicated.

When the tape has been run, the indication will appear.
* The remaining tape indication is to be used only as a guide.
* When this device is used at low temperatures, it may take a while before the indication of the remaining

tape time appears.

The audio sampling frequency used for the recording is displayed during playback.
(32 K, 48 K, 44.1 K)
Whether or not to display this item is set with the AUDIO item on the LCD/VF[1/2] menu screen.
X See page 91.

Whether or not to display this item is set with the AUDIO item on the LCD/VF[1/2] menu screen.
X See page 91.

STBY, STOP, PLAY, REC, FF, REW, FWD, REV, STL, - - - (No tape loaded), SLOW: During variable play­back in forward direction (Displayed when using non-linear editing software.)
(SLOW+1: About ×0.1 speed, SLOW+2: About ×0.2 speed, SLOW+3: About ×0.5 speed)
During variable playback in reverse direction (Displayed when using non-linear editing software.)
(SLOW–1: About ×–0.1 speed, SLOW–2: About ×–0.2 speed, SLOW–3: About ×–0.5 speed)

No. Item Contents

8 Time/Date indication Recorded data are displayed during playback, fast forward, and rewind.

9 Voltage indication (Example) 12.2V : Indicate s remaining battery level in 0.1V steps.

0 Audio Lock indication Displayed when the audio signal from DV recording or playback is locked to the video signal.

During recording in DV format, the data from the IEEE1394 connector is displayed.
During recording in HDV format, the data of internal clock is displayed.
Whether or not the date and time should be displayed and the display style are set on the TIME/DATE
menu screen. X See page 95.
When the date and time have not been set, the following indication appears.

- -/- -/- - - -: - -: - -

Battery voltage and remaining battery are displayed. Select the display method in BATTERY INFO. on the
LCD/VF[1/2] menu screen X See page 91.
Anton Bauer battery: Voltage/remaining capacity (%)/remaining time
IDX Endura battery : Voltage/remaining capacity (%)

Magnified Status Indications on the
LCD Monitor

The characters on the status screens can be showed alone
in magnified size on the LCD monitor.

DISPLAY button

3

1. Set the LCD+VF item on the LCD/VF[4/4] menu screen to ON. X See page 92.

2. When the DISPLAY button is briefly pressed while the LCD monitor is displayed, the displayed contents change every time the

DISPLAY button is pressed.

Only image displayed

Image and characters displayed

No. Item Contents

1 Audio Lock Indicator Displayed during recording and playback when the audio signal is locked to the video signal.
2 Time Code Generator Setting

Indicator

3 Drop/Non-drop Indicator Indicates the framing mode of the time code.

4 Synchronized display with an

external time code generator

5 Indication of DR-HD100 Oper-

ation

MEMO

When characters indicating the status are displayed in
magnified size on the LCD monitor, the viewfinder display
the image.

Characters shown enlarged

Indicates the set status of the TC GENE switch on the side section.
FREE : TC GENE switch is set to PRESET-FREE RUN MODE.
RECR : TC GENE switch is set to PRESET-REC RUN MODE.
REGN : TC GENE switch is set to REGEN MODE.
DUPL : There is 1394 input in VTR mode and TC DUPLI. menu is set to ON.
EXT : Displays when time code is input to the TC IN terminal.

(When TCG SOURCE on the TC/UB/CLOCK menu screen is set to EXTERNAL.)

DF : Drop frame mode
NDF : Non-drop frame mode

Lights up when the time code generator of this device synchronizes with the time code input from the TC
IN terminal. Blinks when synchronization is unsuccessful. Turns off If there is no input signal.

When a DR-HD100 (HDD unit by FOCUS enhancements) is connected, its operation status is displayed.
(For details, refer to the DR-HD100 INSTRUCTION MANUAL.)

1

4

5

DD

2

266S

28

29

CONTROLS, INDICATORS AND CONNECTORS

Indications on the LCD Monitor
and in the Viewfinder (Cont’d)

Auto White Balance Indication
(Camera mode only)

The AUTO WHITE indication and the result of the operation are dis­played during the auto white balance adjustment operation.
X See “White Balance Adjustment” on page 52.

Menu Setting Screen

Screen used for making various settings.
The Menu Setting Screen appears when the STATUS button is
pressed for 1 second or more.
X See “Setting Menu Screens” on page 75.

TOP MENU screen (Camera mode)

Safety Zone Indication (Camera mode only)

The indication of the following safety zone and center mark indications can be turned ON/OFF with the SAFETY ZONE item and CEN­TER MARK item on the LCD/VF[1/4] menu screen. X See page 89.
In addition, the safety zone display is on or off depending on the REC item setting and the ASPECT item setting in the VIDEO FORMAT
menu screen, as shown below.

SAFETY ZONE OFF 4:3 14:9 16:9 16:9+4:3

CENTER MARK - OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON

REC ASPECT

DV-60I
DV-50I
DV-24P
DV-24PA
DV-25P

HDV-HD60P
HDV-HD50P
HDV-HD30P
HDV-HD25P
HDV-HD24P

4:3

16:9

[16:9]

Alarm Message Display

• The following alarm messages are displayed while the STA­TUS (0, 1, 4) screen is shown in the Camera mode, or a STA­TUS screen is shown in the VTR mode.
If an alarm is generated while the STATUS 2, 3 screen is
shown, the STATUS 0 screen returns to display the alarm.
X See page 106.

• When an abnormality occurs in the VTR, a warning message
with an error code is displayed.
X See pages 106-108.

Alarm display area

Cannot be selected

SAFETY ZONE 2.35:1CE 2.35:1CH

CENTER MARK OFF ON OFF ON

DV-60I
DV-50I
DV-24P
DV-24PA
DV-25P

HDV-HD60P
HDV-HD50P
HDV-HD30P
HDV-HD25P
HDV-HD24P

4:3 Cannot be selected

16:9

[16:9]

Switching between the LCD Screen
and Viewfinder Display

 When the LCD+VF item in the LCD/VF[4/4] menu is set to

OFF, the LCD monitor and viewfinder (VF) displays are as
shown below.

LCD Monitor Status LCD Display VF Display

LCD Closed Normal LCD OFF ON

LCD Open Normal LCD ON OF F

MEMO

• You can switch between the LCD monitor and the view-

• After you set up the function that switches the display

• If the LCD monitor is closed inside this device with the

 When the LCD+VF item in the LCD/VF[4/4] menu is set to

LCD Closed Normal LCD OFF ON

LCD Open Normal LCD ON ON

MEMO

• Press the DISPLAY button for 2 seconds to switch the

• The viewfinder screen is always displayed.

Inverted LCD ON OFF

Inverted LCD ON OFF

finder by holding down the DISPLAY button for about 2
seconds.

between the LCD monitor and the viewfinder by holding
down the DISPLAY button, the display mode is cancelled
by the LCD monitor open/close and normal/inverted
operations.

screen in the normal display orientation, holding down
the DISPLAY button does not work.

ON, the LCD monitor and viewfinder (VF) displays are as
shown below.

LCD Monitor Status LCD Display VF Display

Inverted LCD ON ON

Inverted LCD ON ON

LCD screen display ON and OFF.

Inverted LCD

DISPLAY button

Normal LCD

LCD open 40° or
more

LCD close less
than 40°

30

31

PREPARATIONS

Basic System

Shoulder Belt

Microphone

*1An HZ-FM13 cannot be used with a Th16 × 5.5BRMU or S14 × 7.3B12/U zoom lens.

Use a FUJINON focus manual unit (FMM-8, CFH-3, CFC-12-990).
For details, please consult your JVC authorized dealer.

XLR 3P

Focus Manual Unit
*1 HZ-FM13 (FUJINON)

HZ-FM15 (CANON)

1/3 Zoom Lens
Th13 × 3.5BRMU (FUJINON)

Wide Converter

WCV-82SC

Focus Manual Unit
*1

Zoom Servo Unit

HZ-ZS13B

1/2 Zoom Lens

S14 × 7.3B12U (FUJINON)
S17 × 6.6BRM (FUJINON)
S20 × 6.4B12U (FUJINON)
YH16 × 7K12U (CANON)
YH19 × 6.7K12U (CANON)

2/3 Zoom Lens

DM-3106 (Astrodesign)

V-R70P-HAD (Marshall Electronics)

1/3 Zoom Lens
Th16 × 5.5BRMU (FUJINON)
(Excluding the CHU/CHE model)

GY-HD250/GY-HD251
Standard Package

Mount Converter
(1/2r1/3): ACM-12
(2/3r1/3): ACM-17

View Finder

VF-P400

View Finder

Microphone

Carrying Case

Earphone

MACRO

SD Memory Card

Tripod Base (U model only)

Tripod

Dolly

ND FILTER

2

1

WHT.BAL

ON

POWER

VF BRIGHT

USER 3USER 2USER 1

MENU

STATUS

AUTO

AUDIO
LEVEL

CH-1 CH-2

OFF

REC

AUTO

Studio Kit

KA-HD250

GY-HD250/GY-HD251

Battery mount
GY-HD250: Gold Mount
GY-HD251: V Mount

Anton Bauer

IDX (Endura)

XLR 4P

IEEE1394 Cable

For GY-HD250

Battery

For GY-HD251

Battery

HD-SD Cable
BNC

Component Cable
BNC

Composite Cable
RCA pin

Audio Cable
RCA pin

6P-6P

Anton Bauer

Battery Charger

IDX

Battery Charger

AC Adapter

Headset
DT109 (Beyerdynamic)

CALLTALLY

FULL AUTO F1

BARS

F2

INTERCOM

LEVEL

Camera Remote Control Unit

Monitor

Non-linear Editing System

AC

Remote Control Unit

RM-LP55/RM-LP57

MENU/SHUTTER GAIN

F3

SHUTTER

STEP

HIGH

SHUTTER

VARIABLE

MID

PUSH-ON

PUSH-ON

MENU

F4

LOW

GAIN

DOWN UP

DOWN UP

RM-P210

PAINT AUTO

WHITE MASTER BLACK

BR

Monitor

HDD Unit

DR-HD100

DV VTR

BR-HD50

REMOTE CONTROL UNIT RM-P210

IRIS

W.BAL

B

A

AUTO
MANU

PRESET

CLOSE OPEN

Monitor

POWER

Attaching the Zoom Lens

1. Loose n the mount ring.

2. Attach the lens with its pin aligne d with the hole in the

mount.

1. 3. Knob

2. Microphone

Microphone
holder

3. Tighten the mount ring.

4. Connect the cable conne ctor.

5. Clamp the lens cable.

5. Clamp

Clamp

Hole

Pin

4. INPUT1, 2 connector

How to Attach the View­finder

CAUTION

• Be sure to tighten the mount ring completely. Incomplete
tightening may result in the lens dropping off or disturbed
back focus.

• Set the GY-HD250/GY-HD251’s power switch to “OFF”
before the zoom lens is attached or detached.

Attaching the Microphone
(Provided)

Connect the provided microphone to the microphone holder.
Provided microphone is a phantom microphone.

1. Turn the knob on the microphone holder anticlockwise to

loosen it and open the microphone holder.

I

O

2. Place the microphone in the microphone holder.

Place the microphone toward the front to prevent it from
interfering with the cassette cover.

3. Turn the knob on the microphone holder clockwise to

secure the microphone.

4. Connect the microphone cable to the INPUT1 or INPUT2

input connector on the GY-HD250/GY-HD251.

5. Attach the microphone cable to the clamp.

6. Make sure to perform the correct setting for use of a

phantom microphone.
X See page 56.

1. To attach the viewfinder, slide it in the direction of the

arrow.

2. Set th e viewfinder to a comfortable position and then turn

the slide mounting ring and mount.

 To take off the viewfinder, pull the knob in the direction of

the arrow as you slide the viewfinder.

Knob

Taking off the viewfinder

Slide mounting ring

2.

1.

32

33

PREPARATIONS

About the Viewfinder Cable

Attach the viewfinder cable to the clamp 7 on page 14.
To reduce the emission of unwanted radio waves, be sure to
attach the provided core filter as shown in the figure below.

• Attach the core filter (black) as close to this device as pos­sible, as shown in the figure.

Core filter (black)

Inserting an SD Memory
Card

By using an SD memory card, you can save and call up menu
settings and camera settings for GY-HD250/GY-HD251.
X See “FILE MANAGE Menu Screen” on page 100.

Check that the POWER switch is OFF.

Inserting an SD Memory Card

1. Open the SD memory card cover.

2. Face the cutout end of the SD memory card inward and

insert it in the direction of the arrow.

CAUTION

Be sure not to touch the metal connector area of the SD
memory card.

3. Close the SD memory card cover.

Cutout

Taking out the SD memory card

1. Push the SD me mory card in the direction of the arrow.

• The SD memory card comes out slightly.

2. Pull the SD memory card straight out.

About SD Memory Cards

• When you use an SD memory card that was either just
purchased or formatted on a device other than GY-HD250/
GY-HD251, format it on GY-HD250/GY-HD251.
X Seepage102.
Recommended SD memory cards
Panasonic: 16 MB to 2 GB

• You can write-protect the card so that saved files are not
mistakenly erased. Set the switch on the side of the SD
memory card to the “LOCK” position.

LOCK switch

MEMO

SDHC-compliant memory cards cannot be used with this
device.

Attaching the Tripod Base
(Provided only for U model)

Use the provided tripod base to place the camera on a tri­pod. (U model only)

1. Attach the tripod base on the tripod by using the hole that

balances this device most optimally.

1. Tripod mounting holes

2. While p ushing the safety lever, pull the lock lever toward

the front until the front mount clip clicks into place.

Front mount clip

2. Safety lever

3. Place this device on the tripod base by aligning the rear

base mount of this device with the pin on the tripod base.

4. Front base mount

4. Hold th e camera on the top and slide forward so that the

base mount of the camera is locked by the front mount
clip of this device as it clicks into place.

4.

3. Pin

2.

Lock lever

3. Rear base mount

CAUTION

• The front base mount may be locked while the pin of the
tripod base is not inserted into the hole on the rear base
mount of this device. Therefore, after mounting, make
sure that these parts are engaged properly.

• When moving this device mounted on a tripod, any
impact or vibration should be avoided as this may cause
this device to become detached and to drop from the tri­pod.
Be sure to remove this device from the tripod before
transporting it.

34

SD memory card cover

VF BRIGHT

USER 3USER 2USER 1

MACRO

ND FILTER

2

1

MENU

STATUS

WHT.BAL

AUTO

AUTO
AUDIO
LEVEL

CH-1 CH-2

ON

OFF

POWER

REC

35

PREPARATIONS

AC Operation

The GY-HD250/GY-HD251 is operable with AC power supply
or battery pack.
Use the AC adapter as the AC power supply.

1. After making sure that th e power switches of the GY-

HD250/GY-HD251 and of the AC adapter are set to OFF,
connect the DC cable to the DC OUTPUT connector of
the AC adapter and the DC INPUT connector of the GY­HD250/GY-HD251 as shown in the illustration.

• To lessen the amount of unnecessary radio waves
emitted, attach a provided Clamp filter near both ends
of the DC cable as shown in the diagram.

CH2-AUDIO OUT-CH1 VIDEO

Clamp filter

DC INPUT

DC cable

DC OUTPUT

Clamp filter

2. Press the POWER switch of the GY-HD250/GY-HD251 to

ON. Power is supplied to the VTR section and the cam­era.

CAUTION

• Do not remove or connect the DC cable while recording
is being performed.

• Do not use any power source with large fluctuations in
the power source voltage, power sources generating
noise, such as ripples or power sources with lower volt­age.

IEEE 1394

AC adapter

Charging the Built-in Battery

The built-in, rechargeable backup battery retains the date
and time and the time code data.
The built-in battery is constantly being charge whenever the
GY-HD250/GY-HD251 is connected to a power supply, but it
gradually discharges while the GY-HD250/GY-HD251 is dis­connected from a power supply. The battery will be fully dis­charged when the GY-HD250/GY-HD251 is not used for
about three months, in which case the set date and time and
time code data are reset.
In this case, recharge the built-in battery and then set the
date and time and time code data again.
However, it is possible to use the GY-HD250/GY-HD251
even if the built-in battery is discharged but the date and time
and time code data cannot be recorded.

How to charge the built-in battery

1. Con nect the AC adapter to the GY-HD250/GY-HD251

and an AC outlet or mount a charged battery on the GY­HD250/GY-HD251.

2. Set the POWER swi tch on the GY-HD250/GY-HD251 to

“ON” or “OFF” (charging takes places with the POWER
switch set to either of the positions).

3. Le ave the equipment in this condition for about 4 hours.

• The built-in battery will remain charged for about 3
months after being charged for about 4 hours.

Battery Operation

The attachable battery varies depending on location.
Recommended batteries

U model: Dionic 90 (Anton Bauer)
E model: Endura-7 (IDX)

CAUTION

Use only the recommended batteries.
If a heavy battery is used, the battery may fall out depend­ing on the way the HD camera recorder is used.

GY-HD250U

Use an Anton Bauer battery.

Attaching the Battery

1. Align th e battery guide pins (three places) with the bat-

tery adapter guide holes and insert straight. Battery will
not be properly attached if guide pins are not straight.

Cassette cover
side panel

Release lever

LCD screen
side panel

2. Slide the battery toward s the Cassette cover side panel

until it clicks.

• The battery is attached.

Removing the Battery

Slide the battery towards you (LCD screen side panel) while
holding down the release lever, and pull away from the
device to remove the battery.

Release lever

Guide
holes (×3)

Guide pins

Battery

Battery pack
(trim pack)

GY-HD251E

Use an IDX (Endura) battery.

Attaching the Battery

1. Face the b attery terminals down and align the battery V-

mount with the battery adapter V-mount attachment.

V-mount
attachment

2. Slide the battery down until it clicks and locks.

• The battery is attached.

Removing the Battery

Slide the battery up while holding down the lock release but­ton to remove the battery.

Release button

V-mount

Battery

36

37

PREPARATIONS

Battery Operation
(Cont’d)

Precautions for the Battery Opera­tion

• Do not detach the battery pack while recording is taking
place.

• Do not connect or disconnect the DC cable while operat­ing with a battery pack.
The following symptoms may occur if the DC cable is con­nected or disconnected while operating with a battery
pack.

• The power is cut off for a moment when the DC cable is

disconnected.

• Noise to the video and audio signals occurs. Audio sig-

nal are muted.

• When operation is continued with DC input after the bat­tery pack capacity has been used up, set the POWER
switch to OFF after the DC power is applied. Then switch
ON again.

• If the GY-HD250/GY-HD251 is left with the battery pack
attached, a small amount of power is consumed even if
the POWER switch on the GY-HD250/GY-HD251 is set to
OFF.
Remove the battery pack when the GY-HD250/GY-HD251
is not going to be used.

Remaining Battery Power Display

LCD monitor/Viewfinder

When the remaining battery power is nearly exhausted, the
following warnings will be generated.
 Viewfinder screen or LCD monitor

When a Status screen is displayed (excluding the STATUS
2, 3 screen in the Camera mode)

• Alarm indication: LOW VOLTAGE displayed.

 FRONT and BACK TALLY lamp on camera: Blinks
 Monitoring loudspeaker and PHONES jack: Alarm sound

MEMO

• After the remaining battery power warnings appear, the
GY-HD250/GY-HD251 automatically stops operation if
the battery power operation is continued.

• When you use an Anton Bauer battery, the remaining
battery (capacity or time) can be displayed in the STA­TUS 1 screen of the LCD screen or viewfinder. Set BAT­TERY INFO. on the LCD/VF[3/4] menu screen to
CAPA% or TIME to display the remaining battery. When
using the IDX Endura battery, the remaining capacity (%)
can be displayed. X Seepage91.

Operating Time with Battery Pack

When a fully charged battery pack is attached, the approxi­mate continuous operating time is as follows

Battery Pack Contin uous Operating Time (at 25°C (77°F))

Dionic 90

(U model)

Endura-7

(E model)

• Battery operating time may differ depending on the age of
the battery pack, charging conditions and the operating
environment, etc. Use the values in the table on the above
for approximate reference times.

• Operating time is reduced in areas with a cold environ­ment.

• Operating time is reduced when the power zoom lens and
LCD are used frequently.

Approx. 3.2 hours

Approx. 2.5 hours

Precautions for the Battery Pack

• When the battery pack is not in use, it must be stored in a
cool, dry place.
Do not leave the battery pack in a place where it might be
subject to a high temperature (under direct sunlight in a
car, etc.), this could cause leakage of the fluid or shorten
service life.

• When the terminal section of the battery pack gets dirty,
the operating time will be shortened.

• If the operating time becomes greatly reduced even imme­diately after recharging, the service life of the battery pack
is nearly finished.
Purchase a new battery pack.

Recharging

• Recharge the battery pack after completely discharging it.
Repeated recharging with residual charge remaining could
result in reduced battery capacity.

• If the battery capacity is reduced by repeating incomplete
recharging, or recharging without discharging, once dis­charge the battery pack completely, then recharge it to
restore the battery capacity.

• If the battery pack is recharged with its internal tempera­ture raised immediately after use, recharging may not be
performed completely.

• Perform charging in an environment where the tempera­ture is between 10°C (50°F) and 35°C (95°F). 20°C (68°F)
to 25°C (77°F) is the ideal temperature range for charging.
If the environment is too cold, charging may not complete.

PREPARATIONS FOR OPERATION

Turning the Power ON

Turning the Power ON

1. Set the POWER switch to ON.

This device turns on in Camera mode.

 The operation differs according to whether this device is in

the Camera mode or in the VTR mode.
The mode switches each time you press the CAM/VTR button.
When the mode is switched, the VTR indicator displays
the following statuses.

While the mode is being switched : Flashing
In VTR mode : Lit
In Camera mode : Off

VTR indicator

VF BRIGHT

USER 3USER 2USER 1

ND FILTER

2

1

MENU

STATUS

WHT.BAL

AUTO

AUDIO
LEVEL

CH-1 CH-2

ON

OFF

POWER

REC

Camera mode

The GY-HD250/GY-HD251 enters the Camera mode. The
camera image is displayed in the viewfinder or on the LCD
monitor. When a recordable videocassette is loaded, the
GY-HD250/GY-HD251 enters the record-standby mode
automatically. “STBY” is displayed in the VTR operation
mode indication area of the LCD monitor and/or in the
viewfinder. In this condition, press the REC/VTR trigger
button to start recording.
* Playback is also possible in the Camera mode.

VTR mode

The GY-HD250/GY-HD251 enters the VTR mode. The
camera image will not be displayed in the viewfinder or on
the LCD monitor. When a videocassette is loaded, the GY­HD250/GY-HD251 enters the stop mode.
“STOP” is displayed in the VTR operation mode indication
area of the LCD monitor and/or in the viewfinder.
HDV/DV input is possible through the IEEE1394 connector.

POWER switch

Playback operation becomes possible when the STOP
button is pressed to set the VTR operation mode indica­tor to indicate “STOP”.

LCD BRIGHT

CAM/VTR

-

+

TC

AUDIO SELECT

GENE.

CH-2

DISPLAY

CH-1

FREE

TC

AUTO

REC

MANU

UB

AUTO

REGEN

CAM/VTR button

Tur n i n g t h e Power O F F

1. Place the GY-HD250/GY-HD251 in the record-standby or

STOP mode.

2. Set the POWER switch to OFF.

3. Remove the battery pack or the power supply to the DC

INPUT connector. (When the camera is not going to be
used for a longer period.)

CAUTION

• Do not set the POWER switch to OFF while recording is
taking place.
Confirm that the “STBY” or “STOP” indication is shown in
the VTR operation mode indication area before the
power is turned off.
Should the POWER switch accidentally be set to OFF
during a recording, wait at least 5 seconds before turning
the power on again.

• Always set the POWER switch to OFF before discon­necting the power supply.
Do not remove the battery pack or turn AC adapter OFF
while the POWER switch on the camera is still set to ON.

38

39

PREPARATIONS FOR OPERATION

Loading/Unloading the
Cassette

Cassette Loading

Use a videocassette tape marked MiniDV.

• To record, slide the switch on the back for use in prevent­ing accidental erasure to the “REC” side.

• Remove any the tape slack before loading.

1. Turn the POWER switch ON.

2. Slide the EJECT switch on the top panel of this device to

the side.
The videocassette cover opens automatically and a vid­eocassette tape can be inserted.

3. Inse rt a videocassette tape into the videocassette holder.

With the tape window facing out, move the switch on the
back of the videocassette up and firmly push the center
back of the videocassette straight in as far as it will go.

4. Carefully push the center (“Push here” sticker) of the vid-

eocassette cover in the direction of the arrow as far as it
will go to close it.

• After the cover is closed, it takes about 10 seconds
until recording can begin or this device can enter
STOP mode.

REC/SAVE

EJECT switch

Cassette holder

Videocassette cover

 If the power is on, the modes are as shown below.

MODE

Camera Record-standby mode STOP mode

VTR STOP mode

REC/SAVE switch

REC SAVE

REC INHIBIT is displayed
on the LCD monitor and in
the viewfinder.

switch

Tape window

Inner cover

Unloading the Cassette

1. Turn the POWER switch to ON.

2. Wh en this device is in shooting standby mode or stop

mode, slide the EJECT switch to the side and wait until
the videocassette cover opens completely.

• The LED next to the EJECT switch flashes.
A few seconds pass before the videocassette tape is
ejected.

3. The LED tu rns off and the videocassette cover opens.

• Take out the videocassette tape.

4. Carefully push the center of the videocassette cover in

the direction of the arrow as far as it will go to close it.

CAUTION

• When you close the videocassette cover, push it in firmly
as far as it will go. If the videocassette cover is not closed
properly, it becomes half-locked and this device cannot
function.
If this happens, firmly push the videocassette cover in
again as far as it will go to lock it.

• The videocassette cover does not open during recording
even if you slide the EJECT switch.

• Do not leave the videocassette cover open for a long
time.
Dust or dirt may enter the inside and cause damage.

• Do not touch the videocassette cover or interfere with the
eject operation while ejecting is in progress. This will
cause damage.

• When you close the videocassette cover, do not press
the black area of the inner cover.

Setting and Displaying the
Date and Time

The date and time of the built-in clock should be set. Pow­ered by the built-in backup battery the set date and time data
continue to count even when the power is switched off.

• The set date and time data are displayed on the LCD mon­itor or in the viewfinder and recorded on the tape in accor­dance with the settings made on the menu screen.

Setting the Date and Time Style

The date and time are set on the menu screen.
When setting while observing on a monitor connected to the
connector, set the ANALOG OUT CHAR. item or SDI OUT
CHAR. item on the OTHERS[1/2] menu screen to ON.

1. Set the POWER switch to ON.

2. Press the STATUS button for 1 second or longer to dis-

play the TOP MENU screen.

3.

SHUTTER dial

2.

STATUS button

ND FILTER

2

1

ON

1.

3. Rotate the SHUTTER di al to align the cursor (K) with the

TC/UB/CLOCK item, and then press the SHUTTER dial
in the direction of the camera body.

• The TC/UB/CLOCK menu screen appears.

4. Rotate the SHUTTER di al to align the cursor (K) with the

TIME/DATE item, and then press the SHUTTER dial.

• The TIME/DATE menu screen appears.

• Set the DISPLAY item on the TIME/DATE menu
screen to ON.

MENU

STATUS

WHT.BAL

AUTO

CH-1 CH-2

OFF

POWER

POWER switch

USER 3USER 2USER 1

AUTO
AUDIO
LEVEL

REC

TC/UB/CLOCK menu screen

5. Make setti ngs on the TIME/DATE menu screen. (This

includes display style, etc.)

TIME/DATE menu screen

DATE STYLE : Selects the style for displaying the

TIME STYLE : The time can be set to display as a 12-

SEC DISPL AY : To select whether or not indication of

TIME SHIFT : Adds time to the built-in clock (time

1Rotate the SHUTTER dial to align the cursor (K) with

the item to be set, and then press the SHUTTER dial.

• The setting area of the selected item starts blinking.

2Rotate the SHUTTER dial to change the setting, and

then press the SHUTTER dial.

• The setting area stops blinking and the setting is
entered.

MEMO

The TIME STYLE, SEC DISPLAY, DATE STYLE and TIME
SHIFT items can also be set and changed after the date
and time have been set.

date.
YY/MM/DD (Year, month, day)
MM/DD/YY (Month, day, year)
DD/MM/YY (Day, month, year)

hour or 24-hour clock system.

seconds should be displayed on the
screen.

compensation) and displays it. The
adjusted time is also recorded on the
tape.

40

41

PREPARATIONS FOR OPERATION

Setting and Displaying the Date
and Time (Cont’d)

Setting the Date and Time

1. Display the CLOCK ADJUST menu screen.

Select the CLOCK ADJUST item on the TIME/DATE
menu screen.

2. Set the da te and time.

The blinking digit is the one to be set.

Time (Hour:Min)

1When the SHUTTER dial is pressed, the blinking digit

moves to the next digit.

2When the SHUTTER dial is rotated, the value of the

blinking digit changes.
When the SHUTTER dial is rotated upward, the value
becomes higher. When rotated downward, the value
becomes smaller.

3Repeat the procedure described in 1 and 2 above to

set the day, month, year, hours, minutes.
The digits indicating seconds cannot be set.

4Press the SHUTTER dial in sync with a time signal to

enter the date and time precisely.

3. When all the settings are completed, rotate the SHUT-

TER dial to align the cursor with the PAGE BACK item,
and then press the SHUTTER dial.

• The TIME/DATE menu screen returns.

4. To return to the normal screen, use either of the following

methods.
Press the STATUS button
or
Return to the TOP MENU screen and then select the
EXIT item on the TOP MENU screen before pressing the
SHUTTER dial.

Date

TIME/DATE menu screen

CLOCK ADJUST menu screen

Displaying the Time and Date on the
Screen

Whether or not the time and date should be displayed on the
screen and how to display them are set on the TIME/DATE
menu screen.

Date Time

1. Disp lay the TIME/DATE menu screen.

1

Select the TC/UB/CLOCK item on the TOP MENU
screen.

2Select the TIME/DATE item on the TC/UB/CLOCK

menu screen.

2. Set the TIME/DATE menu screen.

• DISPLAY item : Sets whether or not date and time

• DISPLAY MODE
item

BARS :

CAM : Displayed when outputting the color

BARS+CAM :

• DISPLAY
STYLE item
DATE+TIME : Date and time are displayed.
DATE : Date only is displayed.
TIME : Time only is displayed.

 Display of date and time in the various operation modes.
In Camera mode : The date and time of the internal

In VTR playback mode : The date and time recorded on the

In VTR stop mode : The last read date and time values

When an HDV/DV sig­nal is input from the
IEEE1394 connector

should be displayed.
Set to ON to display the indications.

: Sets the video output mode in

which date and time should be dis­played.
Displayed when outputting the color
bar.

camera image.
Date and time are always displayed.

: Sets the style in which the date and

time are displayed.

clock are displayed.

tape are displayed.

are displayed.

: The date and time of the DV input

are displayed in DV format. The
date and time of the internal clock
are displayed in HDV format.

Displaying Time Code

The GY-HD250/GY-HD251 records SMPTE-standard
(NTSC) or EBU-standard (PAL) time codes and user’s bits.
In the play mode or the record mode, the reproduced time
codes or user’s bits are shown on the LCD monitor or in the
viewfinder.

• Time code generator data is output from the [TC OUT] ter­minal or [HD/SD-SDI] terminal.

The time codes or user’s bits can be shown on the LCD mon­itor or in the viewfinder during playback and recording as fol­lows. (Status screen)

Setting

1. Set the TC/UB item on the LCD/VF[3/4] menu screen to

ON.

• Time codes or user’s bit data are displayed on the
STATUS screen.

Time code indication

STATUS 1 screen

2. Wheth er time codes or user’s bit data should be dis-

played is selected with the TC DISPLAY switch inside the
LCD door.

TC : Time codes are displayed.
UB : User ’s bit data is displayed.

LCD BRIGHT

-

+

AUDIO SELECT

CH-2

CH-1

AUTO
MANU

TC DISPLAY switch TC GENE. switch

DISPLAY

CAM/VTR

TC

TC
UB

GENE.

(Example)
Time code indication

00:00:00:00

User’s bits indication

FF EE DD 20

FREE
REC
REGEN

Displayed Time Code/User’s Bit

• When TCG SOURCE on the TC/UB/CLOCK menu screen
is set to INTERNAL, values from the built-in time code
generator is displayed.

• When TCG SOURCE on the TC/UB/CLOCK menu screen
is set to EXTERNAL, values from the external time code
generator connected to the [TC IN] terminal is displayed.

• When TC DUPLI. on the TC/UB/CLOCK menu screen is
set to ON in IEEE1394 input mode, values input in the
[IEEE1394] terminal is displayed.

• Values recorded on the tape are displayed for PLAY
mode.

Time code input entered the
IEEE1394 connector

Pressing the STOP button for 1 second in the EJECT or stop
mode displays the DV input time code data or user’s bit data
from the IEEE1394 connector on the STATUS screen.

DTCG : The time code data from the IEEE1394 connector
DUBG : The user’s bit data from the IEEE1394 connector

To return to display of the original time code or user’s bit,
press the STOP button. (Display of the normal time code or
user’s bit is also restored by performing VTR operation.)

MEMO

• To use input time code data from the IEEE1394 terminal,
set TCG SOURCE item on the TC/UB/CLOCK menu
screen to INTERNAL.

• To record HDV/DV input time code and user’s bit from
the IEEE1394 connector, set the TC DUPLI. item on the
TC/UB/CLOCK menu screen to ON.
X See page 93.

• To maintain the continuity of time code data, use with the
TC GENE. switch set to REGEN mode when recording
HDV/DV input signal from the IEEE1394 connector.

• There is no time code display for HDV input.

CAUTION

A time code with a duration of more than 2 hours may not
be displayed correctly by DV components for general con­sumer use, as some of these lack the capability to display
longer time codes.

42

43

PREPARATIONS FOR OPERATION

Presetting and Recording
of Time Code

The time codes from the internal time code generator can be
recorded at the time of recording scenes.

• The TC/UB/CLOCK menu screen differs depending on
whether the FRAME RATE item on the VIDEO FORMAT
menu screen is “60/30” or “50/25”.

There are two ways to preset the time code.

• Set from the TC/UB/CLOCK menu screen.

• Set in the LCD screen without opening the menu screen.

This section explains how to set from the TC/UB/CLOCK
menu screen.
* See page 46 for instructions of setting from the LCD

screen.

Menu and switch settings to set the time code preset are the
same as the settings below.

Setting

To preset the Time Code, make the following settings.
 TC GENE. switch

Set to REC or FREE.
REC : The data preset in the time code generator

FREE : The time code starts to run from the time it is

 Set the TCG SOURCE item in the TC/UB/CLOCK menu

screen to INTERNAL.

runs only during recording.
Use this setting if it is necessary to record
continual time codes across different scenes.
* However, approximately ±1-frame varia-

tions may occur in scene accuracy.

preset in the time code generator.

 TC/UB/CLOCK menu screen (FRAME RATE: 60/30)

Use the DROP FRAME item to select the framing mode
for the time code generator.

DROP : The time code generator’s running method is

NON
DROP

MEMO

Drop frame/Non-drop frame mode

In the NTSC system, the actual number of frames per 1
second is approximately 29.97 frames, but per time code
30 frames are processed. To compensate for this differ­ence, the mode called “drop mode” drops frame 00 and 01
for every minute not divisible by 10.
The “non-drop frame mode” is when no frames are dropped
and the actual time shift neglected.

 TC/UB/CLOCK menu screen (FRAME RATE: 50/25)

Whether or not user’s bit data should be recorded can be
selected with the UB REC item on the TC/UB/CLOCK
menu screen.

set the drop frame mode.
Use this setting when placing emphasis on
the recording time.

: The time code generator’s running method is

set to the non drop frame mode.
Use this setting when placing emphasis on
the number of frames.

TC/UB/CLOCK menu screen

(FRAME RATE: 60/30)

Framing mode:
Drop frame/
Non-drop setting

TC/UB/CLOCK menu screen

(FRAME RATE: 50/25)

Presetting time code data

The time code and user’s bit data are preset on the TC/UB/
CLOCK menu screen.

1. Display the TC/UB/CLOCK menu screen.

Select the TC/UB/CLOCK item on the TOP MENU
screen.

Time code (hour, min, sec, frame)

2. Set the time code (hours, minutes, seconds, frames).

1Rotate the SHUTTER dial to align the cursor (K) with

TC PRESET, and then press the SHUTTER dial.

• The first digit of the time code blinks.
The blinking digit is the one to be set.

2When the SHUTTER dial is pressed, the blinking digit

changes.

3When the SHUTTER dial is rotated, the value of the

blinking digit changes.
When the SHUTTER dial is rotated upward, the value
becomes higher. When rotated downward, the value
becomes smaller.

4Repeat the procedure described in 2 and 3 above to

set the desired value for all digits.

5After setting the frame digit, press the SHUTTER dial to

make EXECUTE blink. The setting values are con­firmed when the SHUTTER dial is pressed again.
To cancel the setting, select CANCEL and press the
SHUTTER dial.

3. When all the dig its are set

• Press the STATUS button to return to the normal
screen
or

• Rotate the SHUTTER dial to align the cursor (K) with
the PAGE BACK item, and then press the SHUTTER
dial to return to the TOP MENU screen.

Presetting user’s bit data

The user’s bit data are preset with the UB PRESET item on
the TC/UB/CLOCK menu screen.
The method for setting is the same as the method for setting
the time code described on the left.

• The user’s bit can be specified using numerals or alpha­betic letters from 0 to F for each digit.

• To record user’s bit data, set the UB REC item to ON (Only
when set to FRAME RATE 50/25).

CAUTION

It is not possible to set all the digits of the user’s bit data to
“F”.
Reading of the data during playback will not be possible for
an all-F setting.

Zero-resetting the Time Code or
User’s Bit Data

This is performed with the TC or UB PRESET item on the
TC/UB/CLOCK menu screen. (Performed separately for the
time code and the user’s bit data.)

1Rotate the SHUTTER dial to align the cursor (KKKK) with the

TC or UB PRESET item, and then press the SHUTTER
dial.

2Rotate the SHUTTER dial to select ZERO PRESET as the

setting value, and then press the SHUTTER dial.

MEMO

When a menu screen is not being displayed, you can zero
reset the time code data by simultaneously holding down
the USER2 button and the STOP button for about 1 sec­ond.

44

45

PREPARATIONS FOR OPERATION

Presetting the Time Code
from the LCD Screen

The time code can be preset directly from the LCD screen
without opening the TC/UB/CLOCK menu screen.

CAUTION

PRESET mode is not available in the following.

• TCG SOURCE item in the TC/UB/CLOCK menu screen
is set to EXTERNAL.

• TC GENE. switch is set to REGEN.

• TC DUPLI. item in the TC/UB/CLOCK menu screen is
set to ON.

• Menu screen is displayed.

• RECORDING mode is active.

• Switching to CAM/VTR mode (When VTR indicator is
blinking).

Setting

 TC/UB/CLOCK menu screen

• Set TCG SOURCE to INTERNAL.

• Set framing of the time code generator in DROP
FRAME. (When set to FRAME RATE 60/30)

• Set to enable/disable user’s bit recording in UB REC.
(When set to FRAME RATE 50/25)

 Set the TC GENE switch to REC or FREE.

MEMO

See page 44 for details on the above settings.

 Set the TC DISPLAY switch.
Set to TC to preset time code and UB to preset user’s bit.

Operation

This section describes presetting of the time code.

ND FILTER

2

1

OFF

USER 2 button

SHUTTER

MENU

STATUS

USER 3 button

USER 3USER 2USER 1

SHUTTER dial

STATUS button

USER 1 button

VF BRIGHT

USER 3USER 2USER 1

ND FILTER

2

1

MENU

STATUS

WHT.BAL

AUTO

AUTO
AUDIO
LEVEL

CH-1 CH-2

ON

OFF

POWER

REC

Blink

2. Press the USER2 button to reset all data.

• Data becomes “00:00:00:00” and the hour digit starts
blinking.

3. Set the time code (hour, minute, second and frame).

The blinking digit can be set.

1Turn the SHUTTER dial to change the value of the

blinking digit. Turn the SHUTTER dial up to increase the
value and down to decrease the value.

2Press the SHUTTER dial to change the blinking digit.
3Repeat steps 1 and 2 and continue setting for each

row.

4. Press the USER3 button to confirm the setting data.

• The LCD screen returns to the original screen.

Presetting User’s Bit

You can specify the user’s bit with a number or character
between 0 - F.

CAUTION

All digits of user’s bit cannot be set to F.
If all digits are set to F and read, user’s bit is deemed as
undefined during playback.

Aborting Preset Operation

While presetting, press the USER1 button while holding
down the STATUS button.

• Preset operation stops and the LCD screen returns to
the original screen.

CAUTION

 Preset operation is terminated in the following.

• TC DISPLAY switch is changed

• CAM/VTR mode switch is changed

• VTR operations are performed

 USER1, USER2, and USER3 presetting in the SWITCH

MODE menus screen is not available when the Time Code
Preset screen is displayed.

 The time code preset screen is displayed on the LCD

screen or viewfinder. It will not be output from the VIDEO
OUT terminal.

Recording Time Codes in

Playing Back Time Code
Continuation of Time
Codes Recorded on Tape

The GY-HD250/GY-HD251 also incorporates a time code
reader. Therefore, when this device enters record mode from
record-standby mode, it can read the time code data
recorded on the tape and record time codes in continuation
of the existing data.
The recorded user’s bit data are identical to the user’s bit
date recorded on tape.
* However, approximately ±1-frame variations may occur in

scene accuracy.
To enable this function, set the time code related switches as
follows before starting recording.

Setting

• Set TCG SOURCE on the TC/UB/CLOCK menu screen to

INTERNAL.

• Set the TC GENE. switch inside the LCD door to REGEN.

• Set TC DUPLI. item on the TC/UB/CLOCK menu screen

to OFF.

MEMO

The time code framing mode automatically becomes the
mode (drop frame or non drop frame) already recorded on
the tape.

About Time Code Mode

 Camera mode

TC/UB/CLOCK menu TC GENE. switch

TCG SOURCE item FREE REC REGEN

INTERNAL TC PRESET mode TC REGENE mode

EXTERNAL EXT TC mode

 VTR mode/IEEE1394 input mode

TC/UB/CLOCK menu TC GENE. switch

TCG SOURCE item TC DUPLI. item FREE REC REGEN

INTERNAL

EXTERNAL

*

IEEE1394 TC SLAVE mode is performed with special operations. X See page 48.

OFF

ON IEEE1394 TC DUPLI. mode

OFF

ON

IEEE1394 TC

SLAVE mode*

This device features a time code reader. During playback,
the time code or user’s bit data recorded on the tape is dis­played on the LCD screen or viewfinder status screen.

• When the [P
time code is output from the [P
VTR mode).

• When HD/SD-SDI OUT of the VIDEO FORMAT[2/2] menu
screen is set to ON, the playback time code is output from
the [HD/SD-SDI] terminal.

B/PR/TC] switch is set to TC, the playback

MEMO

• During playback, if a portion of tape without recording
time code runs through, the time code stops running.
Playback continues.

• When a tape with a time code that is longer than two
hours is played on home-use DV equipment, time code
may not be played properly on some models.

TC PRESET mode TC REGENE mode

EXT TC mode

B/TC OUT] terminal (Only in

1. In Standby or Stop mode, press the USER1 button for

about 2 seconds while holding down the STATUS button.

• The current time code generator data is displayed in
enlarged display mode on the LCD screen. The hour
digit starts blinking.

46

47

PREPARATIONS FOR OPERATION

Synchronizing with the
Time Code of the IEEE1394
(DV)-Connected Master Unit

You can synchronize the time code when performing multi-camera recording. The internal time code generator will be synchro­nized with the time code in the signal input from the IEEE1394 terminal. After synchronization (slave lock), the internal time code
generator continues to run even if the IEEE1394 cable is disconnected.

Master unit Slave unit

VF BRIGHT

USER 3USER 2USER 1

MACRO

ND FILTER

2

1

MENU

STATUS

WHT.BAL

AUTO

AUTO
AUDIO
LEVEL

CH-1 CH-2

ON

OFF

POWER

REC

switch to the [DV] side.

You can use the GY-HD250U, GY-HD251E, GY-HD110U, or
GY-HD111E as a slave unit.

IEEE1394 terminal IEEE1394 terminalSlide the IEEE1394

Connections

Connect the master unit and the slave unit with an IEEE1394
cable.

Settings and Operations

• Master unit (GY-HD100U/GY-HD100E/GY-HD101E/GY­HD110U/GY-HD110E/GY-HD111E/GY-HD250U/GY­HD251E)

1. Set the IEEE1 394 switch on the left side to [DV].

2. Set to Camera mode.

3. Set the recording format to DV-60I or DV50I.

4. Set the TC GENE. switch to [FREE].

• Slave unit (GY-HD250U/GY-HD251E/GY-HD110U/GY­HD111E)

1. Set the IEEE1 394 switch on the left side to [DV].

2. Set to VTR mode.

3.

Check that the camera image from the master unit is input.

4.

Set TCG SOURCE in the TC/UB/CLOCK menu screen to
INTERNAL. (GY-HD250U, GY-HD251E)

5. Set the TC GENE. switch to [FREE] and the TC DISPLAY

switch to [TC].

6. Set to STOP mode or EJECT mode.

7. Press the STOP button for 1 second.

• The DV input time code data from the IEEE1394 termi­nal is displayed in the status display. (When status is in
magnified size, characters are displayed.)

8. Press the USER1 button to begin slave lock.

(To skip slave lock, press the USER3 button and clear
the status display.)

IEEE1394 cable

9. Check that the time code that is synchronized with the

master unit is running.

10.Disconnect the IEEE1394 cable.

11.The slave unit finally returns to Camera mode.

MEMO

 Slave lock cannot be performed in the following

instances.

• Slave unit is in CAMERA mode

• Slave unit is in VTR mode and there is no DV signal

• The TC GENE. switch on the slave unit is not set to
FREE

• HDV format

 If slave lock is performed in DV format and is then

switched to HDV format, frame digit may deviate.

 If power is turned off, slave lock is disable d. Perform

slave lock operation again.

 Slave lock cannot be performed for UB (User’s bit).

 If the frame rate for the master unit and slave unit is not

synchronized, it will not run properly. Synchronize frame
rate before using.

 If DROP/NON DROP is not synchronized, it will not run

properly. Synchronize DROP/NON DROP before using.

VF BRIGHT

USER 3USER 2USER 1

MACRO

ND FILTER

2

1

MENU

STATUS

WHT.BAL

AUTO

AUDIO
LEVEL

CH-1 CH-2

ON

OFF

POWER

REC

EXECUTE USER1
CANCEL

AUTO

Slide the IEEE1394
switch to the [DV] side.

Status display

00 : 00 : 00 : 00

DTCG

TC SLAVE LOCK ?

USER3

Synchronizing with an Exter­nal Time Code Generator

Synchronize the built-in time code generator with the
SMPTE/EBU-compliant LTC time code, which is input from
the [TC IN] terminal. After synchronization (slave lock), the
built-in time code generator continues to run even if external
time code are not input.

BPR/TC switch

GENLOCK/AUX IN switch

Synchronization signal

Synchronization signal
generator

Synchronization signal

External time code
generator

GENLOCK

LTC t ime code

Connection

 Input external synchronization signal to the external time

code generator and the GENLOCK/AUX IN terminal of this
device.
Use BB signals or Tri-sync HD signals as the external syn­chronization signals.

CAUTION

When the power switch is turned on while the external syn­chronization signal is input, a vertical vibration occurs for a
few seconds. This is not a malfunction.

 Input SMPTE/EBU-compliant LTC time code signal to the

B/TC IN terminal.

P

Setting

 Set the [GENLOCK/AUX IN] switch to GENLOCK.
 Set the [P
 Set TCG SOURCE in the TC/UB/CLOCK menu screen to

 Set the LCD screen or viewfinder to STATUS 1 screen dis-

BPR/TC] switch to TC.

EXTERNAL.

play.
Or set the LCD screen to enlarged status display screen.
X See page 29.

P

IN

TC IN

Operation

1. Set the external time code generator and operate it.

• The built-in time code generator synchronizes with the
input external time code data.
“L” lights up in the STATUS 1 screen of LCD screen or
viewfinder. ”L” also lights up when the LCD screen is in
enlarged character display.

STATUS 1 screen

CH2-AUDIO OUT-CH1 VIDEO

IEEE 1394

Lights up

• “L” blinks when the time code cannot be synchronized.

2. The bu ilt-in time code generator continues to run even if

the external time code generator is disconnected after
synchronization.

CAUTION

If a time code generator is connected or disconnected dur­ing recording, servo lock will be disturbed.

 When connecting multiple devices and assigning one

as the master unit and others as slave units

If there is only one slave unit, connect as shown below.
If there are multiple slave units, input external synchroniza­tion signals to all GENLOCK/AUX IN terminals from the syn­chronization signal generator.

Master unit

CH2-AUDIO OUT-CH1 VIDEO

IEEE 1394

GENLOCK IN

VIDEO OUT

TC OUT

Enlarged display screen

Slave unit

TC IN

Lights up

CH2-AUDIO OUT-CH1 VIDEO

IEEE 1394

48

49

PREPARATIONS FOR OPERATION

Screen Adjustment

LCD monitor direction, angle, screen brightness, etc. can be
adjusted.

Adjusting the Direction and Angle of the
LCD monitor

• With the LCD door in the open condition, rotate the LCD
door.

• It can be turned 180° in upward direction and 90° in down­ward direction.
When turned 180° upward direction, the LCD monitor can
be viewed from the lens side (vertically inverted image).

PEAKING volume

LCD BRIGHT
button

L

C

D
B
R

IG

H
T

­+

C

A
M

/V

TR

A
U

D

IO
S

E
L

E
C
T

T

C

C

H-

1

CH

-2

D

A

IS

U

PLA

T

O

Y

GE
NE.

M

TC

A
N

U

F
R
EE

UB

R
EC
R
EG

180° up

Adjusting the LCD monitor

• PEAKING:
Adjusts the contour of the LCD monitor.

• LCD BRIGHT:
Adjusts the brightness of the LCD monitor.

Adjustments are made on the LCD/VF[2/4] menu screen.
X Seepage90.

• LCD MIRROR MODE:
Sets the LCD monitor to display mirrored images when
shooting facing the subject.

Adjustments are made on the LCD/VF[4/4] menu screen.
X Seepage92.

• LCD CONTRAST:
Adjusts the contrast of the LCD monitor.

• BLACK & WHITE:
Sets the LCD monitor and viewfinder to black and white
display.

EN

90° down

LCD lock release lever

Viewfinder Adjustment

Direction of the Viewfinder

Adjust the position and angle of the viewfinder.

Diopter Adjustment

Rotate the eyepiece focusing ring until the viewfinder screen
image is clearly visible.

Adjustment of the Viewfinder Screen

• PEAKING:
Adjusts the contour of the LCD monitor and the viewfinder
screen.

•VF BRIGHT:
Adjusts the brightness of the viewfinder screen.

Eyepiece focusing ring

VF BRIGHT volume

PEAKING volume

Sliding securing ring

Adjustments are made on the LCD/VF[4/4] menu screen.
X See page 92.

• VF CONTRAST:
Adjusts the contrast of the viewfinder screen.

• BLACK & WHITE:
Sets the LCD monitor and viewfinder to black and white
display.

MEMO

The screen size of the viewfinder can be changed by
selecting the desired size with the ASPECT item on the
VIDEO FORMAT[1/2] menu screen (4:3 or 16:9).

Eyepiece

Viewfinder mount base

Back Focus Adjustment

It is only necessary to perform this when the lens is attached
for the first time or when focusing is not correct in both the
telephoto and wide-angle positions.

• It is easier to adjust back focus when the subject is more
than 3 meters from the camera.
The optimal subject for this adjustment is a Siemens star
chart.

4, 6

3

5

1

2 7, 8, 10

Siemens star chart

1. Set the IRIS mode switch to M (Manual).

2. Set the zoom mode to M (Manual).

3. Open the iris by turning the iris ring.

If the illumination is too strong, reduce it or move to a
darker place.

4. Turn the zoom lever until the lens is at the maximum tele-

photo position.

5. Bring the subject into focus.

6. Set the lens to maximum wide-angle.

7. Lo osen the back focus ring retaining knob.

8. View the same sub ject and adjust the back focus ring for

the best possible focus.

9. Repeat steps 4. through 8. about three times for fine

adjustment until the subject remains in focus in both the
telephoto position and the wide-angle position.

10.Tighten the back focus ring retaining knob to secure the

ring.

50

51

PREPARATIONS FOR OPERATION

White Balance Adjustment

Since the color of light (color temperature) varies depending on
the light source, it is necessary to re-adjust the white balance
when the main light source illuminating the subject changes.

White Balance Adjustment

Two kinds of white balance adjustment results can be stored
in memories AUTO A and AUTO B.

Adjustment procedure

1. Set the following switches.

• Set the POWER switch to ON.

• Set the IRIS mode switch of the lens to A (Auto).

• Set the FULL AUTO switch to OFF.

2. Set the ND filter switch according to the current lighting.

3. Set the WHT.BAL switch to A or B.

4. Place a wh ite object near the center of the screen under

the same lighting conditions as the target subject and
zoom in to fill the screen with white.

5. Press the AWB (Auto White Balance) button.

“AUTO WHITE A, B OPERATION” is displayed in the view­finder while the auto white balance adjustment circuit operates.
When correct white balance is obtained, the approximate
color temperature is displayed together with “AUTO
WHITE A, B OK” for about 5 seconds.

Iris mode switch (7 on page 10)

ND filter

WHT.BAL
switch

AWB button

MEMO

Fine-tune red and blue to match the white adjusted in white
balance in WHITE PAINT<R>/<B> on the WHITE BAL­ANCE menu screen. X See page 85.

Error messages

If the adjustment ends abnormally, an error message, as
described below, blinks for about 5 seconds.

• NG: OBJECT (Improper object)
Displayed when there is not enough white color on an
object or the color temperature is not suitable.
Replace the color temperature conversion filter or use
another white object and re-adjust the white balance.

POWER switch

• ERROR: LOW LIGHT (Insufficient illumination)
Displayed when the illumination is dim. Increase the illumi­nation and then re-adjust the white balance.

• ERROR: OVER LIGHT (Excessive illumination)
Displayed when the light is excessively bright. Decrease
the illumination and then re-adjust the white balance.

During operation Result message

Improper object Insufficient illumination

Excessive illumination

CAUTION

• Do not adjust using any highly reflective objects, such as
metal, etc., as this may result in improper white balance
adjustment.

• The FAW (Full Auto White balance) function cannot pro­vide optimum white balance with a subject outside the
FAW adjustment range, for example when it contains
only a single color or not enough white color.

• The accuracy of the FAW (Full Auto White balance) is
inferior to that of the Auto white balance.

• When the pow er is turned on with the FAW mode
selected, it takes about 10 seconds for the FAW adjust­ment to be completed.
Do not shoot within this interval.

Full Auto White Balance (FAW)

The FAW function adjusts the white balance value automati­cally as the lighting condition changes.

This mode is convenient when you have no time to adjust the
white balance or when the camera is moved frequently in
and out of places under different lighting conditions.
 Setting procedure

The FAW function can be activated with the FAW item on
the SWITCH MODE menu screen. The FAW function can
be allocated to one of the white balance switching
switches A, B, or PRESET.
X Seepage86.

White Shading Adjustment

Even if white balance is achieved in the middle of the screen,
it may not be achieved at the top and bottom of the screen.
Greens and magentas may be colored. This is due to char­acteristics of the lens. Correcting this phenomenon is called
White Shading Adjustment.
Perform this after adjusting white balance.
White shading adjustment is performed on the WHITE BAL­ANCE menu screen.

1. Display the WHITE BALANCE menu screen.

Follow the steps in “Setting Menu Screens” on page 75
and proceed as follows.
MENUrCAMERA PROCESS[1/2]rCAMERA PRO­CESS[2/2]rADVANCE PROCESSrWHITE BALANCE

Setting in the WHITE BALANCE screen is performed as fol­lows.

 Selecting an item
Turn the SHUTTER dial to align the cursor (j) with the
desired item, and press the SHUTTER dial.

• The item is selected and the setting value blinks.
 Changing the setting va lue
Turn the SHUTTER dial to change the blinking value. When
the SHUTTER dial is pressed, the value stops blinking and
the setting is changed.

2. Perform the above steps to set SHADING to MANUAL.

3. Select LEVEL(R), LEVEL(G), LEVEL(B) and press the

SHUTTER dial.

• The setting value for the selected LEVEL blinks and
becomes available for changing.

4. Change the setting values for LEVEL(R), LEVEL(G), and

LEVEL(B) with the SHUTTER dial while referring to the
monitor.
When setting values are increased, colors at the bottom
of the screen are suppressed and the top is enhanced.
LEVEL(R): Adjusts reds.
LEVEL(G): Adjusts greens.
LEVEL(B): Adjusts blues.
<Range: -128 to +127>

5. Press the SHUTTER dial after changing the setting val-

ues to save in the memory.

6. Press the STATUS button to return to the normal screen.

7. When w hite shading adjustment is completed, adjust

white balance again.
X See “White Balance Adjustment” on page 52.

52

53

SETTING AND ADJUSTMENTS BEFORE SHOOTING

4. Turn the SHUTTER dial, change the se tting and push the

Setting the Video Format

Set the video format using the FRAME RATE item and the
REC item on the VIDEO FORMAT menu screen.

Setting the FRAME RATE Item

1. Press the STATUS button for at least 1 second.

• The TOP MENU screen is displayed.

SHUTTER dial

USER 3USER 2USER 1

SHUTTER

ND FILTER

2

1

MENU

STATUS

STATUS button

2. Turn the SHUTTER dial and bring the cursor (K) to the

VIDEO FORMAT.. item and press the SHUTTER dial.

• The VIDEO FORMAT[1/2] menu screen is displayed.

3. Turn the SHUTTER dial and bring the cursor (K) to the

FRAME RATE item and press the SHUTTER dial.

• The setting for the selected item flashes and can be
changed.
“CHANGE THE SYSTEM” is displayed on the screen.

5. Push the SHUTTER dial.

Setting the REC Item

Set the REC item using the same steps as for the FRAME
RATE item.

MEMO

• If you change the FRAME RATE item setting, the system

• The synchronous video signal is momentarily disturbed

• We recommend the following settings for REC item (in

SHUTTER dial.

• The setting stops flashing and is temporarily set.

• Move the cursor (K) to the EXECUTE item and EXE-

CUTE flashes.

• “REBOOT! SYSTEM CHANGE” is displayed on the
screen and after a few seconds the system is reboo­ted.

is rebooted.

when the REC item setting is switched.

HDV format).
When recording images with a lot of motion:
Set to HDV60p or HDV50p
When recording images with little motion:
Set to HDV30p or HDV25p

Camera Settings

1. Set the switch positions.

A. [GAIN] switch: Set to L ( 0 dB).
B. [WHT. BAL] (Auto White Balance) switch: Set to A or

B.

2. Set the lens’ iris mode switch to “A” (Auto iris side).

3. Select the ND filter.

ND FILTER Suitable Location

OFF OFF Indoor s, dark outdoors

1 1/4ND Outdoors under clear sky

2 1/16ND Outdoors under extremely clear sky

4. Set the shutter speed to OFF with the SHUTTER dial.

VTR indicator

VF BRIGHT

4.

3.

1.

USER 3USER 2USER 1

ND FILTER

2

1

MENU

STATUS

WHT.BAL

AUTO

AUDIO
LEVEL

CH-1 CH-2

A

ON

OFF

B

POWER

REC

LCD BRIGHT

CAM/VTR

-

+

TC

AUDIO SELECT

GENE.

CH-2

DISPLAY

CH-1

FREE

TC

AUTO

REC

MANU

UB

AUTO

REGEN

CAM/VTR button

Screen Size (4:3/16:9)
Mode Selection

The screen size of recorded images can be selected with the
ASPECT item on the VIDEO FORMAT[1/2] menu screen.
X Seepage78.

• To record using the standard screen, set ASPECT to 4:3.

• To record using the 16:9 screen, set ASPECT to 16:9.

ASPECT item

4:3 4:3 TV

16:9 TV

4:3 TV16:9

[SQUEEZE]

4:3 TV

[LETTER]

16:9 TV

• In DV mode, selection of SQUEEZE and LETTER is not
possible. The screen display mode becomes SQUEEZE.

MEMO

• When you set the REC item on the VIDEO FORMAT[1/2]
menu to HDV format, the ASPECT item is fixed at 16:9
and “[16:9]” is displayed.

• If the above applies, you can set to display the image in
the style of 4:3 televisions.
X See “DOWN CON. [HDV]” on page 78.

• In the SAFETY ZONE item on the LCD/VF[1/4] menu
screen, you can display the safety zone for a standard
screen as well as a 16:9 screen in the viewfinder or LCD
monitor.
X See page 89.

• When the ASPECT item is set to 4:3, the screen that is
displayed may differ depending on the 16:9 television
you are using.

54

55

SETTING AND ADJUSTMENTS BEFORE SHOOTING

MEMO

Audio Input Signal Selec­tion

The GY-HD250/GY-HD251 is provided with the INPUT1 con­nector and the INPUT2 connector for audio input.
Select the audio from the INPUT1 connector or the INPUT2
connector using the CH-2 INPUT switch for the audio to be
recorded in CH-2.

Selecting the CH-2 channel input
connector

Select using the CH-2 INPUT switch.
INPUT1 : Inputs the audio from the INPUT1 connector

INPUT2 : Inputs the audio from the INPUT2 connector

AUDIO INPUT
switch

MEMO

The audio from the INPUT1 connector is also input into CH­1 regardless of the setting.

into CH-2.

into CH-2.

CH-2 INPUT switch

You can select the normal input level for MIC and MIC+48V
in the INPUT1, 2 MIC REF. item on the AUDIO/MIC[1/2]
menu screen.

Adjusting Audio during Recording

For each audio channel, use the CH-1/CH-2 AUDIO
SELECT switch to select whether the audio level adjustment
should be set to AUTO mode or MANUAL mode.

 Adjusting the audio input level control
The audio input level can be adjusted manually when the GY­HD250/GY-HD251 is in the record, record-standby or stop mode.

1. Set the CH -1/CH-2 AUDIO SELECT switch of the chan-

CH-1 audio input
level volume

2. Rotate the aud io input level control corresponding to the

Selecting the audio signal input

Select the sound to be input to the INPUT1 or INPUT2 con­nector using the AUDIO INPUT switch.
The setting is made for each of INPUT1 or INPUT2 connector.

LINE : Set to this position when connected to audio

MIC : Set to this position when using a dynamic

MIC+48V : Set to this position when a microphone (phan-

equipment, etc.
The reference input level is +4 dBs.

microphone.

tom microphone) requiring +48 V DC power
supply is connected.

CAUTION

When connecting a component that does not require +48 V
power supply, make sure that the switch is not set to
MIC+48V before the component is connected.

nel whose audio level that you want to adjust manually to
MANU.

Monitor
speaker

MONITOR SELECT
switch

MONITOR
volume

audio input level to be adjusted.

• Adjust so that the peak level does not exceed the –3 dB
point when a loud sound is input.

FULL AUTO switch

VF BRIGHT

USER 3USER 2USER 1

ND FILTER

2

1

MENU

STATUS

WHT.BAL

AUTO

AUTO
AUDIO
LEVEL

CH-1 CH-2

ON

OFF

POWER

REC

CH-2 audio input level
volume

STATUS 1 screen

Indicator level (reference)

LCD BRIGHT

CAM/VTR

-

+

TC

AUDIO SELECT

CH-2

DISPLAY

CH-1

TC

AUTO
MANU

UB

CH-1/CH-2
AUDIO SELECT switch

Audio level

GENE.

FREE
REC
REGEN

MEMO

• When AUDIO LIMITER in the AUDIO/MIC[1/2] menu
screen is set to ON, the AUDIO LIMITER functions in
manual adjust mode. Recording level is suppressed
when excessive audio is input.
X See “AUDIO LIMITER” on page 87.

• The reference level for audio recorded on the tape can
be set with the AUDIO REF. LEVEL item on the AUDIO/
MIC menu screen. (–20 dB or –12 dB) The level will
change for both CH-1 and CH-2.

CAUTION

• When the AUDIO I NPUT switch is set to MIC, be sure to
check that the microphone is connected to the INPUT1/2
connector. If the microphone is not connected, increasing the
audio level could cause noise from the input connector to be
recorded on the tape. When the microphone is not con­nected to the INPUT1/2 connector, set the AUDIO INPUT
switch to “LINE” or turn down the audio level control.

• In the FULL AUTO mode, the audio level volume cannot
be adjusted with the audio level controls on the CH-1 and
CH-2.

Monitoring Audio during Recording

The audio input during recording, in record-pause or stop
mode can be monitored through the monitoring speaker or
earphone.

PHONES jack

• Select the audio channel to be monitored using the MONI­TOR SELECT switch.

CH-1 : The sound i nput to the CH-1 channel is output.
BOTH : The sound input to the CH-1 and CH-2 chan-

nels is output mixed.

CH-2 : The sound i nput to the CH-2 channel is output.

• The MONITOR volume control adjusts the monitoring vol­ume.

• The loudspeaker or earphone outputs an alarm tone in the
case of an abnormal condition occurring in this device.
An alarm tone is also output when the tape end is reached
or when the battery is running down.
* Do not increase the audio monitoring volume exces-

sively; otherwise howling with the camera microphone
may occur.

MEMO

• When connecting a stereotype earphone, make the fol­lowing settings to output stereo sound.

1Set the MONITOR SELECT switch to BOTH.
2

Set the AUDIO MONITOR item on the AUDIO/MIC[2/2]
menu screen to STEREO.

• When AUDIO MONITOR item on the AUDIO/MIC[2/2]
menu screen is set to “STEREO”, only the audio of CH-1
is output from the monitoring speaker.

• The volume of the alarm tone is set with the ALARM VR
LEVEL item on the OTHERS[1/2] menu screen. (OFF/
LOW/MIDDLE/HIGH)

56

57

SHOOTING OPERATION

Basic Recording Opera­tion

1. Set the POWER switch to ON.

• This device turns on in camera mode.

2. Start recording.

Press the REC/VTR trigger button on the GY-HD250/GY­HD251 to start recording.
Once recording has started, the FRONT TALLY lamp and
BACK TALLY lamp light red.

POWER switch

VTR trigger button

FOCUS ASSIST button

REC trigger button

FOCUS ASSIST
button

RET button

FRONT TALLY lamp

REC trigger button

BACK TALLY lamp

MEMO

The way the FRONT TALLY and the BACK TALLY lamps
flash differ depending on what you set in the FRONT
TALLY and BACK TALLY items on the OTHERS[1/2] menu
screen. X Seepage96.

CAUTION

• This device enters the stop mode automatically at TAPE
END. If this mode continues for 3 minutes, t he mode
switches to the tape protect mode.

X

See “OTHERS[1/2] Menu Screen” on page 96.

(LONG PAUSE TIME item)

• If the REC/VTR trigger button is pressed very quickly
and repeatedly, or the POWER switch is moved immedi­ately after the trigger button is pressed, the GY-HD250/
GY-HD251 may not enter the record mode.
To remedy this condition set the POWER switch to OFF
and wait for 5 seconds or more before turning the power
on again.

• A neat transition to the next recorded scene cannot be
guaranteed if a recording is ended by turning the
POWER switch or DC power supply OFF, or by removing
the battery pack.

• Trial-shooting is always recommended before recording
important events to confirm the recording is satisfactory.

• The microphone may pick up the sound of the lens’ iris if
the iris is changed abruptly or the iris is manually moved
abruptly during recording.

About the QUICK REC START Mode

If the REC/VTR trigger button is pressed immediately after
the videocassette is inserted, the mode becomes the
QUICK REC START mode that enables quick start of
recording.
However, when shooting starts in the middle of the tape, a
blank space appears as the new scene will not be linked
smoothly with the previous image.
Also, the time code does not continue. (Some overlap may
also occur.)

About the Focus Assist Function

When you press this button during shooting, the area of
focus is displayed in blue, red or green, making it easy to
focus accurately.
X See “LCD/VF[1/4] Menu Screen” on page 89.
You can also set this function from the RET button.
X See “SWITCH MODE Menu Screen” on page 86. (LENS
RET item)
When FOCUS ASSIST on the LCD/VF[1/4] menu screen is
set to ACCU-FOCUS, ACCU FOCUS functions with FOCUS
ASSIST. This makes focusing with shallower depth of field
easier. ACCU FOCUS automatically turns OFF after approxi­mately 10 seconds. X See page 89

If the Record-Standby Mode Contin­ues

Setting the time before the tape protection mode is engaged
The time before the tape protection mode is engaged from
the record-standby mode can be set to 5 minutes or 3 min­utes with the LONG PAUSE TIME item on the OTHERS[1/2]
screen menu. X See page 96.

When the record-standby mode has continued for about 5
minutes or 3 minutes, the GY-HD250/GY-HD251 automati­cally stops drum rotation in order to protect the tape. (Tape
protect mode)

In the tape protect mode, STOP is shown as the VTR
mode indication on the LCD monitor and in the viewfinder
screen. (STATUS 1 screen)

VTR mode indication

 To start recording from the tape protect mode, press the

REC/VTR trigger button.

• The drum starts rotating, and recording starts after
about 3 seconds.

 To return to the record-standby mode from the tape protect

mode, press the RET button.

CAUTION

This function does not work when using RET button is used
as FOCUS ASSIST button.

Checking Recorded Contents in
Record-Standby Mode (Recording
Check Function)

This function is available only when the GY-HD250/GY­HD251 is in the standby mode.
In standby mode, about 5 seconds of the last part of the con­tent recorded in DV format can be played back, and about 7
seconds when the content was recorded in HDV format can
be played back.

• The recorded contents can be checked on the LCD moni­tor, in the viewfinder or on a monitor connected to the
video signal output connectors.

1. In the record-standby mode, press the RET button on the

camera lens section.

1. RET button

• The tape rewinds and about 6 seconds of the content
recorded in DV format is played back, and about 8 sec­onds of the content recorded in HDV format is played
back. After playback, this device returns to standby
mode at the position on the tape where the RET button
was pressed.

 If you continue to hold down the RET button, up to abo ut

18 seconds of content recorded in DV format and up to
about 20 seconds of content recorded in HDV format can
be rewound and played back.

• Pressing the REC/VTR trigger button during playback
will put this device in REC standby mode. The camera
will automatically return to recording mode after play­back.

CAUTION

• This function does not work when using RET button is
used as FOCUS ASSIST button.

• This function does not work when the GY-HD250/GY­HD251 is in the stop mode.

• During recording check, the following indication will
appear if the error rate increases due to head clogging,
etc.
“HEAD CLEANING REQUIRED!” is shown on the LCD
monitor or in the viewfinder. (When the STATUS 0, 1, 4
screen is displayed.)

58

59

SHOOTING OPERATION

HEADER REC Function

When the REC/VTR trigger button is pressed while the STOP button is pressed, this function first records the color bar video and
the test tone (1 kHz sine-wave) of the built-in signal generator at the beginning of the tape. Then it records the black video signal
and the mute audio signal for the duration specified in advance. When the recording is completed, this device enters the Record­Standby mode. The time code value at the Record-Standby position becomes the time code specified in advance. (HEADER
REC function)

• Settings related to the HEADER REC function, such as whether the HEADER REC function should be enabled, the HEADER
REC execution duration, and the time code value setting when the HEADER REC recording is completed, etc., are made on
the HEADER REC menu screen.

• The HEADER REC function is enabled when TCG SOURCE on the TC/UB/CLOCK menu screen is set to INTERNAL.

• The HEADER REC function is executed under the following circumstances:
CAM/VTR button: Set to CAM mode.

In the Record-Standby or Stop mode

Tape beginning

(Example) 30 sec (Example) 30 sec

Color bar video signal
Test tone (1 kHz)
(Setting range: 0 to 99 sec)

Time code, user’s bits recording Time code, user’s bits recording

Time code:
The value specified on the HEADER
REC menu screen- HEADER REC time.
(Example) 23:59:00:00

HEADER REC

Black video signal
Mute audio (No sound)
(Setting range: 0 to 99 sec)

User’s bits:
The value specified for the UB
DATA item on the HEADER REC
menu screen.

 HEADER REC menu screen contents

Item Function/Initial Setting

START KEY Sets whether the HEADER REC operation should be executed when the REC/VTR trigger button is pressed while the

TC DATA Sets the time code value for the point when the Record-Standby mode is engaged following completion of HEADER

UB DATA Sets the user’s bits of the HEADER REC section.

BARS TIME Sets the duration (seconds) in which the color bar signal and test tone (1 kHz) is recorded during HEADER REC. (1-sec

BLACK TIME Sets the duration (seconds) in which the black signal is recorded during HEADER REC. (1-sec steps)

PAGE BACK The TC/UB/CLOCK menu screen returns when the SHUTTER dial is pressed.

STOP button is pressed.
DISABLE : HEADER REC operation is not executed.
STOP+REC : HEADER REC operation is executed.

REC.
EXECUTE : Confirms the set time code.
ZERO PRESET: Resets all time codes to zero “0”.
CANCEL : Clears the set time code.
The frame mode is set depending on the setting in the DROP FRAME item on the TC/UB/CLOCK menu screen.
* The time code value at the point when the Record-Standby mode is engaged may differ some frames from the value

set for this item.

EXECUTE : Confirms the set user’s bits.
ZERO PRESET: Resets all user’s bits data to zero “0”.
CANCEL : Clears the set user’s bits.

MEMO

The user’s bits for the normal recording section are set on the TC/UB/CLOCK menu screen.

steps)
[Initial Setting: 0SEC - 30SEC - 99SEC]

[Initial Setting: 0SEC - 30SEC - 99SEC]

Record-Standby mode

Normal recording

Time code:
The value specified on the HEADER
REC menu screen.
(Example) 00:00:00:00

User’s bits:
The value specified for the UB
PRESET item on the TC/UB/
CLOCK menu screen.
(only when set to REC RUN or
FREE RUN mode)

How to set the HEADER REC menu screen

1. Display the HEADER REC menu screen.

1Select the TC/UB/CLOCK.. item on the TOP MENU

screen.

2Select the HEADER REC item on the TC/UB/CLOCK

menu screen.

TC/UB/CLOCK menu screen

HEADER REC menu screen

2. Setting the HEADER REC menu screen.

1Select the menu item.

Rotate the SHUTTER dial to align the cursor (K) with
the item to be set, and then press the SHUTTER dial.

• The setting area of the selected item starts blinking.

2Changing the setting value.

Rotate the SHUTTER dial to change the setting, and
then press the SHUTTER dial.

Cursor Item Set value

 In the case of the TC DATA item and the UB DATA

item, the blinking digit position moves when the SHUT­TER dial is pressed. When the SHUTTER dial is
rotated, the value of the blinking digit changes. After all
the digits have been set and the SHUTTER dial is
pressed, EXECUTE starts blinking. Press the SHUT­TER dial once more to confirm the set value.

3. To terminate the setting, press the STATUS button.

Executing the HEADER REC Function

The START KEY item on the HEADER REC menu screen
should be set to STOP+REC.

1. Load the cassette and engage the Record-Standby mode

or the Stop mode.

2. While pressing the STOP button, press the REC/VTR

trigger button.

• The tape automatically rewinds to the beginning, and
HEADER REC operation starts from the beginning of
the tape.
After HEADER REC recording is performed for the

specified duration only, the Record-Standby mode is
engaged automatically.

• During HEADER REC recording, “HEADER REC” is
shown (blinking) on the LCD monitor and in the view­finder.

During HEADER REC

• The menu screen is not displayed during HEADER REC
recording.

3. After HEADER REC recording is complete d and the

Record-Standby mode is engaged, normal recording
starts when you press the REC/VTR trigger button.

• When the TC GENE. switch is set to either REC or
REGEN, the time code value at the start of the
HEADER REC menu screen.

MEMO

• To stop during HEADER REC operation, press the REC/
VTR trigger button or the STOP button.

• The HEADER REC menu screen cannot be opened dur­ing HEADER REC recording.

• HEADER REC operation is accepted even during load­ing of the cassette tape.

• The test tone (1 kHz sine-wave) recorded in the color bar
section will be recorded unrelated to the setting for the
TEST TONE item on the AUDIO/MIC[1/2] menu screen.

• The time code preset on the TC/UB/CLOCK menu
screen becomes invalid when HEADER REC recording
is performed.

• The user’s bits following completion of HEADER REC
recording will be the user’s bits value set on the TC/UB/
CLOCK menu screen.

• The running of the time code following completion of
HEADER REC recording will be in accordance with the
setting of the TC GENE. switch.
FREE RUN : Continuous running.
REC RUN or REGEN: Runs only during REC.

• Camera images are not output to the LCD monitor, view­finder or video output during REW mode when the
HEADER REC operation begins.

60

61

PLAYBACK MODE

Playback Procedure

Recorded pictures can be viewed in the viewfinder, or on the
LCD monitor, or on the monitor connected to the video output
connector.

STOP button PLAY/STILL button

REW button FF button

MEMO

The GY-HD250/GY-HD251 can play back the following two
types of videocassettes:

• MiniDV videocassette

• DVCAM videocassette
Tapes recorded in the LP mode cannot be played back.

1. Set the POWER switch to ON.

2. Set this device to the VTR mode.

Press the CAM/VTR button to turn on the VTR indicator.
* Playb ack is also possible in the Camera mode.

Playback operation becomes possible when the STOP
button is pressed to set the VTR operation mode indi­cator to indicate STOP.

3. Load the recorded videocassette correctly.

• When the videocassette is loaded, this device enters
the Stop mode.

4. Open the operation cover on the upper section of this

device.
Slide the operation cover to the side to open.

5. Press the PLAY/STILL button.

• Playback starts.

6. Press the PLAY/STILL button to stop playback tempo-

rarily.

• This device enters the still mode.

7. To re-start playback, press the PLAY/STILL button.

8. To stop playback or the still mode, press the STOP but-

ton.

MEMO

• In the VTR mode, the camera image is not output on the
LCD monitor, in the viewfinder or through the video out­put connector.

• When the still picture mode or stop mode has continued
for a while, this device automatically switches to the tape
protect mode.

Tape protect mode : Drum rotation is stopped in order to

• Noise may appear in the picture in the still mode.

protect the tape.

• When the automatic tracking function is activated at the
start of the playback mode, digital noise may appear in
the playback image.

• This device does not allow manual tracking adjustment.

• When playing back a tape that was recorded on another
unit, digital noise may appear during playback.

• Following loading of the tape, the built-in head cleaner
will emit a sound while operating. This does not indicate
a malfunction.

• The data recorded for the date and time or time code on
the tape can be shown on the screen. To enable or dis­able the display is selected on the menu screen:

Display of date and time : TIME/DATE menu screen
Display of time code : LCD/VF[1/2] menu screen

Fast-Forward, Rewind

 Press the FF button in the stop mode to fast forward the

tape. Press the REW button in the stop mode to rewind
the tape. (VTR mode only)
* “SWITCH TO VTR MODE” is displayed and the function

does not work if the “FF” or “REW” buttons are pressed
when Camera mode is in the stop mode.

 Press the STOP button to stop fast forwarding or rewind-

ing.

MEMO

• When the tape approaches the end during fast forward­ing or rewinding, the tape speed decelerates to protect
the tape.

• The time required for fast forwarding and rewinding may
become longer when used in a cold environment. This is
not a malfunction.

Search

 Press the FF button in the play mode or stil l mode to

search the tape in the forward direction. Playback takes
place while fast forwarding.
Pressing the REW button executes search of the tape in
the reverse direction. Playback takes place while rewind­ing.
(Each press on the button switches the speed to ×2, ×5,
and ×10.)

 Press the PLAY/STILL button to resume normal playback.
 Press the STOP button to stop.

MEMO

• To output sound during the search, set the SEARCH
AUDIO [DV] item on the AUDIO menu screen to ON.

• Block noise may appear in the picture or the image may
freeze during the search.

1. Disp lay the AUDIO menu screen.

Outputting Audio

Setting

Confirm that the GY-HD250/GY-HD251 is in the VTR mode.
(VTR indicator: On)

MONITOR

VTR indicator

SELECT switch

VF BRIGHT

USER 3USER 2USER 1

SHUTTER
dial

STATUS
button

 Earphone terminal output audio

Audio output is as shown in the table below depending on
the MONITOR SELECT switch and AUDIO MONITOR
and PB AUDIO CH [DV] settings on the AUDIO menu
screen.

ND FILTER

2

1

STATUS

WHT.BAL

ON

OFF

POWER

MONITOR

SELECT

CH-1 - L/R: CH1 L/R: CH1+CH3 L/R: CH3

BOTH MIX

CH-2 - L/R: CH2 L/R: CH2+CH4 L/R: CH4

LCD BRIGHT

-

MENU

AUTO

AUDIO
LEVEL

CH-1 CH-2

REC

AUDIO menu screen

+

AUDIO SELECT

CH-2

CH-1

AUTO
MANU

AUTO

PB AUDIO CH [DV]

AUDIO MONITOR

STEREO

CAM/VTR

TC

GENE.

DISPLAY

FREE

TC

REC

UB

REGEN

CAM/VTR button

L/R: CH1+CH2
L: CH1 R:CH2

Select the AUDIO item on the TOP MENU screen.

2. Set the AUDIO menu screen.

• PB AUDIO CH [DV] Items
CH1/2 : To reproduce the sound (CH-1, CH-2)

MIX : To reproduce the sound recorded during

CH3/4 : To reproduce th e sound after-recorded

PB AUDIO CH [DV]

CH1/2 CH1 CH2

MIX CH1+CH3 CH2+CH4

CH3/4 CH3 CH4

For HDV format, audio is output to CH1 and CH2 no matter
the settings.

3. Either of th e following operations returns you to the nor-

mal screen.

• Press the STATUS button

or

• Return to the TOP MENU screen, select the EXIT item

and press the SHUTTER dial.

recorded during shooting.

shooting (CH-1, CH-2) and the after­recorded sound (on CH-3 and CH-4)
simultaneously.

on CH-3 and CH-4.

MEMO

• The DV format is capable of recording up to 4 channels
when the 12-bit, 32 kHz sampling frequency is
employed. The GY-HD250/GY-HD251 records audio on
the two channels CH-1 and CH-2. (4-channel recording
is possible in the case of DV input.)
When the GY-HD250/GY-HD251 is used for playback of
a tape that was recorded on another unit with audio
recorded on the CH-3 and CH-4 channels, the PB
AUDIO CH [DV] item on the AUDIO menu screen must
be set.
After-recording on the CH-3 and CH-4 channels is not
possible.

• The PB AUDIO CH [DV] item is also valid for embedded
audio.

• The sampling frequency for embedded audio is 48 kHz.

CH1/2 M IX CH3/4

L/R: CH1+CH2+CH3+CH4
L: CH1+CH3 R: CH2+CH4

* In HDV format, you can only select the settings within the bold frame.

AUDIO OUT connector

CH-1 CH-2

L/R: CH3+CH4
L: CH3 R: CH4

62

63

USING EXTERNAL COMPONENTS

Connecting the Video
Signal Cables

Connecting the IEEE1394 Cable

To reduce the emission of unwanted radio waves, be sure to
attach the provided clamp filter as shown in the figure below.

• Attach the clamp filter as close to this device as possible,
as shown in the figure.

• Set the IEEE1394 switch on the left panel of this device.
DV : DV format

HDV : HDV format

IEEE1394 switch

Clamp filter

Wind once

CAUTION

When connecting the IEEE1394 cable from/to Camcorder,
VCR and other IEEE1394 device, make sure the following
instructions, otherwise the IEEE1394 circuit device may be
destroyed.

• Turn the power of both devices OFF and connect the
IEEE1394 cable.

• Do not insert incorrectly (in reverse) the IEEE1394 cable
end to IEEE1394 port of both devices.

CH2-AUDIO OUT-CH1 VIDEO

IEEE 1394

IEEE 1394IEEE 1394

Displaying Alarms

• CHANGE 1394 SWITCH
Displayed when the setting for the input/output video format
from the IEEE1394 connector and the setting for the
IEEE1394 switch are different.
Set the IEEE1394 switch so it matches the video format.

CHANGE 1394 SWITCH

Recording Composite
Video Signals from an
External Device

This device features an AUX IN terminal and can record
composite video signals from external devices.

GENLOCK/AUX IN switch

GENLOCK/AUX IN terminal

CH2-AUDIO OUT-CH1 VIDEO

IEEE 1394

Connection

 Input analog composite video signal s from an external

device to the GENLOCK/AUX IN terminal.

MEMO

Input composite video signals with no jitter.
Input level: 1.0V ± 0.3V (p-p)

Setting

 Set this device to camera mode:

If the VTR indicator is lit, press the [CAM/VTR] button and
turn off the indicator.

 Set the GENLOCK/AUX IN switch to AUX IN.
 Set REC on the VIDEO FORMAT[1/2] menu screen as fol-

lows.
U model: DV-60I
E model: DV-50I

 Set SET UP item on the VIDEO FORMAT[2/2] menu

screen as follows. (Only for U model)
ON : Set to this when input analog signals include the

setup signal.

OFF :Set to this when input analog signals do not include

the setup signal.

Operation

 Start and stop recording with the REC/VTR trigger button.

• EE images of input signals are output in DV-60I (U
model) or DV-50I (E model) formats from the various
image output terminals.

CAUTION

• Recording cannot be checked using the lens RET button
when recording external image signals.

• Do not touch GENLOCK/AUX IN switch during record­ing.

Status Screen Display on the LCD Screen
or Viewfinder

• “AUX” is displayed at the top left with signal format (DV60I
or DV50I).

“AUX” display “AUX” display

DV-60I AUX

STATUS 0 screen STATUS 1 screen

DV-60I AUX

12.0

X

• Do not connect the IEEE1394 cable under the condition
of static electricity.

• Turn the power of both devices OFF when changing the
IEEE1394 switch from/to HDV/DV.

64

65

USING EXTERNAL COMPONENTS

Using GENLOCK Func­tions

This device features a GENLOCK IN terminal. Input external
synchronization signals in the GENLOCK IN terminal to syn­chronize camera images or playback images with external
signals.
Additionally, the H (horizontal) and SC (subcarrier) phase
adjustments can be performed on image signals of this
device for external synchronization signals from the GEN­LOCK menu screen.

GENLOCK functions are only valid in Camera mode. They do not
work in VTR mode.

GENLOCK/AUX IN switch

GENLOCK/AUX IN terminal

Connection

 During Standby or Stop mode, input synchronization sig-

nals from a Sync signal generator to the GENLOCK/AUX
IN terminal.
The following synchronization signals are applicable.
SD synchronization signal: BB (Black burst) signals
SMPTE170M (RS-170A)-compliant for NTSC
ITU-R BT.470-6-compliant for PAL
HD synchronization signal: HDTV Tri-sync signals
SMPTE296M-compliant for HD720p
SMPTE274M-compliant for HD1080i

CAUTION

• When the FRAME RATE is set to 60/30 or 24 in the
VIDEO FORMAT[1/2] menu screen, input a 59.94 Hz
synchronization signal (vertical synchronization). 50 Hz/
60 Hz synchronization signals cannot be synchronized.
If the FRAME RATE is set to 50/25, input a 50 Hz syn­chronization signal. 59.94 Hz/60 Hz synchronization sig­nals cannot be synchronized.

• Do not connect or disconnect the cable during recording
or playback.

• When the power is turned on while the external synchro­nization signal is input, a vertical vibration occurs for a
few seconds. This is not a malfunction.

• VTR playback signals with jitter cannot be synchronized
with this device.

Setting

 Set this device to Camera mode.
 Set the GENLOCK/AUX IN switch to GENLOCK.

• When the camera image is locking to external synchro­nization signals, “SYNC LOCKING” is displayed on the
screen. When locking to external synchronization sig­nals is complete, the indication disappears and you can
enter recording mode.

CH2-AUDIO OUT-CH1 VIDEO

IEEE 1394

Synchronized Signals

The synchronized signal differs depending on the input sync
signal.
Refer the table below.

Terminal Video signal

VIDEO Composite SC,H,V,F V V,F

SD Component H,V,F V V,F

HD Component 720p V H,V V

Y/P

HD Component 1080i V,F V H,V,F

B/PR

SD RGB H,V,F V V,F

SD Y/C SC,H,V,F V V,F

SD-SDI H,V,F V V,F

HD/SD-

HD-SDI 720p V H,V V

SDI

HD-SDI 1080i V,F V H,V,F

SC : Subcarrier phase H: Horizontal phase
V : Vertical phase F : Field phase

Adjust SC PHASE and H PHASE in the above table from the
GENLOCK menu screen.

Input sync signal

BB

720p 1080i

Tri-sync

Adjust SC and H PHASE

1. Disp lay the GENLOCK menu screen.

Follow the steps in “Setting Menu Screens” on page 75
and proceed as follows.
MENUrOTHERSrGENLOCK

2. In th e GENLOCK menu screen, select the item to per-

form phase adjustment for and adjust.
SD H PHASE : Adjust the H phase in SD analog signals.

HD H PHASE : Adjust the H phase in HD analog and SD/

SC PHASE : Adjust the SC phase in composite and

For details, refer to “GENLOCK Menu Screen” on
X See page 99.

MEMO

• H PHASE cannot be adjusted during playback or record­ing.

• IEEE1394 output stops while H PHASE is being
adjusted.

• When values for SD H PHASE or HD H PHASE is
changed, the images cannot be produced properly
momentarily. This is not a malfunction.

(During BB signal input)

HD SDI signals. (During Tri-sync signal
input, PHASE of SD analog signals are
simultaneously adjusted in HD H PHASE
item.)

YC signals.

Dubbing with AV Devices

By connecting the video signal output terminal and the
AUDIO OUTPUT terminal on GY-HD250/GY-HD251 to an AV
device, analog signal dubbing is possible.

1. Connect the cabl es.

To reduce the emission of unwanted radio waves, be
sure to attach the provided clamp filter as shown in the
figure below.

• Attach the clamp filter as close to this device as possi­ble, as shown in the figure.

Composite cable
or
Component cable

Signal flow

CH2-AUDIO OUT-CH1 VIDEO

IEEE 1394

AUDIO
OUTPUT
connector

Audio cable

Clamp filter

2. Turn both devices on.

3. Set this device to VTR mode.

Press the CAM/VTR button. The VTR indicator lights.

4. Set the video output.

Set the VIDEO FORMAT menu screen. X See page 77.

Recording unit

Signal flow

VIDEO FORMAT menu screen

• HDV PB OUTPUT item:

Set the video format to be output from the video output
terminal during tape playback.

• PB TAPE item:

Select whether to automatically detect the playback tape
video format or play back only a particular format.
Normally, use the “AUTO” setting.

• OUTPUT TERM. [DV] item:

Set component, RGB or Y/C signals for the output image
signals of the [Y/P

5. Set the audio output. X Seepage63.

Set the AUDIO menu screen. X See page 87.

• PB AUDIO CH [DV] item:

Set the audio channel to be output.

6. Insert the videocassettes.

GY-HD250/GY-HD251 : Insert the recorded videocas-

Recording unit : Insert the videocassette to be

7. Press the PLAY/STILL button on the GY-HD250/GY-

HD251 to start playback.

8. Start recording on the recording unit.

For details, see the instructions to the unit used for
recording.

9. Wh en dubbing is completed.

Stop recording on the recording unit, and then press the
STOP button on the GY-HD250/GY-HD251 to stop play­back.

B/PR] terminal. (Only for DV format)

AUDIO menu screen

sette.

dubbed to.

66

67

USING EXTERNAL COMPONENTS

HDV/DV Dubbing

Connecting the GY-HD250/GY-HD251 to another video com­ponent equipped with HDV/DV connector (IEEE1394 stan­dard) using a IEEE1394 cable (optional) enables dubbing of
digital signals with high picture quality and high-quality
sound.

Using the GY-HD250/GY-HD251 as the
playback unit
(Dubbing to another video)

1. Set the IEEE1 394 switch on the left panel of this device.

DV : When dubbing in DV format
HDV : When dubbing in HDV format

2. Connect the IEEE1394 cable.

3. Turn both devices on.

4. Set this device to VTR mode.

Press the CAM/VTR button. The VTR indicator lights.

1.

IEEE1394 switch

CH2-AUDIO OUT-CH1 VIDEO

IEEE 1394

Signal flow

CAUTION

• Set the IEEE1394 switch on both devices to either HDV
or DV.

• Start recording after making sure that both devices are
properly connected.

Recording unit

2.

IEEE1394 cable

5. Set the PB TAPE item on the VIDEO FORMAT menu

screen. X See page 79.
Select whether to automatically detect the playback tape
video format or play back only a particular format.
Normally, use the “AUTO” setting.

6. Insert a videocassette tape.

GY-HD250/GY-HD251 : Recorded videocassette tape
Recording unit : Videocassette you want to dub

7. Press the PLAY/STILL button on GY-HD250/GY-HD251

to start playback.

8. Start recording on the recording device.

See the recording device user manual for more informa­tion.

9. Wh en dubbing is finished, stop recording on the record-

ing device, press the STOP button on this device, and
stop the playback.

MEMO

• Switch the IEEE1394 switch when this device is OFF.

• When you dub still images, they are low resolution
images. Noise may also enter the audio.

• Operations may differ depending on the features and
specifications of the connected device, and operations or
data exchange may not be possible even if the devices
are connected.

• If noise appears on the screen or the audio cuts out, re­connect the IEEE1394 cable or turn the GY-HD250/GY­HD251 on again.

• If you turn the power to the device connected to the
IEEE1394 connector on and off or switch the video input,
noise may occur in the audio. If you perform this type of
operation, set the speaker volume as low as possible on
the audio device connected to this device.

• Recording may not be possible in some cases even if the
recorder is equipped with a IEEE1394 connector.

VIDEO FORMAT menu screen

When Using the GY-HD250/GY-HD251 as
Recording Unit
(Dubbing From Another Videocassette)

1. Set the IEEE1 394 switch on left side of the GY-HD250/

GY-HD251.

DV : When dubbing in DV format
HDV : When dubbing in HDV format

2. Connect the units with the IEEE1394 cable.

3. Turn ON both units.

4. Place the GY-HD250/GY-HD251 in the VTR MODE.

Press the CAM/VTR button to turn on the VTR indicator.

5. Set the frame rate.

Set the FRAME RATE item (60/30, 50/25, 24) on the
VIDEO FORMAT[1/2] menu to match the HDV/DV signal
frame rate input from the IEEE1394 connector.
X See page 77.

1.

IEEE1394 switch

CH2-AUDIO OUT-CH1 VIDEO

IEEE 1394

Signal flow

CAUTION

• Set the IEEE1394 switch on both devices to either HDV
or DV.

• Start recording after making sure that both devices are
properly connected.

6. Set the time code and user bit recording.

Set the TC DUPLI. item on the TC/UB/CLOCK menu
screen.

OFF : Records the TC/UB set in this

ON : Records the TC/UB for the

Date and time data : Records the data sent from the

MEMO

In HDV format, the UB set in this device is recorded regard­less of the setting.

device.

IEEE1394 input.

playback device in DV format.
Records the data of the internal
clock in HDV format.

Recording unit

2.

IEEE1394 cable

TC/UB

Date and Time

7. Insert the videocassettes.

GY-HD250/GY­HD251
Playback unit : Insert the recorded videocassette.

8. Start playback on the playback unit.

For details, see the instructions to the unit used for play­back.

• The playback picture from the playback unit appears
on the GY-HD250/GY-HD251’s LCD monitor and view­finder screen.

9. Press the REC/VTR trigger button on the GY-HD250/GY-

HD251 to start recording.
 To temporarily pause the recording, press the REC or

VTR trigger button.

 To restart the recording, press the REC or VTR trigger

button again.

10.When dubbing is completed.

Press the REC/VTR trigger button or the STOP button on
the GY-HD250/GY-HD251 to stop recording, and then
stop playback on the playback unit.

MEMO

Depending on the player, sound may not be heard momen­tarily from this device when switching modes from STILL to
PLAY.

: Insert the videocassette to be dubbed

to.

68

69

USING EXTERNAL COMPONENTS

Backup Recording

Backup Recording of the GY-HD250/GY­HD251’s Camera Image and Sound
Through the IEEE1394 Connector

The GY-HD250/GY-HD251’s camera image and sound can
be recorded for backup on another component that is
equipped with IEEE1394 connector.

Connections

Use the GY-HD250/GY-HD251 as the master unit.
Connect the master unit and the backup unit with a
IEEE1394 cable.

1.

IEEE1394 switch

CH2-AUDIO OUT-CH1 VIDEO

IEEE 1394

Master unit
GY-HD250/
GY-HD251

Signal flow

Settings

 Master unit (GY-HD250/GY-HD251)

1. Set the IEEE1 394 switch on left side of the GY-HD250/

GY-HD251.

DV : When backup in DV format
HDV : When backup in HDV format

2. Place in Came ra mode.

3. Set the 1394 REC TRIG. item on the OTHERS[2/2] menu

screen. X See page 97.
For HDV mode, set the BACK SPACE [HDV] item.
X See page 97.

OTHERS[2/2] menu screen

Backup unit

IEEE1394 cable

 Backup unit

• Place in HDV/DV signal input mode.
* Depe nding on the used component, it may be neces-

sary to set “REMOTE SELECT”.

• When BR-HD50 is used, set the Backup Recording
function to OFF.
Also, set REM SEL HDV/DV in the REMOTE[1/2] menu
of the BR-HD50 to ON or LOC+REM.

• Insert the tape and set to STOP or REC PAUSE status.

CAUTION

• Set the IEEE1394 switch on both devices to either HDV
or DV.

• Start recording after making sure that both devices are
properly connected.

• If the RET button is pressed during backup recording,
output from the IEEE1394 terminal is stopped, the image
is switched to the image recorded on this device, inter­rupting the backup recording image.

Operation

Start and stop of recording on the backup unit takes place in
accordance with the operation of the REC/VTR trigger button
on the master unit.
(Depending on the GY-HD250/GY-HD251 or the backup unit,
the image, audio, and/or time code may deviate from what
they should be at the points where the recording is started or
stopped.)

MEMO

• When the backup recording is started, the “TRIGGER
TO DV” or “TRIGGER TO HDV” indication is shown on
the LCD or in the viewfinder for approx. 3 seconds.

• When the Series Recording function of BR-HD50 is
used, the GY-HD250/GY-HD251’s 1394 REC TRIG. item
should be set to OFF.

• If the backup device is equipped with a feature to record
time codes input from the IEEE1394 connector (TC
DUPLICATE feature), time code data the same as on the
master side can be recorded.
If the master unit tape is paused or stopped when the
master unit time code running mode is in REC RUN
mode, the time code for the slave unit stops.

• When using BR-HD50 as a backup device and switching
GY-HD250/GY-HD251 from the playback mode to the
record mode, noise will be noticed on the monitor output
screen of BR-HD50 (backup will be correctly recorded).

Connect a Remote Con­trol Unit (RM-LP55/RM­LP57)

Set camera switch functions with the remote control unit
(RM-LP55/RM-LP57).

Connection

Connect the remote control unit cable to the REMOTE termi­nal.

CH2-AUDIO OUT-CH1 VIDEO

IEEE 1394

REMOTE

RM-LP55

CAUTION

Turn the power OFF when connecting.

Operation

1. Turn the device ON.

2. Turn ON the OPERATE switch on remote control unit to

activate the remote control unit.
See page 72 for details on functions that can be operated
with the remote control unit.

Notes on Using the Remote Control Unit

• When the switch function of this device and the remote
control unit are the same, the remote control switch func­tion is prioritized.

• FOCUS and ZOOM cannot be adjusted with the remote
control unit.

• Shutter speed slightly differs from the value displayed on
this device.

• Shutter Speed in 24p Mode

When this device is in 24p mode, shutter speed cannot be
set to 1/60 (U model) or 1/50 (E model) with the remote
control unit.
Even if shutter speed is set to 1/60 or 1/50 with the remote
control unit when in 24p mode, the shutter speed for the
device is 1/48.

• When H PHASE adjustment is performed with the remote
control unit, only H PHASE of SD signal operates.

• When adjusting H PHASE of SD signal with the remote
control unit, it cannot be set outside the range of SD H
PHASE in the GENLOCK menu screen. X See page 99.

• AUTO WHITE Function
When the device is in VTR mode or during playback or
HEADER REC, the AUTO WHITE function does not work
even if the auto white operation is performed with the RM­LP55 and RM-LP57.
In the case of the RM-LP55, “LOW LIGHT ERROR” is dis­played on the LCD screen of the RM-LP55.

70

71

USING EXTERNAL COMPONENTS

MENU SCREENS

Connect a Remote Control Unit
(RM-LP55/RM-LP57) (Cont’d)

Remote Control Unit Functions List

Function

RM-LP55 RM-LP57

BARS [OFF/ON] qG
CONTOUR [OFF/ON] qG
CONTOUR V/H LEVEL qG
IRIS [MANU/AUTO] qG
IRIS LEVEL qG

IRIS DETECT X
WHT.BAL AUTO1 qG

AUTO WHITE qG

MANUAL WHITE BALANCE R/B
LEVEL

PAINT R/B LEVEL qG
GAIN 0dB qG

NEGA [OFF/ON] X
SHUTTER NORMAL qG

ZOOM q X
FOCUS q X

HI-RESO [OFF/ON] X
MASTER BLACK LEVEL qG

GAMMA [OFF/ON] X

GAMMA MASTER LEVEL X

KNEE MASTER LEVEL X

TITLE [OFF/ON] X

TITLE POSITION X

TITLE CLEAR X
H PHASE qG
SC COARSE [0°/90°/180°/270°] qG

AUTO2 qG

FAW qG

PRESET G

MANU G

6dB qG
9dB qG

12dB qG

LOLUX X

–3dB X

–6dB X

ALC+EEI qG

ALC q X

1/100 qG *
1/120 qG *
1/250 qG

1/500 qG
1/1000 qG
1/2000 qG
1/4000 G

1/10000 G

EEI q X

V.SCAN X

Action

G

1

2

SC FINE qG

RANDOM SHUTTER X

VARIABLE SHUTTER LEVEL X

SLOW SHUTTER LEVEL X

q: Same as RM-LP55 G: Available

: None X: Not available

*1Only when frame rate is 60p, 60i, 30p, or 24p

2

*

Only when frame rate is 50p, 50i, or 25p

Menu Screen Configura­tion

The Menu Screen consists of multiple layers of menu screens as shown below. The menu screen to be set is selected from the
TOP MENU in accordance with the function or purpose.
The items on the menu screens differ with the Camera mode and the VTR mode. The contents of set items are stored in the GY­HD250/GY-HD251’s memory and are retained even when the power is turned off.
The FILE MANAGE menu screen can be used to store the menu setting contents on the GY-HD250/GY-HD251 or SD memory card.
 Camera Mode

TOP MENU screen (CAM)

72

73

MENU SCREENS

Menu Screen Configuration
(Cont’d)

 VTR Mode/IEEE1394 Input Mode

TOP MENU screen (VTR)

Setting Menu Screens

Make the settings while observing the LCD monitor or the
viewfinder screen.
If the ANALOG OUT CHAR. item or SDI OUT CHAR item on
the OTHERS[1/2] screen is set to ON, the menu screen can
also be viewed on a monitor connected to the video signal
output connector.

1. Set the POWER switch to ON.

2. Set the mode of the GY-HD250/GY-HD251 with the CAM/

VTR button. (Camera mode or VTR mode)

3. Press the STATUS button for 1 second or longer.

• The TOP MENU screen appears.

SHUTTER dial

USER1 USER2 USER3 button

USER 3USER 2USER 1

SHUTTER

ND FILTER

2

1

MENU

STATUS

STATUS button

Menu screenCursor

TOP MENU screen

4. Select the menu screen to be set.

Rotate the SHUTTER dial to align the cursor (K) with the
menu screen to be set, and then press the SHUTTER
dial.

• The selected menu screen appears.

5. Select the menu item on the menu screen.

Rotate the SHUTTER dial to align the cursor (K) with the
item to be set, and then press the SHUTTER dial.

• The setting area of the selected item starts blinking,
and the setting can now be made.

6. Cha nge the setting.

Rotate the SHUTTER dial to change the setting, and then
press the SHUTTER dial.

• The setting area stops blinking and the setting is
entered.

 To change multiple items, repeat the procedures in steps

5. and 6. above.

7. Return to the TOP MENU screen.

Rotate the SHUTTER dial to align the cursor (K) with the
PAGE BACK item, and then press the SHUTTER dial.

 To change settings on other menu screens, repeat the

procedures in steps 4. to 7. above.

 To save the set contents in FILE, select the FILE MAN-

AGE menu screen and perform the operations for saving
to file.
X See “FILE MANAGE Menu Screen” on page 100.

8. To return to the normal screen after completing the set-

tings, use either of the following methods.
Press the STATUS button
or
Return to the TOP MENU screen and align the cursor (K)
with the EXIT item, and then press the SHUTTER dial.

MEMO

• While the menu screen is being displayed, the USER1,
USER2 and USER3 buttons can also perform menu
operations.
USER1 button : Raises the cursor (K)/Changes the set-

USER2 button : Lowers the cursor (K)/Changes the set-

USER3 button : Confirms the menu item/Confirms the

• The menu screen is not displayed when switching
between Camera and VTR mode (VTR indicator
flashes).

Item Setting

VIDEO FORMAT[1/2] menu screen

ting

ting

setting

74

75

MENU SCREENS

TOP MENU Screen

Different menu screens are displayed depending on whether the GY-HD250/GY-HD251 is in the Camera mode or in the VTR
mode. In the VTR mode, the CAMERA OPERATION, CAMERA PROCESS and SWITCH MODE menu screens are not dis­played.

Item Function

VIDEO FORMAT.. Displays the menu screen for setting the video format for shooting and playing back video.

CAMERA OPERATION.. Displays a menu screen for setting the operation mode for camera shooting.

CAMERA PROCESS.. Displays a menu screen for adjustments of the picture quality of the camera image.

SWITCH MODE.. Displays the menu screens related to the camera switch functions.

AUDIO/MIC.. Displays a menu screen related to audio.

LCD/VF.. Displays a menu screen for selecting whether to display characters on the LCD monitor or in the viewfinder, and for

TU/UB/CLOCK.. Displays a menu screen for setting the time code, user’s bit data, date and time.

OTHERS.. Displays a menu screen for setting other functions an d to display the hour meter.

FILE MANAGE.. Displays the FILE MANAGE menu screen.

EXIT The normal screen returns when the SHUTTER dial is pressed while the cursor is aligned with this item.

Camera mode: It consists of two screens.
VTR mode : It consists of one screen.

• The cursor (K) does not move to this item when this device is recording.

• This item is only displayed in the Camera mode.

It consists of two screens.
The ADVANCED PROCESS menu screen, WHITE BALANCE menu screen, and SKIN COLOR ADJUST screen can
be displayed through the CAMERA PROCESS menu screen.

• This item is only displayed in the Camera mode.

• The cursor (K) does not move to this item when this device is in VTR mode (PLAY, STL, FWD, REV).

• This item is only displayed when in camera mode.

Camera mode: It consists of two screens.
VTR mode : It consists of one screen.

• In VTR mode, the screen changes to the AUDIO menu screen.

• The cursor (K) does not move to this item when this device is recording.

adjustments of the picture quality of LCD monitor.
Camera mode: It consists of four screens.
VTR mode : It consists of two screens.

The ways that the date and time are recorded together with the display style are set here.
The TIME/DATE menu screen and CLOCK ADJUST screen can be displayed through the TC/UB/CLOCK menu
screen.

• The cursor (K) does not move to this item when this device is recording.

It consists of two screens.

Saves the menu screen settings as a file on this device or an SD memory card, or reads the menu screen settings
saved in the file. It is also possible to reset the menu settings to default settings or initialize (format) an SD memory
card.
X See “FILE MANAGE Menu Screen” on page 100.

• The cursor (K) does not move to this item when VTR is activated.

VIDEO FORMAT[1/2] Menu
Screen

The VIDEO FORMAT menu screen consists of two screens (1/2 screen, 2/2 screen).
In VTR mode, this screen consists of one screen.
* This is not displayed in VTR mode.

Item Function/Setting (bold characters indicate initial settings)

FRAME RATE Sets the frame rate for shooting.

1080I CAMERA* Selects whether or not to output camera images in HDV1080i signals. HDV1080i signals are output from component

REC* Sets the video format for shooting. (Can only be displayed and set in camera mode)

U model
60/30 : Shoots at 480/60i, 720/60p, 720/30p.

50/25 : Shoots at 720/50p, 720/25p.
24 : Shoots at 480/24p (2:3:2:3 pulldown), 480/24p advance mode (2:3:3:2 pulldown), 720/24p.

E model

60/30 : Shoots at 720/60p, 720/30p.
50/25 : Shoots at 576/50i, 720/50p, 576/25p, 720/25p.
24 : Shoots at 720/24p.
CANCEL : Cancels the settings.

EXECUTE : Executes the settings.

MEMO

• If you change the FRAME RATE item setting, the system is rebooted. X See page 54.

• The cursor (K) does not move to this item when this device is in VTR mode or is ejecting a tape.

output of the Y/P
OFF : No HDV1080i signal is output. Output setting of camera images is based on the REC settings below.
ON : HDV1080i signal is output. (60/30 Frame rate: 1080/60i, 50/25 Fra me rate: 1080/50i)

• ON/OFF is set when the SHUTTER dial is pressed.

MEMO

• Tape recording and IEEE1394 output are not available when this is ON.

• REC item cannot be set when this is ON.

• The cursor is positioned on 1080I CAMERA in the VIDEO FORMAT[1/2] menu screen when this is ON.

• When the FRAME RATE is set to 24, this is fixed to OFF.

You can set the following according to the FRAME RATE.

DV-60I DV format Shoots using a 480/60i signal. (U model Only)

HDV-HD30P HDV format Shoots using a 720/30p signal.

HDV-HD50P HDV format Shoots using a 720/50p signal.

HDV-HD25P HDV format Shoots using a 720/25p signal.

DV-50I DV format Shoots using a 576/50i signal. (E model Only)

DV-25P DV format Shoots using a 576/25p signal. (E model Only)

DV-24P DV format Shoots at 480/24p (2:3:2:3 pulldown). (U model Only)

HDV-HD24P HDV format Shoots using a 720/24p signal.

CANCEL : Cancels the settings.

EXECUTE : Executes the settings.

MEMO

• The synchronous video signal is momentarily disturbed when the REC item setting is switched.

• On the E model, the video format is fixed at HDV-HD24P when the FRAME RATE item is set to “24”. “[HDV-

B/PR terminal or HD/SD-SDI output terminal. However, they are not recorded on this device.

480/60i or 576/50i signals are output from the VIDEO OUT terminal.

Setting Description FRAME RATE

60/30HDV-HD60P HDV format Shoots using a 720/60p signal.

50/25

24DV-24PA DV format Shoots at 480/24p (2:3:3:2 pulldown). (U model Only)

HD24P]” is displayed.

76

77

MENU SCREENS

VIDEO FORMAT[1/2] Menu Screen
(Cont’d)

* This is not displayed in VTR mode.

Item Function/Setting (bold characters indicate initial settings)

ASPECT* Sets the screen size for the recording video signal. (Can only be displayed and set in camera mode)

HDV PB OUTPUT When playing back an HDV recorded tape, set video format for component output from the Y/PB/PR terminal or SDI

DOWN CON. [HDV] Set the style to display down-converted images in aspect ratio 4:3.

NEXT PAGE To display the VIDEO FORMAT[2/2] menu screen, move the cursor to this position and press the SHUTTER dial.

PAGE BACK The TOP MENU returns when the SHUTTER dial is pressed with the cursor at this position.

4:3 : Outputs the video with an aspect ratio of 4:3.
16:9 : Outputs the video with an aspect ratio of 16:9.

MEMO

• When the format setting is HDV, the ASPECT item is fixed at 16:9. (“[16:9]” is displayed.)

• The synchronous video signal is momentarily disturbed when the ASPECT item setting is switched.

output from the HD/SD-SDI output terminal.
You can set the following depending on the FRAME RATE of the HDV recorded tape.

NATIVE Outputs the signal being recorded on the tape. 60/30

720P Converts the signa l being recorded on tape to 720p and outputs it. 50/25

1080I Converts the signal being recorded on tape to 1080i and outputs it. 24

NTSC Converts the signal being recorded on tape to 480i and outputs it. 60/30

PAL Converts the signal being recorded on tape to 576i and outputs it. 50/25

The resolution in the vertical direction drops compared to 4:3 video.

Setting Description FRAME RATE

24

MEMO

• If you convert video recorded in HDV format to DV format and output it, the colors may change.

• This item is also applied to EE images when HDV signals are input to the IEEE1394 terminal.

• Fixed at NATIVE during DV recorded tape playback or DV signal input.

SQUEEZE : Image that is squeezed horizontally is displayed.

LETTER : Wide image with the top and bottom blackened is displayed.

MEMO

This setting is only valid in HDV mode.
In DV mode, the style becomes SQUEEZE regardless of the setting of this item.

VIDEO FORMAT[2/2] Menu
Screen

* This is not displayed in VTR mode.

Item Function/Setting (bold characters indicate initial settings)

PB TAPE Selects whether to automatically detect the playback tape video format or play back only a particular format.

HD/SD-SDI OUT Sets whether or not to output SDI (Serial Digital Interface) signals from the HD/SD SDI OUT terminal.

OUTPUT TERM. [DV] Sets the output image format for the Y/P

SET UP Selects whether to add a setup signal to the video signa l output from the video signal output connector.

PAGE BACK When the cursor is in this position, press the SHUTTER dial to the VIDEO FORMAT[1/2] menu screen.

Normally, use the “AUTO” setting.
AUTO : During tape playback, the format signal is switched automatically and played back.
DV : During tape playback, only the part of the tape recorded in DV format is played back.
HDV : During tape playback, only the part of the tape recorded in HDV format is played back.
DVCAM : During tape playback, only the part of the tape recorded in DVCAM format is p layed back.

MEMO

If you play back a tape containing both DV and HDV formats, the video signal is disturbed when the signal is
switched.

OFF : No output.
ON : Output on. Embedded audio and time code are also output.

Y/P

B/PR : Outputs analog component signals.

RGB : Output s analog RGB signals.
Y/C : Outputs YC separate signals.
Signals are output from terminals as shown in the table below depending on the settings.

Terminal

Y Component Y G Y

P

B

P

(When the [P

In DV format, a setup signal can be added to COMPONENT output and Y/C output.
(When Y/P
* You can also select a setup signal in the IEEE1394 signal input mode.

0.0% : No setup signal is added.

7.5% : A setup signal is added.

Initial settings: U model: 7.5% E model: 0.0%

R

BPR/TC] switch is set to PBPR)

MEMO

• SYNC signals are added to all channels for RGB signals.

• In HDV format, signals are output in analog component format regardless of these settings.

B/PR or Y/C is set for OUTPUT TERM [DV])

MEMO

• When recording composite video signals from an external device, set this item according to whether the input
signals include a setup signal.
X See “Recording Composite Video Signals from an External Device” on page 65.

• When the FRAME RATE item is set to 50/25, this item is not displayed.

B/PR terminal in DV format.

Setting

Y/P

B/PR RGB Y/C

Component PB BC

Component PR R

78

79

MENU SCREENS

CAMERA OPERATION
Menu Screen

The CAMERA OPERATION menu screen is only displayed in the Camera mode.

Item Function/Setting (bold characters indicate initial settings)

*1

AE LEVEL

ALC MAX Sets the maximum “ALC” value to automatically change the signal intensity level d epending on the brightness.

PRESET TEMP. Sets the basic color temperature when the [WHT.BAL] white balance selector switch c on page 15 is in the PRST

SMOOTH TRANS

*1

BARS

PAGE BACK The TOP MENU returns when the SHUTTER dial is pressed with the cursor at this position.

*1

REMOTE appears as the setting value of this item when the remote control unit is connected.

For adjusting the image level when using auto iris, “ALC” or “EEI”.
Increase value : Increases level.
Decrease value : Decreases level.
[Settings: –3, –2 - NORMAL (0) - 2, 3]

[Setting: 6 dB, 12 dB, 18 dB]

(PRESET) position.
3200K : Sets the basic color temperature to 3200K. (Use for light sources with a low color temperature,

5600K : Sets the basic color temperature to 5600K. (Use for light sources with a high color temperature,

MEMO

This item does not function when the FAW item on the SWITCH MODE menu screen is set to “PRESET”.

*1

Smoothens the transition when the [GAIN] switch b on page 15, or [WHT.BAL] switch c on page 15 is switched
over and achieves gradual change in place of sudden change.
However, the smooth transition function does not function when switching the [GAIN] switch set in ALC, FULL AUTO
ON.
OFF : Deactivates the smooth transition function.
ON : Activates the smooth transition function.

Sets whether or not color bars are output. (This is fixed at “OFF” when in FULL AUTO mode)
OFF : Color bars are not output.
ON : Color bars are output.

such as halogen lamps.)

such as sunlight.)

CAMERA PROCESS[1/2]
Menu Screen

The CAMERA PROCESS menu screen consists of two screens. (1/2 screen, 2/2 screen)
The CAMERA PROCESS menu screen is only displayed in camera mode.

Item Function/Setting (bold characters indicate initial settings)

MASTER BLACK

DETAIL

V/H BALANCE

H FREQUENCY

V FREQUENCY

SKIN DETECT

NEXT PAGE To display the CAMERA PROCESS[2/2] menu screen, move the cursor to this position and press the SHUTTER dial.

PAGE BACK The TOP MENU returns when the SHUTTER dial is pressed while the cursor is at this position.

*1

When the REC item on the VIDEO FORMAT[1/2] menu is set to “DV-60I” or “DV-50I”, “-----” is displayed and this cannot be
selected.

*2

REMOTE appears as the setting value of this item when the remote control unit is connected.

*2

Adjusts the pedestal level (master black) that serves as the reference black.
Increase the number : Raises the pedestal level.
Decrease the number : Lowers the pedestal level.

*2

LEVEL Sets the contour compensation level (amount of softening) for the skin detail function.

[Settings: MIN (–10), –9 - NORMAL (0) - 9, MAX (10)]

Adjusts the contour (detail) sharpness level.
Increase the number : Sharpens the contour.
Decrease the number : Softens the contour.
OFF : Does not function.
[Settings: OFF, MIN (–10), –9 - NORMAL (0) - 9, MAX (10)]
When this item is set to “OFF”, “-----” is displayed for the following menu items and they cannot be selected.

*2

Sets which contours (details) to sharpen, those in the horizontal (H) direction or those in the vertical (V) direction.
Increase the number : Sharpens H direction.
Decrease the number : Sharpens V direction.
[Settings: H-MIN (–5), –4 - NORMAL (0) - 4, H- MAX (5)]

*2

Changes the horizontal contour compensation frequency for the contours (details). Set this as appropriate for the
subject.
LOW : Enhances low frequency bands.

MIDDLE : Enhances middle frequency bands.
HIGH : Enhances high fre quency bands.

*1

Use this when shooting subjects with finely detailed patterns.
Changes the vertical contour compensation frequency for the contours (details). Compensates for distortion when
outputting progressive video to an interlaced monitor.
HIGH : Enhances high frequency ban ds.
LOW : Enhances low frequency bands.

*2

Sets ON/OFF for the skin detail function.
OFF : Turns off the skin detail function.
ON : Turns on the skin detail function. (Softens detected skin color area details.)
X See “Using the Skin Detail Function” on page 104.

This can only be selected when the SKIN DETECT item is set to ON.
–1 : Low contour compensation level (amount of softening)
–2 : Medium contour compensation level (amount of softening)
–3 : High contour compensation level (amount of softening)

Use this when shooting subjects with large patterns.

Use this when shooting subjects with small patterns.

80

81